the data saved in the hard disk of the machine may be...

Microsoft and Windows NT are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and othercountries.

NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries.Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and Adobe PostScript 3 are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

EtherTalk, Macintosh, and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.PCL, HP-GL, and HP-GL/2 are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation.

RSA and BSAFE are either registered trademarks or trademarks of RSA Security Inc. in the U.S.and/or other countries.

All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.Permission has been obtained from Microsoft Corporation for use of software screen shots.

For information on license, refer to About License.

XEROX, THE DOCUMENT COMPANY, Ethernet, CentreWare, and the stylized X are registered trademarks of XeroxCorporation. All Xerox and Fuji Xerox product names are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Xerox Corporation

and Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.DocuWorks is a trademark.

The data saved in the hard disk of the machine may be lost if there is any problem in the hard disk. FujiXerox is not responsible for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data loss.

Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus orcomputer hacking.

Important

(1) This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied ormodified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.

(2) Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.(3) We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages. (4) Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual. Unauthorized

operation can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorizedoperation of the equipment.

An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and ForeignTrade of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States.

Table of Contents

1

Table of Contents

Table of Contents ........................................................................................................ 1

1 Before Using the Machine ........................................................................................ 9Preface ...................................................................................................................... 10

Using This Guide ....................................................................................................... 11Guides Supplied.................................................................................................... 11Organization of this Guide .................................................................................... 11Conventions .......................................................................................................... 13

Safety Notes .............................................................................................................. 14Electrical Safety .................................................................................................... 14Machine Installation .............................................................................................. 16Operational Safety ................................................................................................ 19Consumable.......................................................................................................... 21

Regulation ................................................................................................................. 22Radio Frequency Emissions (Class B) ................................................................. 22Regulatory Information for RFID ........................................................................... 22Product Safety Certification (CB) .......................................................................... 22

Environment .............................................................................................................. 23

About License............................................................................................................ 24RSA BSAFE.......................................................................................................... 24Heimdal................................................................................................................. 24LAMA .................................................................................................................... 24JPEG Code ........................................................................................................... 25Libcurl ................................................................................................................... 25FreeBSD ............................................................................................................... 25OpenLDAP............................................................................................................ 26

Legal Notice............................................................................................................... 29

2 Product Overview .................................................................................................... 31

Machine Components................................................................................................ 32

Power On / Off........................................................................................................... 39Powering On ......................................................................................................... 39Powering Off ......................................................................................................... 39

Circuit Breaker........................................................................................................... 40

Power Saver mode .................................................................................................... 41Changing the Power Saver Mode Change Interval............................................... 41Exiting the Power Saver Mode.............................................................................. 44

Control panel ............................................................................................................. 45Customizing the Control Panel ............................................................................. 47Web Applications .................................................................................................. 48

3 Setting up the Network Controller ......................................................................... 49

2

Preparations ...............................................................................................................50

Installation Procedure.................................................................................................50Configuration on the Machine................................................................................50Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode .......................................................50Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Passcode.........................50Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu ........51Step 4 Setting an IP address .................................................................................51

Configuration on the Computer ..................................................................................54

4 Copy ..........................................................................................................................55

Copying Procedure.....................................................................................................56Step 1 Loading Documents ...................................................................................56Step 2 Selecting Features .....................................................................................58Step 3 Entering the Quantity..................................................................................59Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.................................................................................59Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in the Job Status ................................................60

Operations during Copying.........................................................................................61Stopping the Copy Job ..........................................................................................61Changing the Number of Copies ...........................................................................62Interrupting the Copy Job ......................................................................................62

General Settings.........................................................................................................63Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ...........................................63Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ...................................................66Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy) ...........................................................69Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).......................................................73Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing).................................................73Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet) ........................................73Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)........................................................73

Image Quality .............................................................................................................74Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).......................................................74Image Options (Lighten/Darken, Sharpness, Saturation) ......................................76Image Enhancement (Background Suppression/Contrast) ...................................76Color Effects (Selecting Image Quality).................................................................77Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ..............................................................78Color Shift (Adjusting Color Tone) .........................................................................78Gloss Level (Enhancing Gloss of the Document) ..................................................79

Layout Adjustment......................................................................................................80Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .............................802 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages).............................82Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)...................................83Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ......84Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents)....................85Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) ...................85Image Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position) .....................................................87Image Rotation

Table of Contents

3

(Making Copies with the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally) ...................... 89Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images).............................................. 90Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents) ................... 912 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)............................................................ 91

Output Format ........................................................................................................... 93Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) .................................................................. 94Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies) .................................................................. 97Transparency Separators (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies) ............................................... 99Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet) ..................................... 100Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)......................... 101Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)...................................... 102Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies)................................. 103Watermark (Printing Control Number on Background) ....................................... 110Tab Margin Shift (Copying on Tab Paper) .......................................................... 113Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down).............................................. 114Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded paper).................................................................. 115Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet) .................... 1152 Sided Copying (Making 2-sided Copies).......................................................... 116Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing) .............................................. 116ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card) ........................................ 118

Job Assembly .......................................................................................................... 119Build Job (Making Copies of Documents with Different Settings in a Single Operation) .... 119Sample Set (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy) ................................... 122Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals) .......................................................... 123Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area when Copying)....................... 124Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job) .......................... 126

5 Scan ........................................................................................................................ 127Scanning Procedure ................................................................................................ 128

Step 1 Loading Documents................................................................................. 128Step 2 Selecting Features................................................................................... 130Step 3 Starting the Scan Job .............................................................................. 132Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in the Job Status ............................................. 133Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data........................................................................ 133

Stopping the Scan Job ............................................................................................ 134

General Settings...................................................................................................... 135Scanning Color (Selecting the Color to Scan) .................................................... 1352 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ................................... 136Original Type (Select the Document Type)......................................................... 137

Image Quality .......................................................................................................... 138Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph) ..................................................... 138Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Contrast)....................................... 138Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting

4

contrast)...............................................................................................................139Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)........................140Color Space (Specifying Color Space) ................................................................140

Layout Adjustment....................................................................................................141Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)..........................................1412 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ....................................141Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .......................142Original Size (Specifying an Original Size) ..........................................................143Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ......144Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) .................145Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)...................................................146

Output Format ..........................................................................................................147Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio) .........................147

6 Stored Programming..............................................................................................149

Stored Programming Overview ................................................................................150

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs ...................................................151Registering Stored Programs ..............................................................................152Registering Stored Program (Build Job) ..............................................................153Deleting Stored Programs ...................................................................................154Entering/Changing Stored Program Name..........................................................154Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs..................................................155

Calling Stored Programs ..........................................................................................156

7 Paper and Other Media ..........................................................................................157Paper Types .............................................................................................................158

Supported Paper Weight and Quantity ................................................................158

Loading Paper ..........................................................................................................162Loading Paper in the Trays 1 to 2........................................................................163Loading Paper in the Tray 3 ................................................................................164Loading Paper in the Tray 4 ................................................................................165Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass) .................................................................166Loading Tab Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass) ..........................................................167Loading Paper in the Tray 6 (High Capacity).......................................................168Loading Paper in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity) ...............................................169Loading Tab Paper in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity) ........................................170Loading Paper in the Tray 8 (Interposer).............................................................171Loading Tab Paper in the Tray 8 (Interposer)......................................................171Facilitating Feeding of Heavyweight Paper Loaded in Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity).............................................................................................172

Changing the Paper Size for the Trays ....................................................................173Changing the Paper Size for the Trays 1 to 2......................................................173Changing the Paper Size for the Trays 3.............................................................174Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 4 ..............................................................175Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 6 (High Capacity).....................................176

Table of Contents

5

Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity) ............................ 178

Changing Paper Settings......................................................................................... 179

8 System Settings..................................................................................................... 183

System Settings Procedure ..................................................................................... 184Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode .................................................... 184Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Passcode ...................... 184Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu...... 185Step 4 Selecting an Item from the [System Settings] Screen ............................. 185Step 5 Setting the Feature .................................................................................. 186Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode ....................................................... 186

System Settings Menu List ...................................................................................... 187

Entering Text ........................................................................................................... 193

Common Settings .................................................................................................... 194Machine Clock/Timers ........................................................................................ 195Audio Tones........................................................................................................ 198Screen/Button Settings ....................................................................................... 200Paper Tray Settings ............................................................................................ 203Image Quality Adjustment................................................................................... 211Reports ............................................................................................................... 214Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 215Watermark .......................................................................................................... 216Other Settings ..................................................................................................... 217

Copy Mode Settings ................................................................................................ 224General Settings Tab - Features Allocation ........................................................ 225Preset Buttons .................................................................................................... 225Copy Defaults ..................................................................................................... 226Copy Control ....................................................................................................... 231Original Size Defaults ......................................................................................... 237Reduce/Enlarge Presets ..................................................................................... 238Custom Colors .................................................................................................... 238Annotation - Create Stamps................................................................................ 239

Scan Mode Settings ................................................................................................ 240General Settings Tab .......................................................................................... 241Scan Defaults...................................................................................................... 242Original Size Defaults ......................................................................................... 243Output Size Defaults ........................................................................................... 244Reduce/Enlarge Presets ..................................................................................... 244Other Settings ..................................................................................................... 245

Network Controller Settings..................................................................................... 247Network Settings................................................................................................. 247

System Administrator Settings ................................................................................ 249System Administrator Login ID ........................................................................... 249System Administrator’s Passcode ...................................................................... 250

6

Maximum Login Attempts ....................................................................................251

Login Setup/Auditron Administration ........................................................................252Create/Check User Accounts ..............................................................................253Reset User Accounts ...........................................................................................256System Administrator’s Meter (Copy Jobs) .........................................................257User Details Setup...............................................................................................257Passcode Entry from Control Panel.....................................................................258Login Setup/Auditron Mode .................................................................................258

9 Job Status ...............................................................................................................261

Job Status Overview ................................................................................................262

Checking Current/Pending Jobs...............................................................................263

Checking Completed Jobs .......................................................................................264

Handling Error Terminations ....................................................................................265

10 Machine Status .......................................................................................................267Overview of Machine Status.....................................................................................268

Machine Status.........................................................................................................269Machine Information ............................................................................................269Paper Tray ...........................................................................................................271Overwrite Hard Disk.............................................................................................271

Billing Meter/Print Report .........................................................................................272Billing Meter .........................................................................................................272User Account Billing Meter ..................................................................................273Print Report/List ...................................................................................................275

Supplies....................................................................................................................278

Faults........................................................................................................................279

11 Authentication and Auditron Administration ......................................................281Overview of Authentication.......................................................................................282

Users Controlled by Authentication .....................................................................282Types of Authentication .......................................................................................282Features Controlled by Authentication.................................................................283

Overview of Auditron Administration ........................................................................284Authentication and Auditron Administration.........................................................284Manageable Features and Services ....................................................................284

12 Maintenance............................................................................................................285Replacing Supplies...................................................................................................286

Replacing Toner Cartridges.................................................................................287Replacing the Waste Toner Container.................................................................289Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (for customers having a spot maintenance contract)...........................................291Replacing Drum Cartridge R2/R3/R4 (for customers having a spot maintenance contract)...........................................294

Table of Contents

7

Replacing the Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker ............................................................................ 298Replacing the Booklet Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher with Booklet Maker or D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker...................................................................... 299Replacing the Staple Cartridge for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker................... 301Emptying Punch Scrap Container for C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker ............................................................................ 303Emptying the Punch Scrap Container for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker......... 304Replacing the Staple Scrap Container for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker........ 305

Cleaning the Machine.............................................................................................. 307Cleaning the Exterior .......................................................................................... 307Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass ......................................... 307Cleaning the Film Section and Document Feeder Glass .................................... 308Cleaning Document Feeder Rollers.................................................................... 309

Executing Calibration............................................................................................... 310

Printing a Report/List ............................................................................................... 315

13 Problem Solving .................................................................................................... 317Troubleshooting....................................................................................................... 318

Machine Trouble...................................................................................................... 320

Image Quality Problems .......................................................................................... 324

Trouble during Copying ........................................................................................... 329Unable to Copy ................................................................................................... 329The Copy Result is not What was Expected....................................................... 330

Error Codes ............................................................................................................. 334Other Errors ........................................................................................................ 343

Paper Jams ............................................................................................................. 344Paper Jams in the Trays 1 to 2 ........................................................................... 345Paper Jams in the Tray 3.................................................................................... 345Paper Jams in the Tray 4.................................................................................... 346Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass)..................................................................... 346Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass) when A3+ High Capacity Tray is installed .. 347Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) .......................................................... 348Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)................................................... 350Paper Jams in the Transfer Module.................................................................... 353Paper Jams in the Bottom Left Cover ................................................................. 354Paper Jams in the Bottom Right Cover............................................................... 355Paper Jams in the Output Tray ........................................................................... 357Paper Jams in the C-Finisher or the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker .................. 357Paper jams in the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker ............................................. 370

Document Jams ...................................................................................................... 381

Stapler Faults .......................................................................................................... 384Staple Jams in the Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker ............................................................................ 385Staple Jams in the Booklet Staple Cartridge

8

for C-Finisher with Booklet Maker or D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker ................386Staple Jams in the Staple Cartridge for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker ............388

Staple Cartridge Taken Off from Unit for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker...............390

Solving Curled Output ..............................................................................................392

14 Appendix .................................................................................................................393

Specifications ...........................................................................................................394

Printable Area...........................................................................................................402

List of Options ..........................................................................................................403

Notes and Restrictions .............................................................................................404Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine..............................................404Notes and Restrictions on Interrupting Job..........................................................404

Index ...............................................................................................................................405

1 Before Using the Machine

This chapter contains descriptions about how to use this document, as well as cautions on using the product safely and legally.

Preface .......................................................................................................10

Using This Guide ........................................................................................11

Safety Notes ...............................................................................................14

Regulation...................................................................................................22

Environment................................................................................................23

About License .............................................................................................24

Legal Notice................................................................................................29


10

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Preface

Thank you for selecting the Fuji Xerox DocuColor 6075II/5065II.This guide provides all the necessary copy/print/scan operating procedures, maintenance information like how to clear paper jams, daily care, setting various items, and precautions.This guide assumes that the operator has a basic knowledge of the operating environment of the personal computer in use, networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer.Please read this guide thoroughly to obtain the best performance on this product. After reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. It will be useful in case you forget how to perform operations or if a problem occurs with the machine.For instructions on configuring your network environment, refer to the Network Administrator Guide. For information about optional accessories for the printer functionality, also refer to the guide provided with each optional accessory.Since the machine is equipped with anti-counterfeit features, in some rare cases, certain kinds of documents may be unable to copy.

May 2007Fuji Xerox

In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol . Always read and follow the instructions before performing the required procedures.

The equipment is certified by NEMKO in compliance with [IEC60950-1 (AS/NZS 3260)]. The equipment is manufactured under an ISO 9001 Quality System. The equipment is also certified in compliance with applicable standards by various national bodies.The equipment was tested and is certified by the New Zealand Ministry of Commerce in conformance with CISPR publ. 22 (AS/NZISS CISPR22:2002) which relates to radio frequency interference regulations, and also complies with the Australian Communication Authority requirements.

NOTE: Machines intended for use in South Korea and Taiwan have been certified separately in compliance with their requirements.Any unauthorized alteration, which includes the addition of new functions or the connection of external devices, may impact this certification.Contact your local Xerox representative for a list of approved accessories.

Using This Guide

11

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Using This Guide

This section describes the organization of this guide.

Guides SuppliedWe provide the following guides for optimum usage of the machine.

Included ManualsSeveral manuals are included with this product. They are referred to as accompanying manuals.These accompanying manuals include descriptions on configurations and operation of the product.The below manuals are included with the machine.

User Guide (This Document)This guide describes all the necessary steps for copy/print/scan, clearing paper jams, daily care, setting the various items and safety information.

USER DOCUMENTATIONS for Network ControllerA guide to installing print driver, configuring the Network Controller. This manual is included in the Network Controller.

Guides for Optional AccessoriesOptional accessories are also available for the machine. User Guides are provided with the optional accessories exclusively for the DocuColor 6075II/5065II. These User Guides are referred to as "guides for optional accessories". Guides for optional accessories are provided in two forms, printed or as On-line Help.Guides for optional accessories describe all the necessary steps for operating optional accessories and installing software.

Organization of this GuideThis guide consists of the following chapters.

1 Before Using the MachineDescribes how to use this document, as well as cautions on using the product safely and legally.

2 Product OverviewDescribes basic information such as identifying the major components, how to switch the machine on and off, how to use the touch screen, and how to set the power saver feature.

3 Setting up the Network Controller Describes how to configure the Network Controller.

4 CopyDescribes the basic operations and features of copying.


12

Before U

sing the Machine

1

5 ScanDescribes the basic operations and features of scanning.

6 Stored ProgrammingDescribes the stored programming features that enables to record a series of operations.

7 Paper and Other MediaDescribes the types of paper that can be used on the machine, precautions when handling paper, and how to load paper in trays.

8 System SettingsDescribes how to use the system settings.

9 Job StatusDescribes the job status feature.

10 Machine StatusDescribes the machine status feature.

11 Authentication and Auditron AdministrationThe machine has an authorization feature to restrict use of features of the machine, as well as administration features to monitor usage statuses.

12 MaintenanceDescribes procedures for replacing supplies, cleaning the machine, calibration, and printing reports/lists.

13 Problem SolvingDescribes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.

14 AppendixDescribes the specifications, printable area, ESC/P emulation, PDF direct print, optional accessories list, and cautions/restrictions.

Using This Guide

13

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Conventions

In this document, “computer” refers to a personal computer or workstation.

The following icons are used in this guide.Important Indicates important information that you should read.Note Indicates additional information on operations or features.

The following conventions are used in this guide:" " : The cross-reference is within this guide." " : Refers to names of CD-ROM, features, and touch screen

messages and input text.[ ] : Refers to folders, files, applications, button or menu names

displayed in the touch screen, as well as the names of menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen and their buttons and menu names.

< > button: Indicates a hardware button on the computer.< > key: Indicates a key on the keyboard of the computer.

Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows:, ,Long Edge Feed (LEF): Loading with one of the long edges of the document

or paper., ,Short Edge Feed (SEF): Loading with one of the short edges of the document

or paper.LEF Orientation SEF Orientation

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction


14

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Safety Notes

Before using this product, read "Safety Notes"carefully for safety use.This product and recommended supplies have been tested and found to comply with strict safety requirements including safety agency approvals and compliance with environmental standards. Follow the following instructions for safety use..

Follow all warning instructions marked on this product. The warning marks stand for thefollowings:

Electrical Safety

This product shall be operated by the electrical supply as indicated on the product's data plate label. Consult your local power company to check if your electrical supply meets the requirements.

WARNINGAny unauthorized alteration including an addition of new functions or connection to external devices may not be covered by the product warranty. Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for more information.

Used for item that if not followed strictly, can lead death or severe or fatal injuries and the possibility to do it is comparatively high.

Used for items that if not followed strictly, can lead to severe or fatal injuries.

Used for items that if not followed strictly, can cause injuries to user or damages to machine.

A symbol for items to pay attention to when handling machine. Follow instructions carefully to use machine safely.

A symbol for prohibited items. Follow instructions carefully to avoid any dangerous acts.

A symbol for items that must be performed. Follow instructions carefully to carry out these essential tasks.

Caution Flammable Explodable Electricshock

Heatedsurface

Moving object

Pinchedfingers

Prohibited No fire Do nottouch

Do not usein bathroom

Do nottear down

Keep awayfrom wet

Never touchwith wet hand

Instructions Unplug Ground/Earth

Safety Notes

15

Before U

sing the Machine

1

WARNING: Connect this product to a protective earth circuit.This product is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin. The plug fits only into an earthed electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. If the plug doesn't fit to the outlet, contact an electrician to replace the outlet to avoid risk of electric shock. Never use an earthed adapter plug to connect the product to the electrical outlet that has no earth connection terminal.Improper connection of a grounding conductor may cause electric shock.Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet. To prevent overheat and a fire accident, do not use an extension cord, a multi-plug adaptor or a multiple connector. Consult your local Fuji Xerox representative to check if an outlet is grounded.Connect this product to a branch circuit or an outlet that has larger capacity than the rated ampere and voltage of this product. See the data plate on the rear panel of this product for its rated ampere and voltage.Never touch the power cord with wet hands. It may cause electric shock.

Do not place an object on the power cord.

Always keep the plug connection free of dust. The dusty and damp environment may bring about minute electric current in a connector. It may generate heat and eventually cause a fire accident.To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident, only use the power cord supplied with this product or the ones designated by Fuji Xerox.The power cord is exclusive use for this product. Do not use it for any other product.Do not damage or alter the power cord. Damage and alteration may generate heat and eventually cause electric shock or a fire accident.If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its replacement. Do not use a damaged or uninsulated cord to avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident.

When cleaning this product, switch off the product and its switchboard (branch circuit). Access to a live machine interior may cause electric shock.

Do not unplug or re-plug this product with the switch on. Plugging and unplugging a live connector may deform the plug and generate heat, and eventually cause a fire accident.

Hold the plug not the cord when unplugging this product, or it may damage the cord and cause electric shock or a fire accident.

Switch off and unplug the product when it is not used over weekends or long holidays. It may cause deterioration of insulations and eventually electric shock or a fire accident.


16

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Once a month, switch off this product and check ifthe power cord is plugged firmly into an electrical outlet;the plug is not excessively heated, rusted or bent;he plug and electrical outlet are free of dust; andthe power cord is not cracked or worn down.

Once you notice any unusual condition, switch off and unplug this product first and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Machine Installation

Do not locate this product where people might step on or trip over the power cord. Friction or excessive pressure may generate heat and eventually cause electric shock or a fire accident.

Never locate this product in the following places:Near radiators or any other heat sourcesNear volatile flammable materials such as curtainsIn the hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environmentIn the place receiving direct sunlightNear cookers or humidifiers

Locate this product on the level and sturdy surface that can withstand a weight of 550 Kg. Otherwise, if tilted, the product may fall over and cause injuries.

Locate this product in a well-ventilated area. Do not obstruct ventilation openings of the product. Poor ventilation may cause overheat and a fire accident. Keep the minimum clearance as follows for ventilation and an access to the power plug. Unplug the product if an abnormal condition is noted.

20

915

597

323

8020

1855

1674

1574

469

(Unit:mm)

Main unit

Safety Notes

17

Before U

sing the Machine

1

20

915

597

323

8020

1855

2196

2096

469

(Unit:mm)

When C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed

20

915

597

323

8020

1855

2525

2425

(Unit:mm)

When folding unit D2 (optional) is installed to D2-Finisher with Booklet

20

915

597

323

8020

1855

2325

2225

(Unit:mm)

When D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed


18

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Do not incline the product at more than 10 degree angle. Otherwise, it may fall over and cause injuries.

Always lock the wheels of this product after installation. Otherwise, it may fall over or slide and cause injuries.

To keep this product in a good performance and condition, always use it in the following environment:

Temperature: 10 - 32 °CHumidity: 15 - 85 %

When the product is left in a chilly room and the room is rapidly warmed up by heater, dew condensation may form inside the product and cause a partial deletion on printing.

20

915

597

323

8020

1855

2145

2045

(Unit:mm)

When A3+ High Capacity Tray (optional) is installed

Front

Back Right

Left

Safety Notes

19

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Operational Safety

The operator's product maintenance procedures are described in the customer documentation supplied with this product. Do not carry out any other maintenance procedures not described in the documentation.This product features safety design not to allow operators access to hazard areas. The hazard areas are isolated from operators by covers or protectors which require a tool to remove. To prevent electric shock and injuries, never remove those covers and protectors.To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident, switch off and unplug the product promptly in the following conditions, then contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

The product emits smoke or its surface is unusually hot.The product emits unusual noise or odor.The power cord is cracked or worn down.A circuit breaker, fuse or any other safety device is activated.Any liquid is spilled into the product.The product is soaked in water.Any part of the product is damaged.

Do not insert any object into slots or openings of this product.Do not place any of the followings on the product:

Liquid container such as flower vases or coffee cupsMetal parts such as staples or clipsHeavy objects

If liquid is spilled over or metal parts are slipped into the product, it may cause electric shock or a fire accident.Do not use conductive paper such as carbonic paper or coated paper. When paper jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a fire accident.

When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it. Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product. Never use aerosol cleaners, or it may catch fire and cause explosion.Never play the CD-ROM supplied with the product on an audio player. Always use a CD-ROM player. Otherwise, large sound may damage audio players or your ears.Laser SafetyCAUTION: Any operations or adjustments not stated in the operation manual may cause hazardous light exposure and eventually burn injuries or loss of eyesight.This product has been tested and found to comply with the Class 1 Laser Equipment requirements defined by the international standard IEC60825 and has no light exposure hazard. The product has no hazardous light emission as it features light protection components and covers to shut in all light beam during operation and maintenance.

Always follow all warning instructions marked on or supplied with this product.To avoid the risk of burn injuries and electric shock, never touch the area with the "High Temperature" or "High Voltage" marks on.


20

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Keep electrical and mechanical safety interlocks active. Keep the safety interlocks away from magnetic materials. Magnetic materials may accidentally activate the product and cause injuries or electric shock.A circuit breaker is embedded in this product. If current leakage occurs, the circuit breaker automatically cuts off power circuit to prevent electric shock and a fire accident. The circuit breaker is normally ON ("|"). Check once a month if the circuit breaker works properly in accordance with the following procedures: 1) Press the TEST button. The breaker switch is turned Off ("O"). (This

means that the breaker is OK.)2) Return the breaker switch to On ("|").

If the circuit does not work properly, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Do not attempt to remove a paper jammed deeply inside the product, particularly a paper wrapped around a fuser or a heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause injuries or burns. Switch off the product promptly and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.Never touch the paper output area of the finisher during operation. It may cause injuries.

Be careful in removing jammed staples.

Be careful not to get injured by waste staples when detaching a staple dust box.

Waste staples may come out with output paper. Be careful not to get injured by the staples.

Never touch safety interlocks. When a front cover is open, safety interlocks become activated to stop the machinery. Do not apply pressure on safety interlocks with a coin or screwdriver. Otherwise, the machinery may become activated and cause injuries.

TEST button

Breaker switch

TEST button

Breaker switch

Safety Notes

21

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Do not staple punched holes of paper. Sharp points of a staple may cause injuries.

Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the platen glass. It may break the glass and cause injuries.

To move this product to another location, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Ventilate well during extended operation or mass copying. It may affect the office air environment due to odor such as ozone in a poorly ventilated room.Provide proper ventilation to ensure safety and comfort of the office environment.

Consumable

Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on its package or container.

Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum cleaner for the spills. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum cleaner and cause explosion. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal.

Keep the toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and consult a physician immediately.When replacing the toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth as well as inhalation.If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with water.If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water and consult a physician immediately.


22

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Regulation

Radio Frequency Emissions (Class B)This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to the International Standard for Electromagnetic Interference (CISPR Publ. 22) and Radiocommunications Act 1992 in Australia/New Zealand. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning this product off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between this product and the receiver.

Connect this product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.Changes and modifications to this product not specifically approved by Fuji Xerox may void the user’s authority to operate this product.

Regulatory Information for RFIDThis product contains Radio Frequency Identification system device (RFID) and it is certified in compliance with applicable local laws and/or regulations.

Product Safety Certification (CB)This product has been tested and found to comply with IEC60950-1:ed.1 and certified by NEMKO.NEMKO : IEC60950-1:ed. 1

Environment

23

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Environment

Emissions of dust, ozone and styrene from this product have been tested and found to comply with the Eco Mark criteria on chemical emission for copiers. According to the test procedures defined by German Blue Angel RAL-UZ62: 2002, the test was performed under the condition of monochrome copying, using the toner type DocuColor 6075II/5065II Toner (Black) that is recommended for this product.

For environmental protection and efficient use of resources, Fuji Xerox reuses returned toner cartridges to make recycle parts, recycle materials or energy recovery.

Proper disposal is required for drums and toner cartridges no longer needed. Do not open drum and toner cartridge containers. Return them to your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Dead rechargeable batteries that are removed from disposed machines are precious resources. Fuji Xerox reuses those batteries to make recycle materials and energy recovery. Return them to your local Fuji Xerox representative.

For recovery of scarce resources, Fuji Xerox reuses the rechargeable batteries used in this product after the product is returned. Those batteries can be reused to make recycle materials and energy recovery.


24

Before U

sing the Machine

1

About License

RSA BSAFE

This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc.

HeimdalCopyright (c)2000 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

LAMALZMA SDK 4.21 Copyright (c) 1999-2005 Igor Pavlov (2005-06-08)http://www.7-zip.org/

LZMA SDK 4.22 Copyright (c) 1999-2005 Igor Pavlov (2005-06-10)http://www.7-zip.org/

About License

25

Before U

sing the Machine

1

JPEG CodeOur printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.

LibcurlCOPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright (c) 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <[email protected]>. All rights reserved. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

FreeBSDThis product contains the part of FreeBSD codes.

The FreeBSD Copyright Copyright 1994-2006 The FreeBSD Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.


26

Before U

sing the Machine

1

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE FREEBSD PROJECT ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FREEBSD PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the FreeBSD Project.

OpenLDAPCopyright 1998-2006 The OpenLDAP Foundation All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License.

A copy of this license is available in the file LICENSE in the top-level directory of the distribution or, alternatively, at <http://www.OpenLDAP.org/license.html>.

OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.

Individual files and/or contributed packages may be copyright by other parties and/or subject to additional restrictions.

This work is derived from the University of Michigan LDAP v3.3 distribution. Information con-cerning this software is available at <http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html>.

This work also contains materials derived from public sources.

Additional information about OpenLDAP can be obtained at <http://www.openldap.org/>.---Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Kurt D. Zeilenga.Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Net Boolean Incorporated.Portions Copyright 2001-2006 IBM Corporation.All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License.---

About License

27

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Howard Y.H. Chu.Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Symas Corporation.Portions Copyright 1998-2003 Hallvard B. Furuseth.All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that this notice is preserved.The names of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without their specific prior written permission. This software is provided ''as is'' without express or implied warranty.---Portions Copyright (c) 1992-1996 Regents of the University of Michigan.All rights reserved.Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this notice is preserved and that due credit is given to the University of Michigan at Ann Arbor. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. This software is provided ''as is'' without express or implied warranty.------------------------------------------The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2.8, 17 August 2003

Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and

notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution, and

3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document..

The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time.Each revision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-AGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,


28

Before U

sing the Machine

1

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLI-GENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders.

OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.

Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA. All Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted.

Legal Notice

29

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Legal Notice

Copying or printing certain documents may be illegal in your country. Penalties of fines or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty. The following are examples of items that may be illegal to copy or print in your country.

Currency

Banknotes and checks

Bank and government bonds and securities

Passports and identification cards

Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner

Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments

This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, contact your legal counsel.

2 Product Overview

This chapter describes basic operation about the machine, such as the names of each component, switching on and off of the machine, and the operation of the touch screen and power saving settings.

Machine Components.................................................................................32

Power On / Off ............................................................................................39

Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................40

Power Saver mode .....................................................................................41

Control panel ..............................................................................................45

2 Product Overview

32

Product Overview

2

Machine Components

This section describes the main components and their functions of the DocuColor 6075II/5065II (hereinafter called “the machine”).

Machine Components

33

Product Overview

2

No. Component Function

1 Control panel Consists of operation buttons, LED indicators, and a touch screen.Refer to "Control panel" (P.45).

2 Duplex automatic document feeder

This automatically feeds 2 sided originals from a stack.

3 Document glass Originals are loaded.

4 Power switch Switches the power of the machine on/off.

5 Toner cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to replace the toner cartridge.

6 Front cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams or replace supplies.

7 Tray 1, 2, 3, 4 Load paper here.

8 Bottom left cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.If the Tray 6 is installed in the machine, move the Tray 6 to the left first.

9 Locking casters Used for locking the wheels of the machine. Lock these casters after moving the machine to its installation site.

10 Tray 6 (optional) Load paper here.

11 Tray 6 top cover Move the Tray 6 to the left and then open the top cover to clear paper jams.

12 Tray 5 (bypass) Used for loading non-standard paper (thick-stock paper, and other special media) that cannot be loaded in the Trays 1 to 4, and 6.

13 Tray 5 (bypass) top cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.

14 scanner connector Use to connect a scan cable for the Network Controller.

15 Ethernet connector Use to connect a network cable.

16 Control panel (on the right) This control panel is installed to the right of the machine.It consists of operation buttons, LED indicators, and a touch screen.Refer to "Control panel" (P.45).

2 Product Overview

34

Product Overview

2

Machine Components

35

Product Overview

2


17 Left cover The left cover slightly opens when the top cover is opened. Open this cover widely to clear paper jams.

18 Top cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.

19 <Confirmation> indicator This indicator lights to confirm that the document is loaded correctly.

20 Document guides Use this guides to align the edges of the document.

21 Document feeder tray Load documents here.

22 Document output tray Receives scanned documents.

23 Document stopper Used when copying or scanning large size documents such as A3. Open the stopper rightward when using it.

24 Output tray Receives documents.Two types of trays are available: a normal output tray and an optional offset stacking tray.Note • When paper whose size is less than A4 is output from the machine with

an offset catch tray, push in the extension flap.

25 Circuit breaker This breaker automatically turns the machine off when a current leakage is detected.

26 Bottom right cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.If a finisher is installed in the machine, open the front cover of the finisher first.

27 Waste toner container cover

Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to replace the waste toner container.

28 Waste toner container Used to collect waste toner.

29 Fuser Fuses the printed image on the paper by fusing the toner. Do not touch this unit as it is extremely hot.

30 Lever Used to draw out the transfer unit.

31 Transfer unit Transfers toner images on the drum to paper. Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.

32 Drum cartridges A drum cartridge comprises of photosensitive elements. Drum cartridges are arranged in order R1, R2, R3 and R4 from the left as you face the main body.

33 Toner cartridges Four toner (image forming powder) cartridges are provided: Black (K1, K2), Cyan (C), Magenta (M) and Yellow (Y).

2 Product Overview

36

Product Overview

2

A3+ high capacity tray


1 A3+ High Capacity Tray (Tray 6)

Load paper stock here. When the loaded tray is closed, the tray position is automatically adjusted in the front/back direction based on the center of paper.

2 High Capacity Tray Unit This unit carries sheets of paper fed from the High Capacity Tray or the Tray 5 (bypass) to the machine. Open the cover to access the inside of the machine to clear paper jams.

3 Tray 5 (bypass) This tray is used for loading non-standard paper (thick-stock paper, and other special media) that cannot be loaded in the Tray 1, 2, 3, or 4.

4 Tray 5 (bypass)top cover

Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to clear paper jams.

5 Circuit breaker This breaker automatically turns the machine off when a current leakage is detected.

2

1

4

5 3

Machine Components

37

Product Overview

2

C-Finisher, C-Finisher with Booklet Maker

Note • The C-Finisher and the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker are optional. In this manual, the C-Finisher or the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker is abbreviated as “finisher”.


1 Punch scrap container Collects the scraps from the puncher. Draw out the box when throwing the dust away.

2 10 bin sorter(C-Finisher with Booklet Maker with 10-bin sorter only)

Documents can be delivered to the selected bins. This sorter has a maximum capacity of 100 sheets of paper (P paper) per bin.

3 Output tray Receives documents.

4 Exit cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.

5 Finisher tray Receives documents.

6 Staple cartridge Staples are stored. Remove this cartridge to replace staples or clear staple jams.

7 Booklet tray(C-Finisher with Booklet Maker only)

Receives documents, when folding is selected in the Booklet Creation.

8 Front cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper or staple jams, replace staples, or throw punch dust away.

9 Booklet unit(C-Finisher with Booklet Maker only)

This unit is for folding documents in half and stapling the folded documents.

10 Booklet staple cartridge Two staple cartridges for saddle stitch are installed. Remove this cartridge to replace staples or clear staple jams.

8

9 7

6

4

1

5

3

2

2 Product Overview

38

Product Overview

2

D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker

Note • The D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker is optional. In this manual, the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker is abbreviated as "finisher".


1 Interposer (Cover/Transparency separator tray)

Load Papers for covers or transparency separators. Papers loaded here will not be used for copying or printing.

2 De-curl button Press this button to decurl copied paper.

3 Output tray Receives copies when you select [Automatic sorting], [Collated], [Uncollated] or normal copy.

4 Finisher tray Receives copies when you select stapled, punched and Z-folded copies.

5 Booklet output tray Receives copies when you select Bi-Fold or Bi-Fold + Stapling.

6 Booklet output tray button Press this button to deliver booklets to removal position.

7 Right cover Open to clear paper jam; replace staples or clear jammed staples; or replace the scraps from the puncher.

8 Staple cartridges for booklet

There are two staple cartridges for booklet. Remove these cartridges to replace staples and clear staple jams.

9 Staple cartridge This cartridge contains staples. Remove this cartridge to replace staples and clear staple jams.

10 Punch scrap container Collects the scraps from the puncher. Open throw away the scraps.

11 Tri-Fold output tray Receives copies when you select Tri-Fold in or Tri-Fold out.

12 Tri-Fold output tray button Press this button to open Tri-Fold output tray.

13 Left cover Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to clear paper jams.

14 Staple cartridge storage space

Staple cartridge for replacement can be stored.

1 23

4

5

6

7

811 10

1314

129

Power On / Off

39

Product Overview

2

Power On / Off

Switch on the power before operating the machine.The machine is ready for operation within 150 seconds after the power is switched on. The time may vary depending on the machine configuration. Turn the machine off at the end of the day or when it is not in use for a long period of time. Also, use [Power Saving] feature when not in use for a while to reduce the power consumption.Important • Switching off the power of the machine may cause loss of data being processed.For information about power saving feature, refer to "Power Saver mode" (P.41).

Powering OnThe procedure for turning on the power is as follows.

1 Open the cover and press the power switch to the [ | ] position to turn the power on.Note • The “Please wait...” message

indicates that the machine is warming up. The machine cannot be used while it is warming up.

Powering OffThe procedure for turning the power off is as follows.Important • Switching off the power of the machine during data processing stored in the memory may

cause loss of data being processed.

1 Before turning the power off, make sure that all copy or print jobs have completely finished. Also, make sure that the Online indicator is not lit.Important • Never turn the power off in the following instances:

• While data is being received• While jobs are being printed• While jobs are being copied• While a scan is being executed

2 Press the power switch to the [ ] position.Important • Power off processing is performed internally on the machine for about 30 seconds after the

power switch is turned off. Therefore, do not unplug the power cord from the power outlet immediately after turning the power switch off.

Note • Before you turn the power back on after turning it off, first make sure that it has been more than 30 seconds after the touch screen went out.

2 Product Overview

40

Product Overview

2

Circuit Breaker

The machine is provided with circuit breakers.In the event of a current leakage, the breakers will automatically cut off the power circuit to prevent any leakage or fire from occurring.The circuit breaker is normally pressed to the upper side, respectively, as shown in the figure on the right.If the circuit breakers are pressed to the lower sides, respectively, unusual conditions may occur. Please contact our Customer Support Center.

Breaker switch

TEST button

Power Saver mode

41

Product Overview

2

Power Saver mode

The machine is installed with a Power Saver feature that will automatically cut off the electricity to the machine if no copy or print data is received for a certain duration.The Power Saver feature has two modes, [Low Power mode] and [Sleep mode].The machine enters the [Low Power mode] after the preset time has elapsed if the machine is left unused for a fixed period of time. The machine then enters the [Sleep mode] if a further preset time elapses.

Low Power Mode(Power consumption: 221.6 W)In this mode, the power to the control panel and fuser unit is lowered to save power.The touch screen goes out, and the <Power Saver> button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press the <Power Saver> button. The <Power Saver> button goes out to indicate that the Power Saver feature is cancelled.

Sleep Mode(Power consumption: 92.2W)In this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low Power mode.The touch screen goes out, and the <Power Saver> button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press the <Power Saver> button. The <Power Saver> button goes out to indicate that the Power Saver feature is cancelled.

Changing the Power Saver Mode Change IntervalThe procedure for setting the Power Saver feature is as follows.To activate the Power Saver feature, set the Sleep Mode button to Enabled, and set both the times until the activation of Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode.Note • The time to activation of Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode can each be specified in 1

minute increments, from 1 to 240 minutes.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

<Log In/Out> button

2 Product Overview

42

Product Overview

2

2 Enter the system administrator UserID with the numeric keypad or a keyboard displayed by pressing [Keyboard], and select [Confirm].Note • The default system

administrator UserID value is "11111". When using the authentication manager feature, a Passcode is required. The default Passcode value is "x-admin".

3 Select [System Settings].


5 Select [Common Settings].

Power Saver mode

43

Product Overview

2

6 Select [Machine Clock/Timers].

7 Select [Auto Power Saver], and select [Change Settings].

8 Using [ ] [ ], configure a power saver mode migration time in 1 minute increments.

From Last Selection to Low Power ModeSet the time to move to the [Low Power Mode] after the last operation.Note • The default for [From Last Selection to Low Power Mode] is [15] minutes. The Low Power

Mode cannot be disabled.

From Last Selection to Sleep ModeSet the time to move to the [Sleep Mode] after the last operation.Note • The default for [From Last Selection to Sleep Mode] is [60] minutes. Configure the [From

Last Selection to Sleep Mode] time to be longer than the [From Last Selection to Low Power Mode] time.

9 Select [Save].

10 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [System Settings] screen is displayed.

11 Select [Exit] to exit the System Administration mode.

2 Product Overview

44

Product Overview

2

Exiting the Power Saver ModeThe following describes how to exit the Power Saver mode.The Power Saver mode is exited in the following instances:

Pressing the <Power Saver> button

Receiving data

1 Press the <Power Saver> button.

@ @

<Power Saver> button

Control panel

45

Product Overview

2

Control panel

The following describes the names and functions of components on the control panel.


1 Touch screen This display displays messages required for operation and buttons for various features. You can directly touch the touch screen to instruct operations in screens and set features.

2 <Copy><Custom 2><Custom 3>

Used to call a custom feature.For information about registering a feature with a button, refer to "Screen/Button Settings" (P.200).

3 <All Services> Used to display the [All Services] screen.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <All Services> button.You can change the features that appear in the [All Services] screen.For more information, refer to "Screen/Button Settings" (P.200).

@ @@ @

2 Product Overview

46

Product Overview

2

4 <Power Saver> If the machine is not operated for a while, the machine's power consumption is lowered to enter the Power Saver mode. In the Power Saver mode, this button is lit. To cancel the Power Saver mode, press this button again.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Power Saver> button.

5 <Clear All> Returns the statuses of all displayed services to their default values.The machine will be reset to the state after it is turned on.In text descriptions, these buttons are indicated as the <Clear All> button.

6 <Interrupt> Select this button to temporarily stop a continuous copy job or printing to give another job higher priority. During an interrupt,the Interrupt indicator is lit. Pressing the Interrupt button again cancels the interrupt and the previous operation is resumed.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Interrupt> button.

7 <Stop> Press this button to stop the current copy job or communications.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Stop> button.

8 <Start> Press this button to start copying or scanning.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Start> button.

9 Numeric keypad Press these buttons to enter the number of copies, passcodes and other numerical values.In text descriptions, these buttons are indicated as the "numeric keypad".

10 <Speed Dial> This button cannot be used.

11 <C> (Clear) Press this button if you have entered a wrong numerical value with thenumeric keypad.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <C> button.

12 <Dial Pause> This button cannot be used.

13 <Log In/Out> When this button is pressed, if in System Administration mode, or Login Setup/Auditron Administration is in effect, the UserID input screen is displayed.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Log In/Out> button.

14 <Machine Status> Pressing this button allows you to confirm the machine status, meters and the state of supplies, and print reports.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Machine Status> button.

15 <Review> Press this button to open the Review screen. In this screen, you can check a list of the status of copy and scan features whose settings have changed from the defaults. In text descriptions, these buttons are indicated as the <Review> button.

16 <Job Status> Pressing this button allows you to confirm or cancel currently executing or completed jobs, or to confirm or print saved documents.In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Job Status> button.

17 Brightness dial Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen. Use this dial to adjust the brightness of touch screen when it is too dark to read.

18 <Job in Memory> indicator This indicator lights when data is stored in the machine's memory.

19 <Online> indicator This indicator lights when data is being transmitted from this machine or received from a client.


Control panel

47

Product Overview

2

Customizing the Control PanelYou can customize the <Custom> buttons and items on the [All Services] screen.

Assigning a Feature to Custom ButtonsBy assigning a feature to Custom buttons (<Copy>, <Custom 2>, and <Custom 3>), you can switch to that feature without returning to the [All Services] screen. The factory default settings for these buttons are, "Copy" for the 1st button, and none for the 2nd and 3rd buttons. For about procedure to assign features, refer to "Screen/Button Settings" (P.200).

Attach the labels included in this product when you have changed the assignment. If you have used a feature for which no label is provided, use a blank label and write down the feature using a permanent marker and attach it to the appropriate Custom button.

Customizing the [All Services] ScreenYou can customize the types of features and the location of buttons on the [All Services] screen. The following shows the factory default settings. For about procedure to assign features, refer to "Screen/Button Settings" (P.200).Note • When the feature is not available the button will not be displayed. Also, if the feature is

unavailable due to hardware problems, the button will be grayed out.

Copy

Network Scanning

Web Applications

Stored Programming

Setup Menu

Assigning Features to <Custom> ButtonsAssign features to the <Custom> buttons on the control panel: Custom 1 to Custom 3.By assigning features to the <Custom> buttons, you can switch to the features without returning to the [All Services] screen. If you do not want to assign any feature to a button, select [Not Set].As the factory defaults, [Copy] is assigned to the <Copy> button and no feature is assigned to the <Custom 2> or <Custom 3> button. The features assigned to the buttons are selected from the features displayed on the [All Services] screen and [Language].Attach the labels included in this product when you have changed the assignment. If you have used a feature for which no label is provided, use a blank label and write down the feature using a permanent marker, and then attach the label to the appropriate button.

2 Product Overview

48

Product Overview

2

Changing feature screenYou can customize the setting screen for the following features on the [All Services] screen.

Copy

Network ScanningFor information about change settings, refer to "General Settings Tab - Features Allocation" (P.225) and "General Settings Tab" (P.241).

Web ApplicationsIf you select [Web Applications] on the [All Services] screen, the screen for the Network Controller appears. For information on how to operate Web Applications, refer to USER DOCUMENTATIONS for the Network Controller.

1 Select [Web Applications].

The screen on the right appears.

3 Setting up the Network Controller

This chapter describes how to configure the Network Controller.Preparations ...............................................................................................50

Installation Procedure .................................................................................50


50

Setting up the Netw

ork Controller

3

Preparations

Prepare the following item to install the machine when using a TCP/IP protocol.TCP/IP network environment

Installation Procedure

Configuration on the MachineTo assign an IP address, it is necessary to be in the System Administration mode.The following describes the configuration procedure for assigning an IP address.

Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode


Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and PasscodeTo enter System Administration mode, enter the system administrator UserID. If you are using the authentication feature, a Passcode may be required.It is recommended to change the system administrator UserID and the Passcode immediately after installing the machine.

1 Enter the UserID with the numeric keypad or a keyboard displayed by selecting [Keyboard], and select [Confirm].Note • The default UserID value is

“11111”. When using the Authentication feature, a Passcode is required. The default Passcode value is “x-admin”.

<Log In/Out> button


51

Setting up the Netw

ork Controller

3

Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu


Step 4 Setting an IP address


2 Select [Network Controller Settings].


52

Setting up the Netw

ork Controller

3

3 Select [Network Settings].

1) Select [Ethernet Setting] and then select [Change Settings].2) Select [TCP/IP - Get IP Address] and then select [Change Settings].3) Select one from [DHCP], [BOOTP] or [Manual]. If you select anything other than

[Manual], proceed to Step 4.4) Select [TCP/IP - IP Address] and then select [Change Settings].Note • Enter the IP address in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. The "xxx" should be a numeric value in

the range from 0 to 255. However, the range between 224.XXX.XXX.XXX through 255.XXX.XXX.XXX, and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.

• When you made an entry mistake, press the <C> (clear) button and enter again.• When you move to the next value without entering all 3 digits, select [save/select next].

5) Select [Save].6) Configure [TCP/IP - Subnet Mask] and [TCP/IP - Gateway Address] as above.Note • Enter the gateway address in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. The "xxx" should be a numeric

value in the range from 0 to 255. However, the range between 224.XXX.XXX.XXX through 255.XXX.XXX.XXX, and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.


53

Setting up the Netw

ork Controller

3

• Specify the subnet mask by a combination of the numbers 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, and 255. However, you cannot use 0 between non-zero values.

• If you do not want to set the gateway address, enter "0.0.0.0".7) Select [Frame Type] and then select [Change Settings].


5 Select [Exit].

6 After the machine is restarted, print out a settings list to confirm that the Network Setting is configured.For information about how to print a setting list, refer to "System Setting List" in "Print Report/List" (P.275).


54

Setting up the Netw

ork Controller

3

Configuration on the Computer

The following describes the configuration procedure for the computer.In order to print from the machine, the computer needs to have the print driver installed.

For information about the driver installation procedure, refer to USER DOCUMENTATIONS for the Network Controller.

4 Copy

This chapter describes the [Copy] screen and copy features.Copying Procedure .....................................................................................56

Operations during Copying .........................................................................61

General Settings .........................................................................................63

Image Quality..............................................................................................74

Layout Adjustment ......................................................................................80

Output Format.............................................................................................93

Job Assembly ...........................................................................................119

4 Copy

56

Copy

4

Copying Procedure

This section describes the basic copy procedures. The following shows the reference section for each procedure.

Step 1 Loading Documents .........................................................................................................56Step 2 Selecting Features ............................................................................................................58Step 3 Entering the Quantity.......................................................................................................59Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.......................................................................................................59Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in the Job Status .....................................................................60

Step 1 Loading DocumentsThere are two methods for loading documents:

Document feederSingle sheet

Multiple sheets

Document glass

Single sheet

Bound documents, such as books

Document FeederThe document feeder (250 sheets) supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 140 x 210 mm (A5, A5 , 5.5 x 8.5 inches, 5.5 x 8.5 inches ) to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).The document feeder (250 sheets) automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] field.For information on document sizes that can be detected automatically, and for information about entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.83).

Note • The standard document sizes that can be auto-detected depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer to "Paper Size Settings" (P.219).

The document feeder (250 sheets) accepts the following number of sheets.

For information about copying documents of mixed size, refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.84).

Important • Place folded or creased documents on the document glass to avoid paper jams in the document feeder.

• 2 sided scanning of lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) is not supported.

Document type (weight) Number of sheets

Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) 250

Plain paper (50 - 80 g/m2) 250

Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 g/m2) 150

Heavyweight paper (129 - 200 g/m2) 100

Copying Procedure

57

Copy

4

1 Remove any paper clips and staples before loading the documents.

2 Adjust the movable document guides to match the size of the document loaded.Note • When loading a large

document such as A3, pick up the document feeder tray and open the document stopper rightward.

3 Place the document face up (the face of 2 sided document up) in the center of the document feeder.Note • The <Confirmation> indicator

lights up when the document is loaded correctly.

When loading the document in the document feeder, you can set timing for lifting up the document feeder tray. For more information, refer to "Document Feeder Tray Elevation" (P.223).

Document GlassOn the document glass, you can place a single sheet, or a book or other similar document up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).The document glass automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] field.For information about entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for theDocument)" (P.74).Note • The standard document sizes that can be auto-detected depend on the [Paper Size

Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer to "Paper Size Settings" (P.219).

1 Open the document cover.Important • Check that the screen of the

control panel is displayed correctly and then load the document. When the document is loaded before the screen is displayed, the machine may not properly detect document sizes.

2 Place the document face down, and align it against the top left corner of the document glass.

3 Close the document cover.Note • When a standard size

document is placed on the document glass, the size of the document is displayed in the message area.

4 Copy

58

Copy

4

Step 2 Selecting FeaturesYou can select the features from the [Copy] tab.Note • Features displayed may vary depending on the model you are using.

• To use the Login Setup feature or Auditron Administration feature, you need a UserID and Passcode, or just a UserID. Ask the system administrator for the UserID and Passcode.

1 Press the <All Services> button.

2 Select [Copy].

3 If the previous settings still remain, press the <Clear All> button.

4 Select the features to set from each tab as necessary.

For information about each of these features, refer to the following sections."General Settings" (P.63)"Image Quality" (P.74)"Layout Adjustment" (P.80)"Output Format" (P.93)"Job Assembly" (P.119)

@ @

<All Services> button

@ @

<Clear All> button

Copying Procedure

59

Copy

4

Step 3 Entering the QuantityYou can enter up to 9,999 for the number of copies.

1 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad. The number of copies entered appears on the upper right of the display.

2 If you enter an incorrect value, press the <C> button and enter the correct value.

Step 4 Starting the Copy Job

1 Press the <Start> button. Important • If the document has been set

in the document feeder, do not hold down the document while it is being conveyed.

• Copies cannot be made when copying restriction code is detected.

Note • If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the touch screen. Solve the problem in accordance with the message.

• You can set the next job during copying.

If you have more documentsIf you have another document, select the [Next Original] on the touch screen while the current document is being scanned. You can scan multiple documents for later output.

2 Select [Next Original] while scanning is in progress.

Note • When using the document feeder, load the next document after the machine has finished scanning the first document.

• When the above screen is displayed and no operation is performed during a certain period of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.

Numeric keypad

<C> button

@ @

<Start> button

4 Copy

60

Copy

4

3 Load the next document.

4 Press the <Start> button. If you have more documents, load the next document and press the <Start> button.

5 When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].

Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in the Job Status

1 Press the <Job Status> button.

2 Confirm the job status. The job type to be displayed can be selected from [All Jobs], [All Printing Jobs], [All Non-printing Jobs], and [Mailbox Transfer Jobs]. Note • Select [ ] to display the

previous screen and select [ ] to display the next screen.

CAUTIONDo not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the platen glass. It may break the glass and cause injuries.

<Job Status> button

Operations during Copying

61

Copy

4

Operations during Copying

This section describes available operations during copying. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Stopping the Copy Job ............................................................................................................... 61Changing the Number of Copies................................................................................................ 62Interrupting the Copy Job........................................................................................................... 62

Stopping the Copy JobTo cancel copying, follow the procedure below.

1 Press either [Stop] on the touch screen or the <Stop> button on the Control Panel.

2 Select [Stop].

When the screen in Step 1 does not appear


2 Select the job to cancel, and then select [Stop].

@ @<Stop> button

<Job Status> button

4 Copy

62

Copy

4

Changing the Number of CopiesYou can change the number of copies that is set initially during scanning or copying the document.


2 Select [Change Quantity...].

3 Set the number of copies with the numeric keypad. The new quantity must include the number of copies that have already been printed. When reducing the quantity, you cannot enter a number less than the number of copies that have already been printed.

4 Press the <Start> button.Note • You can set the values greater than the number of copies that have already copied. If you

set the same value as the number of copies that have already copied, the copy job is not executed.

Interrupting the Copy JobYou can temporarily suspend the current continuous copy job to give another job higher priority.

1 Press the <Interrupt> button.Note • The interrupt indicator lights to

indicate that the machine is in the job interrupt mode.

2 Load the interrupt document and set features if necessary.

3 Set the number of copies with the numeric keypad.

4 Press the <Start> button.

5 After you have finished making the interrupt copy, press the <Interrupt> button.Note • The interrupt indicator goes out to indicate the interrupt is cancelled.

• Remove the interrupt document from the document glass when using the document glass.6 Press the <Start> button. The suspended copy job is resumed.

@ @<Stop> button

@ @

<Interrupt> button

General Settings

63

Copy

4

General Settings

You can set the basic features on the [General Settings] screen. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)................................................................ 63Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ....................................................................... 66Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy) .............................................................................. 69Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .......................................................................... 73Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)................................................................... 73Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet)........................................................... 73Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density) .......................................................................... 73

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy].

2 Select features on the [General Settings] screen that appears first.

Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)You can select a ratio from preset standard copy ratios. You can also enter a ratio directly.

1 Select a copy ratio, or specify a value.

Entering the RatioTouch the window displaying a value, and then use the numeric keypad or the [ ] and [ ] buttons to specify a ratio within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

100%Copies are made at the same size as the original document.

Auto%The copy ratio is automatically set based upon the document and paper sizes, and the document is copied to fit in the selected paper.Note • If you select [Auto%], specify a value other than [Auto] for [Paper Supply].

4 Copy

64

Copy

4

Ratio (3rd to 5th Buttons)Select from preset ratios.You can change the indicated ratios. For information about the setting procedures, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3-5" (P.225).

[More...]Display the [Reduce/Enlarge] screen.Refer to "When [Proportional %] is Selected" (P.64) or "When [Independent X-Y%] is Selected" (P.65).

When [Proportional %] is SelectedYou can select a ratio from preset standard copy ratios. You can also enter a ratio directly.

1 Select a copy ratio, or specify a value.

100%Copies are made at the same size as the original document.

Auto%The copy ratio is automatically set based upon the document and paper sizes specified in [Paper Supply], and the document is copied to fit in the specified size.Note • If you select [Auto%], specify a value other than [Auto] for [Paper Supply].

Presets %Select from preset ratios.You can change the indicated ratios. For more information, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.238).

Copy All (Full Screen)The document is copied at a slightly reduced size to prevent image loss at the edge of the original. If this option is selected, a check mark is added.Important • If you select [Copy All], when you do not want to erase the edges of the document, set the

amount of edge erase to 0 mm. Note that if the amount is set to 0 mm, the edges of the copied document may get dirty or the image loss may occur.

Entering the RatioTouch the window displaying a value, and then use the numeric keypad or the [ ] and [ ] buttons to specify a ratio within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

General Settings

65

Copy

4

When [Independent X-Y%] is SelectedYou can specify different length and width ratios to scale the height and width independently.

1 Select any item.

Auto%Copies are made with the height and width ratios set automatically to match the paper size. If this option is selected, a check mark is added.

Copy All X-Y%The length and width ratios are set automatically to match the paper size and the document is copied at a slightly reduced size to prevent image loss at the edge of the original. If this option is selected, a check mark is added.

Width X%/Length Y%Set the length and width ratios within the range from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

XYYou can simultaneously change the numerical values of the height and width by the same amount.

When [Calculator %] is SelectedYou can specify a different size for the height and width.If you specify both the original document size and the copy size, the copy ratios for the length and width are calculated automatically within the range from 25 to 400% according to the sizes that you entered.

1 Enter the value for the original document width in [Original Size] of [X] (width) using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

2 Enter the value for the copy size width in [Copy Size] of [X] (width) using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

3 In the same way, enter the original document length value and copy size length value in the [Original Size] and [Copy Size] of [Y] (length), and select [Next].Note • To change the copy ratios you have entered, select [Next], move the mark, and enter the

new values.

4 Copy

66

Copy

4

X: width Y: lengthThe automatically calculated ratios based on the values entered in [Original Size] and [Copy Size] are displayed.

Original SizeSet the length and width of the original size from 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments.

Copy SizeSet the length and width of the copy size from 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments.

Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)You can select the tray loaded with the copy paper you want to use.

1 Select the paper tray from [Paper Supply].

Auto PaperBased on the original document size and set ratios, the machine automatically selects the tray loaded with the appropriate paper.Note • If you select [Auto], specify a value other than [Auto %] for [Reduce/Enlarge].

Trays (2nd to 5th Buttons)Select from preset paper trays.You can change the paper trays to display. For information about the setting procedures, refer to "Preset Buttons" (P.225).

[More...]Displays the [Paper Supply] screen.Refer to "[Paper Supply] Screen" (P.67).

General Settings

67

Copy

4

[Paper Supply] ScreenYou can select a paper tray that does not appear on the [General Settings] screen.

1 Select the paper tray.

Paper TrayYou can select paper from the 5 trays. When you select [Auto], the machine automatically selects the tray loaded with the appropriate paper, based on the original document size and set ratios, and makes copies. Selecting [Tray 5 (Bypass)] opens the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen.

Paper SizeDisplays the size of paper that is loaded in the tray.

Paper TypeDisplays the type of paper that is loaded in the tray.

Size DetectionDisplays the paper size detection method. This item appears only when [Other Attributes] is set to [Size Detection] for [Customize Paper Supply Screen] under the [System Settings] screen.

[Tray 5 (Bypass)] ScreenIf you want to make copies on paper that cannot be loaded in the Trays 1 to 4, or 6, use the Tray 5 (bypass).

1 Select the paper size and the paper type. Note • Select [ ] to return to the

previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Paper SizeSelect from [Auto Size Detect], [Standard Size], and [Custom Size (Variable Size)].When [Auto Size Detect] is selected, the paper size is identified automatically.Note • [Auto Size Detect] can only detect standard sizes.

Paper TypeSelect the paper type.

4 Copy

68

Copy

4

When [Standard Size] is SelectedSelect the paper size from standard sizes and select the paper type.

1 Select [Standard Size].

2 Select the paper size and paper type.Note • Select [ ] to return to the


When [Custom Size (Variable Size)] is SelectedSet the X (width) within the range from 148 to 488 mm and the Y (height) within the range from 100 to 330 mm in increments of 1 mm.Important • If the X (width) of non-standard size paper is less than 140 mm, documents may not be

printed properly.

1 Enter the paper size using [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].

2 Select the paper type.Note • Select [ ] to return to the


General Settings

69

Copy

4

Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy)You can set the output color to use when copying.Note • If output color restrictions have been set, there are restrictions on which colors are available

for copying. For information about output color restrictions, refer to "Account Limit" (P.254).

1 Select the color to use from [Output Color]

Auto DetectThe machine automatically determines the color of the original document and makes copies in full color if the original document is color and in a single color (black) if the document is black-and-white.Note • The machine may make copies in black and white in the case of the following documents. In

this case change the level at which the machine distinguishes documents (5 levels) in reference to "Output Color Recognition" (P.211).- Colored area is very small- In light color

ColorCopies are made in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.

BlackThe machine makes copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document.

Dual Color (Red/Black)The machine makes copies of color documents in two preset colors.You can change the colors to display. For information about the setting procedures, refer to "Dual Color - Target Area Color" (P.226) and "Dual Color - Non-target Area Color" (P.227).

Single Color (Red)The [Output Color - Color] screen is displayed.Refer to "[Output Color - Color] Screen" (P.72).

[More...]Display the [Output Color] screen.

4 Copy

70

Copy

4

[Output Color] ScreenYou can make color settings for full color, dual color, and single color.

1 Select [More...].

2 Select the desired output color type for copying.

Auto DetectThe machine automatically determines the color of the original document and makes copies in full color if the original document is color and in a single color (black) if the document is black-and-white.

ColorCopies are made in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.

BlackThe machine makes copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document.

Dual ColorThe document is separated into specified source colors and unspecified colors and then copied in the specified dual colors. If you select [Dual Color], you can set the following items:

Source ColorThe [Source Color] screen is displayed.

Refer to "[Source Color] Screen" (P.71).

Target Area ColorThe [Target Area Color] screen is displayed.

Refer to "[Target Area Color] Screen" (P.71).

Non-target Area ColorThe [Non-target Area Color] screen is displayed.

Refer to "[Non-target Area Color] Screen" (P.72).

Single ColorThe [Output Color - Color] screen is displayed.Refer to "[Output Color - Color] Screen" (P.72).

General Settings

71

Copy

4

[Source Color] ScreenSelect the color to scan (extract) from the document.

1 Select [Dual Color].

2 Select [Source Color].

3 Select [Other than Black] or [Color].

4 If you selected [Color], select the color to scan.

Other than BlackColors other than black are scanned.

ColorFrom 6 predetermined colors, you can specify single or multiple colors to scan.

[Target Area Color] ScreenYou can change the color that was extracted by [Source Color] to one of the 7 predetermined colors and 6 custom colors. From the displayed [Target Area Color] screen, select a color.For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.238).


2 Select [Target Area Color].

4 Copy

72

Copy

4

3 Select a color.

[Non-target Area Color] ScreenYou can change a color that was not extracted to one of the 7 fixed colors and 6 custom colors. From the displayed [Non-target Area Color] screen, select one color.For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.238).


2 Select [Non-target Area Color].

3 Select a color.

[Output Color - Color] ScreenThe machine makes copies in the single specified color regardless of the colors in the document.You can select a color from 6 predetermined colors and 6 custom colors. From the displayed [Output Color - Color] screen, select a color.For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.238).

1 Select [Single Color].

General Settings

73

Copy

4

2 Select [Color].

3 Select a color.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)This function works exactly as the [Color Effects] in the [Output Format] screen. For more information, refer to "Color Effects (Selecting Image Quality)" (P.77).

Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)This function works exactly as the [Copy Output] in the [Output Format] screen. For more information, refer to "Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)" (P.116).

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet)This function works exactly as the [Multiple-Up] in the [Output Format] screen. For more information, refer to "Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet)" (P.100).

Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)You can adjust the copy density to one of 7 levels. Copying is darker when you move [ ] to the left and lighter when you move it to the right.Note • [Lighten/Darken] of the [General Settings] screen and [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] in

the [Image Quality] screen are the same.

1 Use [ ] and [ ] to select from 7 density levels.

4 Copy

74

Copy

4

Image Quality

On the [Image Quality] screen, you can configure the document image quality features. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)...........................................................................74Image Options (Lighten/Darken, Sharpness, Saturation) ...........................................................76Image Enhancement (Background Suppression/Contrast) .........................................................76Color Effects (Selecting Image Quality).....................................................................................77Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ..................................................................................78Color Shift (Adjusting Color Tone) ............................................................................................78Gloss Level (Enhancing Gloss of the Document).......................................................................79

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy]

2 Select the [Image Quality] tab and then select a feature on the [Image Quality] screen that appears.

If color reproducibility is poor, perform Calibration. For information about calibration, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.310).

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)When making copies of photographs, text and other documents, you can make copies at the image quality corresponding to each type of document. Copies of the document can be reproduced at a more faithful image quality by selecting the document type that matches the document.

1 Select [Original Type].

2 Select the document type.

Image Quality

75

Copy

4

AutoThis item sets [Output Color] of the [General Settings] screen according to the document type preset in the System Administration mode.For information about the auto setting of [Original Type], refer to "Copy Defaults" (P.226).

Photo & TextSelect when making copies of documents containing both text and photos. The machine automatically distinguishes the text and photo areas and sets the appropriate image quality for each area of the document. For photo areas, specify the photo type from [Printed Original], [Photograph], and [Photocopy].

Printed OriginalSelect when photo areas of the document is printed matter such as a pamphlet.

PhotographSelect when photos have been pasted on document. This prevents the copy from being reproduced bluish.

PhotocopySelect this item for documents that are copies or prints made on a color copier such as the DocuColor 6075II/5065II. This prevents colors from being reproduced faint.

TextSelect this item to make sharp copies of text. Sharp copies of graphs, illustrations, etc. are also made in this mode.

Normal TextSelect this item for printed documents, inked text documents, etc.

Light TextSelect this item for documents with light image density such as a document written in pencil, to increase the copy density.

Lightweight originalsSelect this option to reduce blurs of tracing paper documents or to suppress background shadows of lightweight documents.

Note • Whether [Lightweight originals] is displayed depends on the specifications. For information about the display method, refer to "Original Type - Lightweight Originals" (P.233).

PhotoSelect this item for making copies of photos. In the same way as for Photo & Text, specify the photo type from [Printed Original], [Photograph], and [Photocopy].

MapSelect this item for making copies of documents that have text on colored backgrounds such as maps.

4 Copy

76

Copy

4

Image Options (Lighten/Darken, Sharpness, Saturation)You can make copies with adjusting the copy density, sharpness and color saturation.Note • [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] and [Lighten/Darken] of [Copy] are the same.

• If [Lighten/Darken], [Sharpness] or [Saturation] is selected when the Color Effects is set, the values set in the Color Effects are cleared.

1 Select [Image Options].

2 Adjust with [ ] and [ ].

Lighten/DarkenYou can select from seven copy density levels between [Lighten] and [Darken].The copy color density increases the nearer the level is to [Darken] and the copy color density decreases the nearer the level is to [Lighten].

SharpnessYou can select from five sharpness levels between [Soften] and [Sharpen].The nearer the level is to [Sharpen], the sharper the contours of images. The nearer the level is to [Soften], the softer the contours of images.

SaturationYou can select from five color saturation levels between [Vivid] and [Pastel].The brightness of color in documents increases the nearer the level is to [Vivid] and the brightness of color in documents decreases the nearer the level is to [Pastel].

Image Enhancement (Background Suppression/Contrast) When copies are made with [Black] of [Output Color], the background color of documents such as newspapers and colored paper documents is erased.When making copies with [Full Color], [Dual Colors], or [Single Color] of [Output Color], the background of white documents is erased.Note • When [Document Type] is set to [Photo], the [Auto Exposure] feature does not work.

1 Select [Image Enhancement].

2 Select [Background Suppression] and [Contrast]. Adjust contrast with [ ] and [ ].

Background Suppression

No SuppressionScans the document backgrounds with no filtering.

Auto SuppressionWhen copies are made with [Black] of Output Color, the background color of documents such as newspaper and colored paper documents is erased.

Image Quality

77

Copy

4

When copies are made with [Color], [Dual Color], or [Single Color] of [Output Color], the background of white documents is erased.

ContrastAuto CorrectionThis setting sharpens the image by adjusting the brightness and hue of the original.

Manual ContrastYou can select from 5 contrast levels between [More Contrast] and [Less Contrast].The nearer the level is to [More Contrast], the greater the difference between light parts and dark parts as light parts become lighter and dark parts become darker. [Less Contrast] contrasts decrease the difference between light and dark area.

Color Effects (Selecting Image Quality)If you select an image quality of [Image Quality Preset], the [Auto Exposure], [Lighten/Darken/Contrast], [Sharpness/Color Saturation], [Color Shift], and [Color Balance] settings are automatically adjusted and copies are made at a quality that matches the images.Note • If the settings of other image quality features are changed after selecting an image quality in

[Image Quality Preset], the Color Effects setting will return to its default (state of nothing being selected).

1 Select [Color Effects].

2 Select the image quality.

NormalCopies are made with the [Auto Exposure], [Lighten/Darken/Contrast], [Sharpness/Color Saturation], [Color Shift], and [Color Balance] settings at their defaults.

LivelyThe color saturation is raised to reproduce images that appear fresher and livelier.

BrightReproduces images that have a brighter appearance with enhanced contrast. Select this item to make copies of documents such as posters that are intended to attract people's attention.

WarmReproduces colors that have a slightly low density as brighter and warmer colors with more dominant red in them. Select this item when, for example, you wish skin to appear pinker or subdued warm colors to have more warmth.

4 Copy

78

Copy

4

CoolReproduces blue colors that appear even clearer. Select this item, for example to make water or sky bluer or to reproduce subdued cold colors more clearly.

Shadow SuppressionThis setting supresses document.

Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance)The strength of the four colors (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) can be adjusted in 7 levels for each of their low, medium, and high density ranges.Note • If [Color Balance] is selected when the Color Effects is set, the values set in the Image

Quality Preset are cleared.

1 Select [Color Balance].

2 Select the button for the color you want to adjust.

3 Use [ ] and [ ] to adjust the color balance for each density.

Low DensityUse this item to adjust the strength of the low density.

Medium DensityUse this item to adjust the strength of the medium density.

High DensityUse this item to adjust the strength of the high density.

Color Shift (Adjusting Color Tone)The tone of color documents can be adjusted to make subtle changes to the overall tone of the document. You can adjust the tone 2 levels at a time by moving the bar to the left or right.The bottom bar of the [Color Shift] screen indicates the tone of the document and the upper bar indicates the tone after adjustment. If you select a color shift button, you can move the lower bar to change the overall tone of the document to the tone of the upper bar.For example, if Y (yellow) on the lower bar is moved to the left towards R (red) on the upper bar, the yellow in fruit becomes reddish to give an apple a riper-looking tone. This changes all colors. For example, R (red) becomes more M (magenta) and G (green) becomes more Y (yellow).If Y (yellow) on the lower bar is moved to the right towards G (green) on the upper bar, the yellow in fruit becomes greener. This changes all colors. For example, M (magenta) becomes more R (red) and R (red) becomes more Y (yellow).Note • Confirm that [Full Color] is selected in [Output Color] of the [General Settings] screen. Tone

adjustment is not available when [Output Color] is set to [Black].• If [Color Shift] is selected when Color Effects is set, the values set in the Color Effects are

cleared.

Image Quality

79

Copy

4

1 Select [Color Shift].

2 Select the color shift buttons.

Gloss Level (Enhancing Gloss of the Document)This feature lowers the copying speed to add a glossy touch to the output.The following paper can be used for the gloss level feature:Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, heavyweight paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), heavyweight paper 1 (side 2), coated paper (106 - 176 g/m2), coated paper 1 (side 2), and punched paper.Note • A setting must be made in the System Administration mode to display [Gloss Level] in the

[Image Quality] tab. For more information, refer to "Gloss Level" (P.223).• When you use the Build Job features, [Gloss Level] can be set to each set of the job. In this

case, the copy procedure may pause due to adjustment of the machine when changing the settings. In addition, the document is divided into chapters at the positions where the gloss level changes.

1 Select [Gloss Level].

2 Select [Normal] or [Enhanced].

4 Copy

80

Copy

4

Layout Adjustment

On the [Layout Adjustment] screen, you can configure features for scanning documents.The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) ...................................................802 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages) .................................................82Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document).......................................................83Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) .........................84Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) .........................................85Image Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position).........................................................................87Image Rotation (Making Copies with the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally)...............89Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) ...................................................................90Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents).......................................912 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies) .................................................................................91


2 Select the [Layout Adjustment] tab and then select a feature on the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)The Book Copying feature allows you to copy facing pages of a document on separate sheets of paper in page order. This feature is useful if you need to make separate copies from facing pages of bound documents such as a booklet.Note • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.

• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.• When you want to make copies in page order, select [Face Down] from [Output Orientation]

in the [Output Format] tab.

1 Select [Book Copying]

2 Select any item.

OffThe document is not copied as a bound document.

Layout Adjustment

81

Copy

4

Left Page then RightCopies are made from the left page of facing pages in a document starting from the left page.

Right Page then LeftCopies are made from the right page of facing pages in a document starting from the right page.

Top Page then BottomCopies are made from the top page of facing pages in a document starting from the top page.

Both PagesCopies are made of both pages of facing paper in page order.

Left Page OnlyCopies are made of the left page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Right Page OnlyCopies are made of the right page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Top Page OnlyCopies are made of the top page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Bottom Page OnlyCopies are made of the bottom page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Binding EraseErases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

4 Copy

82

Copy

4

2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)You can assign pages when making copies of facing pages in a bound document so that pages face each other in the same way as the document. You can also specify the start page and the end page from the left and right facing pages.Note • Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.

1 Select [2 Sided Book Copy].

2 Select any item.

OffThe document is not copied as a 2 sided book copy.

Left Page then RightCopies are made of both pages from the left page of facing pages in a document starting from the left page.

Right Page then LeftCopies are made of both pages from the right page of facing pages in a document starting from the right page.

Top Page then BottomCopies are made of both pages from the top page of facing pages in a document starting from the top page.

Start Page & End PageDisplays the [2 Sided Book Copy - Start Page & End Page] screen.Refer to "[2 Sided Book Copy - Start Page & End Page] Screen" (P.82).


[2 Sided Book Copy - Start Page & End Page] ScreenYou can set the copy start page and end page.

1 Select [Start Page] and [End Page].

Start PageSelect the copy start page from the following items.

Layout Adjustment

83

Copy

4

[Left Page]/[Right Page]You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

[Top Page]/[Bottom Page]You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

End PageSelect the copy end page from the following items.

[Left Page]/[Right Page]You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

[Top Page]/[Bottom Page]You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)You can set the scan size for the document.Specify the size of the document when scanning non-standard size documents or when making copies at a size different from that of the currently loaded document.When a document size is specified, it is scanned at the specified size regardless of the size of the loaded document. This feature allows you to copy the document with adding or deleting the margin.

1 Select [Original Size].

2 Select the size of the document. If you select a non-standard size, specify values for the X and Y directions.

Auto Size DetectScan sizes are detected automatically. The machine can auto-detect the following paper sizes.

Note • If the document size cannot be detected, a screen to input the document size appears.• Auto-detectable sizes vary depending on the settings made for [Auto Tray Switching] in the

System Administration mode. For more information about [Auto Tray Switching], refer to [Common Settings] of "6 System Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Standard SizeSelect a document size from a list of 17 pre-configured types.

Document feeder Document glass

Auto-detectable sizes B5, B5 , B4, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5x11", 8.5x11" , 11x17", Kai16 , Kai8

B6, B6 , B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5x11", Kai16, Kai16 , Kai8

4 Copy

84

Copy

4

You can change the indicated document sizes. For more information, refer to "Original Size Defaults" (P.237).

Variable SizeEnter the desired scan size when scanning non-standard size documents or when making copies at a size different from that of the currently loaded document. Set the size in the document glass X (horizontal) direction within the range 15 to 432 mm and in the Y (vertical) direction within the range 15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments. The scale on the outside of the document glass is a useful reference for specifying the document size.Important • When the document is loaded on the document feeder, the base point in the Y (height)

direction is the center of the edge. If you specify 100 mm, the scan size becomes from 50 mm above to 50 mm below the center of the document.

Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)

When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size documents and make copies onto paper that matches the respective sizes of the documents. You can also specify the size of the paper to make copies on so that copies are made on the same size of paper.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the first sheet of the document and the [Original Orientation]

setting of the [Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.• Be sure to load A5 documents vertically.• When loading a B5 size document with A3 or A4 size documents in a vertical direction, place

the B5 document also in a vertical direction.• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5

portrait and B4 landscape. If the combination of the document sizes is not our recommendation, the documents can be fed at an angle may not be copied properly.

Note • [Original Orientation] is set in reference to the direction set for the first page of the document. Load the rest of the document from the second page onwards in the same direction as that of the first page of the document.

1 Select [Mixed Sized Originals]

2 Select [On] or [Off].

OffSelect this item when all documents are of the same size.

OnWhen documents of different sizes are copied, the machine automatically detects the size of each document.

Layout Adjustment

85

Copy

4

Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents)In order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the set document must be configured.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may incorrectly detect the head of the document.

Upright ImagesSelect this item when placing the top of the document facing the inner side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideway ImagesSelect this item when placing the top of the document facing the left side of the document glass or document feeder. Be sure to select [Sideway Images] when the top of the document is placed facing the left side (horizontal text).

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)When you make copies with the document cover open or make copies from a book, black shadows sometimes appear along the edges and center margin of the paper. If this happens, you can make copies with the shadows erased.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the

[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.

Note • For 2-sided documents, the same border erase amount is set for the top and bottom sides.• If you set [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase dimensions will be reduced or enlarged in

proportion to the ratio you configured.

1 Select [Edge Erase].

2 Make the necessary settings.

NormalThe border erase amount is set to 2 mm for the top and bottom, and left and right. If you do not want to erase the edges, set each value to 0 mm.

Border EraseShadows at the top/bottom/left/right of the document, or shadows in the center of documents such as booklets or documents with facing pages, are erased. Border Erase allows adjustment of the erase amount for each edge or center (gutter) individually.

Edge EraseShadows at the top/bottom/left/right of the document, or shadows in the center of documents such as booklets or documents with facing pages, are erased. Standard Edge Erase allows adjustment of the erase amount for top, bottom, left, right, or center (gutter) individually.

4 Copy

86

Copy

4

Margin EraseShadows at the top/bottom/left/right of the document, or shadows in the center of documents such as booklets or documents with facing pages, are erased. Standard Edge Erase allows adjustment of the erase amount for top/bottom, left/right, or center (gutter) individually.

Erase ValueYou can erase only the necessary amount.

Top & Bottom EdgesShadows at the top and bottom of the document are erased. Edges at the top and bottom are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Left & Right EdgesShadows on the left and right of the document are erased. Edges on the left and right are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Binding EraseShadows in the center of documents such as booklets or documents with facing pages are erased. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.





Side 2This item is available only when [Standard Edge Erase] is selected. You can select whether to apply the same deletion widths to Sides 1 and 2.

Same as Side 1The same deletion widths are applied to Sides 1 and 2.

Opposite to Side 1The deletion widths are mirrored on Side 1 and 2.

Layout Adjustment

87

Copy

4

Image Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position)Copies can be made with the document image position shifted to the left, right, top, or bottom of the paper or with the document center shifted to the center of the paper. You can also make copies with a margin added to the top, bottom, left, or right. When making 2 sided prints, you can set the shift positions for both Side 1 and Side 2.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


Note • The image shift amount is set in accordance with the paper. Even if you set copies to be enlarged or reduced in Reduce/Enlarge, the image shift amount is not affected.

1 Select [Image Shift].

2 Select any item.

No ShiftThe position of the document image is not shifted.

Auto CenterThe center of the document is shifted to match the center of the paper.

Margin ShiftYou can set the margin amount. Set the top & bottom, and left & right values within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

Side 1Displays the [Image Shift - Side 1] screen.Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen" (P.88).

Side 2Displays the [Image Shift - Side 2] screen.Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 2] Screen" (P.88).

Mirror ShiftSelect this item when you want the positioning of Side 2 to match the positioning of Side 1.





4 Copy

88

Copy

4

[Image Shift - Side 1] ScreenYou can set the image shift of Side 1.

1 Select any item.



Corner ShiftThe document image is shifted to the edges or corners of the paper. You can select from 8 shift directions.When adjusting the margin amount, set the top and bottom, and left and right values within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Variable ShiftYou can set the margin amount. Set the top and bottom, and left and right values within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

[Image Shift - Side 2] ScreenYou can set the image shift of Side 2.



Corner ShiftThe document image is shifted to the edges or corners of the paper. You can select from 8 shift directions.

Layout Adjustment

89

Copy

4

When adjusting the margin amount, set the top and bottom, and left and right values within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Variable ShiftYou can set the margin amount. Set the top and bottom, and left and right values within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

Image Rotation (Making Copies with the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally)

If the orientation of the paper currently loaded in the tray differs from that of the document that is loaded, the machine automatically rotates the document image to make copies with the document and paper orientations matched. You can also select where to use as a reference for image rotation if documents are of mixed orientations.The image rotation feature can only be used to make copies to paper of A4 and 8.5 x 11 inches or smaller.

1 Select [Image Rotation].

2 Select any item.

OffCopies of documents are made as they are, even if they are orientated differently.

Always OnThe document image is automatically rotated so that the orientation of the document matches that of the paper.

On during AutoThe document image is automatically rotated so that the orientation of the document matches that of the paper when [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] or [Auto Paper] of [Paper Supply] is selected.

Rotation DirectionDisplays the [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] screen.Refer to "[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen" (P.90).

4 Copy

90

Copy

4

[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] ScreenYou can set the reference position for rotation.

1 Select [Rotation Direction].

2 Select any item.

Staple PositionWhen the finisher is installed, [Staple Position] is displayed. If documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated to match the stapling edge based on the staple feature settings.

Portrait Original - Left EdgeIf documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated so that the top edge of a landscape document is aligned with the left edge of a portrait document.

Portrait Original - Right EdgeIf documents are of mixed orientations, the image will be rotated so that the top edge of a landscape document is aligned with the right edge of a portrait document.

Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images)Copies can be made with the left and right sides of the document image reversed or the colors reversed in Output Color of the document image.Note • When Output Color is set to Black or Single Color, the density (contrast) is reversed for black

and white.• When Output Color is set to Full Color, the complementary colors are reversed.• When [Negative Image] and [Edge Erase] are set simultaneously, the edge erase area turns

to white.

1 Select [Invert Image]

2 Select any item.

Mirror ImageThe left and right sides of the document image are reversed.

Negative ImageThe density (contrast) of the document image is reversed.

Layout Adjustment

91

Copy

4



1 Select [Original Orientation].

2 Select [Upright Images] or [Sideways Images] in accordance with the orientation of the document loaded.



2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)Copies of 1 sided and 2 sided documents can be made on one side or both sides.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


1 Select [2 Sided Copying].

2 Select any item.

1 1 SidedMakes a copy of a 1 sided document on one side of the paper.

1 2 SidedMakes a copy of a 1 sided document on both sides of the paper.

2 2 SidedMakes a copy of a 2 sided document on both sides of the paper.

2 1 SidedMakes a copy of a 2 sided document on one side of the paper.

4 Copy

92

Copy

4

OriginalsHead to HeadSelect this item when the first and second sides of the document are of the same orientation.

Head to ToeSelect this item when the first and second sides of the document are of the opposite orientation. This appears when [2 - 2 Sided] or [2 - 1 Sided] is selected.

CopiesHead to HeadSelect this item when you want the orientation of the first and second sides of the copy to be the same as that of the document.

Head to ToeSelect this item when you want the orientation of the first and second sides of the copy to be the opposite of that of the document. This appears when [1 - 2 Sided] or [2 - 2 Sided] is selected.





Output Format

93

Copy

4

Output Format

On the [Output Format] screen, you can configure features for outputting documents. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)....................................................................................... 94Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies) ....................................................................................... 97Transparency Separators (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)............................. 99Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet)......................................................... 100Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets).............................................. 101Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet) .......................................................... 102Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies) ..................................................... 103Watermark (Printing Control Number on Background) .......................................................... 110Tab Margin Shift (Copying on Tab Paper) .............................................................................. 113Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down) ................................................................. 114Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded paper) ..................................................................................... 115Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet) ......................................... 1152 Sided Copying (Making 2-sided Copies) .............................................................................. 116Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)................................................................. 116ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card) ........................................................... 118

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy]

2 Select the [Output Format] tab and then select a feature on the [Output Format] screen.

4 Copy

94

Copy

4

Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)The machine can copy pages laid out so as when multiple-page sheets are overlaid and folded along the center (gutter), a booklet is created in page order. You can also set the binding shift and attach a cover when binding documents.When the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed, [Folding Only] or [Fold & Staple] becomes available.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


Note • If the number of pages in the booklet is not a multiple of four, the remaining pages will be blank pages.

• If [Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For more information, refer to "Auto Paper Off" (P.232).

1 Select [Booklet Creation].

2 Select any item.

OffBooklet Creation is not applied to copies.

On - Create BookletCopies are made to enable left binding or top binding.

On - Right Bind Create BookletCopies are made to enable right binding.

On - Do not create BookletYou can output the copies of scanned documents as they are by specifying Fold & Staple Options. Select this item when you do not need a document to be copied in page order.

CoversYou can make copies with a cover attached.

No CoversNo cover is added.

Blank CoversA blank sheet of paper is attached as the cover.

Font Cover - 2 SidedThe first and second pages of the original are used as the cover.

Front & Back Covers - Print OutsideThe first page of the original is used as the outer page of the cover.

Last Page on Back CoverThe last page of the original is used as the back cover of the booklet. Select the check box to use the last page as the back cover. When using [Divide Output] to separate booklets, the cover will be made on the last page of the last subset.

Output Format

95

Copy

4

Note • Depending on the number of pages in the original, a blank sheet may be inserted before the last page.

Binding ShiftDisplays the [Booklet Creation - Binding Shift] screen.Refer to "[Booklet Creation - Binding Shift] Screen" (P.95).

Divide OutputDisplays the [Booklet Creation-Divide Output ] screen.Refer to "[Booklet Creation - Divide Output] Screen" (P.95).

Fold & Staple OptionsDisplays the [Booklet Creation-Fold & Staple Options] screen.Refer to "[Booklet Creation- Fold & Staple Options] Screen" (P.96).

Paper Tray SettingsDisplays the [Booklet Creation-Covers-Paper Tray Settings] screen.Select the tray to use from [Main Body Tray] and [Covers Tray]. Select trays with paper of the same size and orientation for the copy paper and the cover.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. Refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.67).

[Booklet Creation - Binding Shift] ScreenYou can specify a ratio within the range from 0 to 50mm in 1 mm increments.

1 Use [ ] and [ ] to specify a binding shift value.

[Booklet Creation - Divide Output] ScreenWhen you have a large number of originals, the originals are divided to create subsets to reduce the thickness of each booklet. The machine folds copies in half, and piles them up to form a booklet. This feature can be set to from 1 to 50 pages in 1 page increments.Note • When specifying [Folding], set the dividing number of sheets in the range from 1 to 15.

4 Copy

96

Copy

4

1 Select [On].

2 Set the number of copies using [ ] and [ ] or with the numeric keypad.

[Booklet Creation- Fold & Staple Options] ScreenWhen the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed, [Folding Only] or [Fold & Staple] becomes available.

1 Select any item.

No Fold & StapleNo Finishing is carried out.

Folding OnlyOutputting copies folded in half. The number of copies that can be folded is 5. When the number is more than 5, the document is divided by every 5 sheets.

Fold & StapleThe copies are folded in half and stapled at the center.The number of copies that can be treated is 2 to 15.

Output Format

97

Copy

4

Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies)You can make copies with a cover attached.The front cover can be output before the first page of the document on a different type of paper (e.g. colored paper or heavyweight paper).Important • When you select this feature, if the number of the document pages exceeds the maximum

that the machine can scan, the document already scanned cannot be printed. In this case, cancel the job following the message displayed. The number of the document pages that can be scanned is 999 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the total numbers are about 1,500 pages for color documents or about 6,000 pages for black and white documents, if the document size is A4 (Xerox standard document). This figure could be used only as a guide, since the maximum number of the document pages depends on the types, sizes and direction of the document.

Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

• When making 2 sided copies, copies are made on both sides of the top cover/back cover in accordance with the page order of the document.

• If [Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For more information, refer to "Auto Paper Off" (P.232).

1 Select [Covers].

2 Select any item.

Front CoverSetting front cover for the first page can be done.

No CoversA cover is not attached.


Printed Cover - Print OutsideThe document is copied on the external sides of front cover from the first page. Select when you want to copy only on the external side of the front cover.

Printed Cover - Print InsideThe document is copied on the internal sides of front cover from the first page. Select when you want to copy only on the internal side of the front cover.

4 Copy

98

Copy

4

Printed Cover - 2 SidedThe document is copied to the both sides of cover from the first page. Select when you want to copy on both sides.

Back CoverSetting back cover for the last page can be made. When attaching a back cover, you need to scan a document corresponding to the back cover first.

No CoversA cover is not attached.


Printed Cover - Print OutsideCopies one document applicable to a back cover on the external side of the back cover.

Printed Cover - Print InsideCopies one document applicable to a back cover on the internal side of the back cover.

Printed Cover - 2 SidedCopies two documents applicable to a back cover on the both sides of the back cover.

Paper Tray SettingsDisplays the [Covers - Paper Tray Settings] screen. Select the paper tray to use from [Front Cover Tray], [Back Cover Tray] and [Main Body Tray]. When pasting image to the cover, select trays with paper of the same size and orientation for the text and the cover.

Front CoverSelect the tray to be used for the front cover sheet.

Back Cover Select the tray to be used for the back cover sheet.

Main Body Select the tray to be used for the body sheet.

Output Format

99

Copy

4

[Front Cover Quantity]You can specify the number of cover sheets used for front cover in the range between 1 and 99 for insertion. Prints the front cover equally as the body text, even if multiple number of copies are made.

1 Use [ ] and [ ] or numeric keypad to specify necessary number of sheets are loaded.

Transparency Separators (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)

A blank sheet can be output inserted as a separator between copied transparencies. At the same time, only the required number of copies for distribution is printed. When loading transparencies, make sure that the paper for the separators (or for distribution) is loaded at the same orientation as that of the transparencies.Important • Use V516 (Xerox film [no border]) transparency sheets. Using transparency sheets for color

(V556/V558 [with white boarder]) may cause a malfunction or paper jam.

Note • When loading A4 size transparencies on Tray 5 (bypass), we recommend loading them vertically.

• If [Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in "Auto Paper Off" (P.232) is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary.

1 Select [Transparency Separators].

2 Select any item.

No SeparatorsTransparency separators are not used.

Blank SeparatorsA blank sheet of paper is inserted as a separator each time a transparency is copied. Only one set of copies can be made.

Blank Separators & HandoutsA blank sheet of paper is inserted as a separator each time a transparency is copied. At the same time, only the required number of copies for distribution is printed.

4 Copy

100

Copy

4

Transparency Set & HandoutsCopies are made on transparencies and only the required number of copies for distribution is printed.

Paper Tray SettingsDisplays the [Transparency Tray - Separators Tray] screen. Select each paper tray to use. From [Transparency Tray], select transparency size and orientation. From [Separators Tray], select the tray to be used. Select trays with paper of the same size and orientation for the transparency and the separators (N Sets).

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet)2, 4, or 8 sheets of documents can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.When you select [Multiple Up], [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected automatically. The machine automatically sets the copy ratio and makes copies of the images so that they fit on the selected paper.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


Note • When [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is cancelled (a new copy ratio is selected), image loss may occur depending on the document image size of the document.

• When margin shift is set, shift is executed on the whole document. For this reason, image loss at the edge of the original may occur depending on the document image size of the document.

• When Edge Erase is set, edges are erased for each document copied to the whole document.

• Select the other than [Auto] for the paper tray of [Paper Supply] on the [General Settings] screen. If [Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in "Auto Paper Off" (P.232) is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary.

1 Select [Multiple-Up].

2 Select any item.

1 Page UpMultiple-Up is not applied.

2 Pages UpTwo document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.

4 Pages UpFour document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.

8 Pages UpEight document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.

Reading OrderYou can select the layout for copying the documents together.

Output Format

101

Copy

4





Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)An enlarged copy of a document can be made spread over multiple sheets.This feature allows you to create a large poster by pasting together the copies spread over multiple sheets. Copied sheets are provided with a paste margin so that they can be pasted together. This paste margin is fixed to 10 mm.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


Note • This feature is not supported by the document feeder.

1 Select [Poster].

2 Select [Output Size] or [Enlargement %].

No PostersPoster is not applied to copies.

Output SizeYou can select a paper size.

Enlargement %Refer to "When [Enlargement %] is Selected" (P.102).

Paper Tray SettingsDisplays the [Poster - Paper Tray Settings] screen.Select the paper tray to use.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For information, refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.67).

4 Copy

102

Copy

4

When [Enlargement %] is SelectedYou can specify a different ratio for the height and width.

1 Select [Enlargement %].

2 Use [ ] and [ ] to specify the height and width ratios.

Width X/Length YSet the height and width ratios within the range from 100 to 400% in 1% increments.

XYYou can simultaneously change the numerical values of the height and width by the same amount.

Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)A document image can be copied on one sheet of paper repeatedly for a specified number of times.When the copy ratio is set to [Auto], the repeated copies of the image are reduced to fit on the selected paper. You can also specify how the repeated copies of the image are arranged.Note • When making repeat copies at the same size as the document image, specify a number of

repeats that will fit on the paper.• If [Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically

selected. Change the settings if necessary. For more information, refer to "Auto Paper Off" (P.232).

1 Select [Repeat Image].

2 Select [Auto Repeat] or [Variable Repeat].

1 Page UpImage Repeat is not applied.

Auto RepeatThe machine automatically sets the number of copies according to the document size, paper size, and copy ratio, and then repeatedly copies the document image onto the paper.Note • Copies cannot be made when the document image is larger than the specified paper size.

Variable RepeatSpecify the number of times to repeatedly copy the document image along each of the long and short sides of the paper. You can specify from 1 to 23 repeats along the long side (Y) and from 1 to 33 repeats along the short side (X).

Output Format

103

Copy

4

Image LayoutEvenly SpacedThe specified number of images are evenly arranged on the paper.

Side by SideThe specified number of images are arranged with no clearance on the paper.

Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies)You can add a stamp, date, and page number not included on the document to copy paper when outputting copies.You can select from already provided formats for the stamp type, date, page number, and printing position.Important • When you select this feature, if the number of the document pages exceeds the maximum

that the machine can scan, the document already scanned cannot be printed. In this case, cancel the job following the message displayed. The number of the document pages that can be scanned is 999 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the total numbers are about 1,500 pages for color documents or about 6,000 pages for black and white documents, if the document size is A4 (Xerox standard document). This figure could be used only as a guide, since the maximum number of the document pages depend of the types, sizes and direction of the document.

Note • The annotation image and character size is not changed even if you set the enlarge/reduce setting.

• If Stamp, Date, and Page Number are specified at the same time, we recommend confirming that none of the positions overlap before making copies.

• If [Multiple-Up] is set, the annotation is added to the combined image.• If [Repeat Image] or [Booklet Creation] is set, the annotation is added to each individual

image.

1 Select [Annotation].

2 Select any item.

StampDisplays the [Stamp] screen. Refer to "Annotation - Create Stamps" (P.239).

DateDisplays the [Date] screen. Refer to "Annotation - Create Stamps" (P.239).

Page NumberDisplays the [Page Number] screen. Refer to "Annotation - Create Stamps" (P.239).

4 Copy

104

Copy

4

Bates StampingDisplays the [Bates Stamping] screen. Refer to "Annotation - Create Stamps" (P.239).





[Stamp] ScreenYou can set the style and position of the stamp.

1 Select any item

OffNo stamp is added.

OnA stamp is added.

TextDisplays the [Stamp-Text] screen.You can select the text for stamp. You can specify text from 8 preset text or the text set in the System Administration mode.For information on how to register text, refer to "Custom Text 1 to 3" (P.217).

Print On…Displays the [Stamp - Print On] screen.You can select the page(s) to print the stamp from [First Page Only] and [All Pages].

PositionDisplays the [Stamp - Position] screen. You can select from 9 positions for the stamp.In addition, you can select the stamp position for Side 2, from either [Same as Side 1] or [Opposite to Side 1].

Detailed SettingsDisplays the [Stamp - Detailed Settings] screen.You can select from 3 sizes and 7 colors for the stamp. You can set the stamp size in the range from 6 to 64 points in 1 point increments.

Output Format

105

Copy

4

If [Date] and [Page Number] are both set, specify [Black] for stamp color.

[Date] ScreenYou can make copies with a date added. The printed date is the date and time that the printing was started.For information about the date display format, refer to "Date" (P.195).

1 Select any item.

OffNo date is added.

OnA date is added.

Print On...Displays the [Date - Print On] screen. You can select to print the date on the first page only or to print on all pages.

PositionDisplays the [Date - Position] screen. You can select from 6 positions for the date.In addition, you can select the date position for Side 2, from either [Same as Side 1] or [Opposite to Side 1].

SizeDisplays the [Date - Size] screen.You can select from 3 sizes for the stamp. You can also specify the stamp size in the range from 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.

[Page Number] ScreenYou can add a page number to copies.

1 Select any item.

OffNo page number is added.

OnA page number is added.

4 Copy

106

Copy

4

StyleYou can select from the 6 numbers for the page.

1, 2, 3Only page number is added.

-1-, -2-, -3-A hyphen is added to the left and right of the page number. (Example: -1-)

Page1, Page2, Page3"Page" is added in front of the page number. (Example: Page1, Page2)

1/N, 2/N, 3/N...The total number of pages is added to the right side of the page number. (Example: 1/50, 2/50)When selecting [1/N,2/N,....], the value specified in [Annotation - Page Number - Total Page (N)] screen is available.

-1/N-, -2/N-, -3/N-Put total page number beside the right of page number and hyphen the right and left of the page and total page number. (Example: -1/50, -2/50-)When selecting [1/N,2/N,....], the value specified in [Annotation - Page Number - Total Page (N)] screen is available.

Page1/N, Page2/N, Page3/N..."Page" is added in front of the page number and the total number of pages is added to the right side of the page number. (Example: Page1/50, Page2/50)When selecting [Page1/N-, Page2/N-,...], the value specified in [Annotation - Page Number - Total Page(N)] screen is available.

Total Pages (N)[Annotation - Page Number -Total Page (N)] screen appears.

AutoThe number of pages of the document is automatically counted as the total number of pages.

Enter NumberYou can specify the total number of pages within the range from 1 to 999.

Print OnDisplays the [Page Number - Print On] screen.For more information, refer to "[Page Number - Print On] Screen" (P.107).

PositionDisplays the [Annotation - Page Number - Position] screen. You can select from six positions for the page number. In addition, you can select the page number position for Side 2, from either [Same as Side 1] or [Opposite to Side 1].

SizeDisplays the [Annotation - Page Number - Size] screen. You can select from 3 sizes for the page number. You can set size in the range from 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.

Output Format

107

Copy

4

[Page Number - Print On] ScreenYou can specify the page(s) to add a page number.

1 Select any item.

All PagesA page number is added to all pages.

Enter Start Page NumberSpecify the first page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999.Use [ ] and [ ], or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the first page number.

Enter End Page NumberSpecify the last page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999. Use [ ] and [ ], or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the last pagenumber.

Enter Start and End Page NumberSpecify the start and last page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999. Use [ ] and [ ], or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the start and last page numbers.

Include Covers/SeparatorsThis item is available only when [All Pages] is selected. Add a check to include a cover or separators. Note • You cannot make copies on the paper (Covers/Transparency Separators) loaded in the tray

8 (interposer).

Start NumberSpecify the start number for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 9999. To enter the number with the numeric keypad, select [Enter Number Using Keypad] and then enter the number.

4 Copy

108

Copy

4

[Bates Stamping] ScreenYou can add text and a page number with a character string to copies.

1 Select any item.

OffNo character string and page number is added.

OnA character string with page number is added.

PrefixUse the pop-up keypad to enter a character string. Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be set.

Number of Digits[Bates Stamping - Number of Digits] screen appears.Use this option to specify the number of digits for page numbers. There is a choice of auto and manual settings. You can set the digit number in the range from 1 to 9 digits in 1 increments.

Print OnDisplays the [Bates Stamping - Print On] screen.For more information, refer to "[Page Number - Print On] Screen" (P.107).

PositionDisplays the [Bates Stamping - Position] screen. You can select from six positions for the bates stamping. In addition, you can select the bates stamping position for Side 2, from either [Same as Side 1] or [Opposite to Side 1].

SizeDisplays the [Bates Stamping - Size] screen. You can select from 3 sizes for the page number. You can set size in the range from 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.

Output Format

109

Copy

4

[Bates Stamping - Print On] ScreenYou can specify the page(s) to add text and a page number.

1 Select any item.

All PagesA page number is added to all pages.

Enter Start Page NumberSpecify the first page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999.Use [ ] and [ ], or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the first page number.

Enter End Page NumberSpecify the last page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999. Use [ ] and [ ], or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the last pagenumber.

Enter Start and End Page NumberSpecify the start and last page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999. Use [ ] and [ ], or select [Enter Number using Keypad] and enter the start and last page numbers.

Include Covers/SeparatorsThis item is available only when [All Pages] is selected. Add a check to include a cover or separators. Note • You cannot make copies on the paper (Covers/Transparency Separators) loaded in the tray

8 (interposer).

Start NumberSpecify the start number for adding page numbers. When [Number of Digits] is not specified, enter a value between 1 and 999999999 digits. When [Number of Digits] is specified, enter a value in a specified range. To enter the number with the numeric keypad, select [Enter Number Using Keypad] and then enter the number. Note • When the page number exceeds the specified digits during copying, copying is cancelled.

4 Copy

110

Copy

4

Watermark (Printing Control Number on Background)You can faintly print a sequential control number on the background of each copy set. For example, if you set “1” for the start page, “1” is printed on all page of the first copy set and “2” is printed on all pages of the second set.To prevent, for instance, the duplication of confidential documents for distribution at conferences, you can use sequential numbering to associate distribution copies to people.Important • When you select this feature, if the number of the document pages exceeds the maximum

that the machine can scan, the document already scanned cannot be printed. In this case, cancel the job following the message displayed. The number of the document pages that can be scanned is 999 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the total numbers are about 1,500 pages for color documents or about 6,000 pages for black and white documents, if the document size is A4 (Xerox standard document). This figure could be used only as a guide, since the maximum number of the document pages depend of the types, sizes and direction of the document.

1 Select [Watermark].

2 Select any item.

Control Number - OffNo control numbers are printed.

Control Number - OnControl numbers are printed.

Start NumberYou can set a control number within the range from 1 to 9999. When you put control number, use [ ] and [ ] or the numeric keypad to enter the start number.

TextDisplays the [Watermark - Text] screen. For more information, refer to "[Watermark - Text] Screen" (P.111).

Date & TimeYou can print the date and time that copying started. Check when printing the date.For information about the format for the date, refer to "Date Format" (P.216).

Serial NumberThe serial number of the machine is printed. Check when printing the serial number.

Output Format

111

Copy

4





Text EffectDisplays the [Watermark - Text Effect] screen. For more information refer to "[Watermark - Text Effect] Screen" (P.112).

[Watermark - Text] ScreenYou can select from three character types for the Watermark.

1 Select [On].

Select any item.

OffNo text is printed.

OnText is printed. You can select the text for stamp. You can specify text from 3 preset text or the text set in the System Administration mode.For information on how to register text, refer to "Custom Text 1 to 3" (P.217).

4 Copy

112

Copy

4

[Watermark - Text Effect] ScreenYou can set the text effect.If you set a text effect and make a copy, text strings specified in [Control Number], [Text], [Date & Time], and [Serial Number] of the [Watermark] screen are embedded in the background. When making a copy of a document that has been copied with Text Effect, the embedded text on the output copy is either printed in an embossed or outline state.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 Select any item.

OffPrint the specified text as it is.

EmbossedWhen making a copy of a document that has been copied with the text effect, the embedded text on the output copy is printed in an embossed state.

OutlineWhen making a copy of a document that has been copied with the text effect, the embedded text on the output copy is printed in an outline state.

For information on the background patterns, refer to "Background Pattern" (P.217).

Output Format

113

Copy

4

Tab Margin Shift (Copying on Tab Paper)You can copy images from a document tab paper by specifying the copied position, so that the image would be copied onto the tab.Sizes of Tab paper can be copied are A4 , 8.5 x 11 inches .An available tray for this feature is only the Tray 5 (bypass). When loading the tab paper in the Tray 5 (bypass), load the paper with the side to be copied facing up and with the edge opposite to the tab to be fed first.

1 Select [Tab Margin Shift].

2 Select any item.

OffNo copied on the tab paper.

Shift to TabCopy the image on the edge of the document to the only the tab part of the paper.Specify the Shift Value to shift the image being on the edge of the document so that the image would be copied onto the tab. (Enter the Shift Value to shift the image of the document onto the tab for copying.) Only the image shifted can be copied.

Shift AllCopy whole image of the document to the index paper.Specify the [Shift Value] when you also wish to shift the image on the edge of the document onto the tab for copying.

Shift ValueSpecify the position to shift within the range of 0 to 15 mm.

Paper SupplySelect paper tray for loading tab paper.

Tab Stock SizeSelect the size of tab paper.

Tab Stock TypeSelect the quality of tab paper.

4 Copy

114

Copy

4

Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down)You can select whether copies should be output facing up or down.

1 Select [Output Orientation].

2 Select any item.

AutoAutomatically determines whether the copies should be output facing up or down.

Face UpCopies are output facing up and delivered from the last page.

Face DownCopies are output facing down and delivered from the last page.

Face Up (Reverse Order)Copies are delivered from the first page facing up.Note • Whether [Face Up Reverse Order] is displayed depends on the system setting. For

information, refer to "Output Orientation - Reverse Order" (P.233).

Output Format

115

Copy

4

Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded paper)You can make copies to be folded in half.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.• The supported paper orientation is only . Select the tray whose orientation is set to .• If [Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in "Auto Paper Off" (P.232) is automatically

selected. Change the settings if necessary.

1 Select [Folding].

2 Select any item.

NoneA copy is not folded.

Z Tri-FoldCopies are folded in three with the printed side inside.

C Tri-FoldCopies are folded in three with the printed side outside.

Bi-FoldCopies are folded in half.

Print InsideFolds copies so that the image is printed inside.

Print OutsideFolds copies so that the image is printed outside.

Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)Repeatedly copies one original onto equally divided areas according to the specified number of copies.Note • When anything other than [Auto%] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge], image loss may occur

at edges depending on the image size of the document.• If [Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in "Auto Paper Off" (P.232) is automatically

selected. Change the settings if necessary.

1 Select [Preset Repeat Image].

2 Select any item.

1 Page UpOne copy of the document image is made on a single sheet of paper.

2 Pages UpTwo copies of the document image are made on a single sheet of paper.

4 Copy

116

Copy

4

4 Pages UpFour copies of the document image are made on a single sheet of paper.

8 Pages UpEight copies of the document image are made on a single sheet of paper.

2 Sided Copying (Making 2-sided Copies)This feature is the same as [2 Sided Copying] of the [Layout Adjustment] screen.Refer to "2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)" (P.91).

Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)You can specify the copy output method.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


If the offset stacking module is installed, the output position of copies is offset alternately to distinguish each set of copies.If the finisher is installed, each set of copies can be stapled or punched, and then output.The output destination is automatically selected depending on the selected feature. Documents are delivered on the output tray when [Auto] is selected, or on the finisher tray when [Collated/Stapling/Punching] or [Uncollated] is selected. For the machine with the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker, when [Folding/Stapling] for [Booklet Creation] or [Bi-Folding] for [Folding] is selected, documents are delivered on the booklet tray.

1 Select [Copy Output].

2 Select any item.

AutoCopies are output collated when auto document feeder, 2 Sided Book Copy, Covers, [Blank Separators & Distribution Sets] or [No Separators + Distribution Sets] of [Transparency Separators], Booklet Creation, Stapling, Build Job, Sample Set, and [Document 50 sheets] are set.

Collated Stapling/PunchingThe machine can output sheets sorted into sets that are arranged in page order.

UncollatedThe machine can output the specified number of copies and sort sheets by page.

Uncollated with SeparatorsThe machine outputs copies with inserting blank sheets as a separator and sorts sheets by page.

Output Format

117

Copy

4

StaplingSelect from 8 staple positions: 1 Staple, Top Left; 2 Staples, Left; 2 Staples, Top; 1 Staple, Top Right; 2 Staples, Right; 1 Staple, Left Center; 1 Staple, Top; and 1 Staple, Right Center.You can set the stapling position. The number of pages that can be stapled is 2 to 50 (P paper and J paper). Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, heavyweight paper 1 (105 - 176 g/m2), heavyweight paper 1 (side 2), heavyweight paper 2 (177 - 280 g/m2), coated paper (105 - 176 g/m2), coated paper 1 (side 2), punched paper, tab paper (105 - 176 g/m2), and custom paper 1 to 5 can be stapled.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the

[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.• The staple direction appearing on the screen and the direction in which staples are actually

stapled may differ depending on the combination of the document size and orientation in the following cases:When placing documents in Head to Top orientation and staples on the top right When placing documents in Head to Left orientation and staples on the top left

Hole PunchingYou can set the position for punching. Choices of positions are 2 Holes/Left, 2 Holes/Top, 2 Holes/Right, 4 Holes/Left, 4 Holes/Top, and 4 Holes/Right.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the

[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.• When the C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed and the punching feature

is out of order, the documents will be output on the center output tray. Remove the documents output to the center output tray frequently.

Z FoldThe machine folds the output copies in Z fold. Z fold can be applied to B4, A3, 11 x 17". If you have mixed sized documents, the width (vertical direction) of the paper must be the same, such as a combination of A4 (portrait) and A3 (landscape), and a combination of B5 (portrait) and B4 (landscape). For example, if you have a combination of A4 (portrait) and A3 (landscape), the Z fold is only applied to A3.





4 Copy

118

Copy

4

ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card)ID Card Copy allows copying of both sides of an ID or small document onto one sheet of paper.

1 Place the document face down, and align it against the top left corner of the document glass, and then close the document cover.Note • When using this feature, place

the document on the document glass. This feature does not work when the document is set in the document feeder.

• Confirm that the orientation of the document is correct.

• If information near an edge of the image is lost, slightly shift the document position on the document glass to prevent image loss.

For information about the orientation of loaded documents, refer to "Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents)" (P.85).

2 Select [ID Card Copying].

3 Select any item.

OffThe ID Card Copy feature is not executed.

OnThe ID Card Copy feature is executed.

Job Assembly

119

Copy

4

Job Assembly

On the [Job Assembly] screen, you can configure the Build Job and Sample Set features. The following shows the reference section for features that can be configured on [Job Assembly].

Build Job (Making Copies of Documents with Different Settings in a Single Operation) ...... 119Sample Set (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy) ........................................................ 122Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals).............................................................................. 123Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area when Copying).................................................................................................................................................. 124Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job) .............................................. 126


2 Select the [Job Assembly] tab and then select a feature on the [Job Assembly] screen that appears.

Build Job (Making Copies of Documents with Different Settings in a Single Operation)

This feature allows you to change and save settings individually for each document page or stack and then to finally make copies of documents with different settings as one job.Important • When using tab stock with [Covers], [Tab Margin Shift], or [Separators] selected, [Output

Orientation] must be set to [Face Down].

1 Select [Build Job].

2 Select [On].

3 Select items as necessary.Note • Select [ ] to return to the


OffBuild Job is not applied.

OnBuild Job is applied. The feature buttons appear on the screen. The settings for the entire document are set first.

4 Copy

120

Copy

4

Important • The features set here cannot be changed or cancelled during the operation.For the features that can be set here, refer to "Features that can be set in Build Job" (P.120).

Features that can be set in Build JobFor information about the feature, refer to "Copy Output (Outputting by Specifying Finishing)" (P.116).

Copy OutputFor information about the feature, refer to "Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down)" (P.114).

Booklet CreationFor information about the feature, refer to "Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)" (P.94).

CoversFor information about the feature, refer to "Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies)" (P.97).

Note • Copying cannot be made on covers attached to a build job.

AnnotationFor information about the feature, refer to "Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies)" (P.103).

SeparatorsFor information about the feature, refer to "Transparency Separators (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)" (P.99).

WatermarksFor information about the feature, refer to "Watermark (Printing Control Number on Background)" (P.110).

Output OrientationFor information about the feature, refer to "Output Orientation (Specifying Face Up or Down)" (P.114).

[Build Job - Separators] ScreenSeparators can be inserted between segments. The number of separator sheets per segment can be set to from 1 to 99.Note • The setting can be changed for each segment. Note that the previous setting stays in effect

until you change it.

1 Select any item.

2 Use the numeric keypad or the [ ] and [ ] buttons to enter the number of separator sheets to be inserted.

No SeparatorsSeparators are not inserted.

Blank SeparatorsA blank separator is inserted.After selecting this option, place originals and then press the <Start> button to insert blank separators.

Printed Separator - Side 1

Job Assembly

121

Copy

4

The first page of the original is printed on Side 1 of separator sheets. The second and subsequent pages are printed on text pages.When [Multiple-Up] is selected, pages 1 through n (2, 4 or 6) are copied on a separator sheet.In the case of a copy job consisting of only one page, it is copied on a separator sheet only.

Printed Separator - Side 2The first page of the original is printed on Side 2 of separator sheets. The second and subsequent pages are printed on text pages.When [Multiple-Up] is selected, pages 1 through n (2, 4 or 6) are copied on a separator sheet.In the case of a copy job consisting of only one page, it is copied on a separator sheet only.

Printed Separator - 2 SidedThe first and second pages of the original are printed on Sides 1 and 2 of separator sheets. The third and subsequent pages are printed on text pages.When [Multiple-Up] is selected, 2 times pages 1 through n (2, 4 or 6) are copied on a separator sheet.In the case of a copy job consisting only two pages, it is copied on a separator sheet only.Note • When you load a single page original to copy it on Side 1 of separator sheet, and you load

the next job to copy its first page on Side 2 of the same separator sheet, make sure that [Build Job - Separators, 2 sided] is set to [Off] before starting the next job. If an option other than [Off] is selected, the machine recognizes the job as a new job with a new separator setting, thereby makes copy on Sides 1 and 2 of a new separator sheet.

Separators TraySelect the tray to use.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. Refer to "[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.67).

Separators QuantitySet the number of sheets inserted as a separator in the range between 1 and 99 sheets. This item is available only when [Blank Separators] is selected.

4 Copy

122

Copy

4

Sample Set (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)When making multiple sets of copies, you can make a proof set to check the finished output and then print the remaining copies. You can select to continue or cancel the job after the confirmation. you can also change the number of copies. The number of sets to be copied can also be changed. The sample is included in the total number of sets.Note • When the time period specified for [Auto Clear] elapses after a sample set has been copied,

the display returns to the previous screen. Adjust the setting for [Auto Clear] as required. For details about [Auto Clear], refer to "Auto Clear" (P.196).

1 Select [Sample Set].

2 Select [On].

OffNo sample set is made.

OnA sample set is made.

Job Assembly

123

Copy

4

Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals)This feature allows you to copy sheets of documents that cannot be loaded into the document feeder at one time. This feature also enables to copy multiple documents as one job by the document glass.[Next Original] that is usually displayed while scanning documents with the document feeder is always selected in this mode. In addition, when using the document glass to scan documents, [Next Original] is also selected during scanning. If the [Finishing] is set to [Auto], the output is automatically sorted.When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].Note • When the time period specified for [Auto Clear] elapses after a set has been copied, the

display returns to the previous screen. Adjust the setting for [Auto Clear] as required. For details about [Auto Clear], refer to "Auto Clear" (P.196).

1 Select [Combine Original Sets].

2 Select [On].


OffIn the screen displayed during scanning documents with the document feeder with specifying Collated, [Last Original] is selected.

OnIn the screen displayed during scanning documents with the document feeder with specifying Collated, [Next Original] is selected.

Original OrientationRefer to "Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents)" (P.91).

4 Copy

124

Copy

4

Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area when Copying)

Specify an area to delete everything outside or inside of when copying. Up to 3 areas can be specified.

1 Select [Delete Outside/Delete Inside].

2 Select any item.

OffTurn off [Delete Outside/Delete Inside].

Delete OutsideDelete outside of the selected area when copying.

Delete InsideDelete inside of the selected area when copying.

Area SettingsThe [Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area X] screen is displayed. Select up to 3 areas, from [Area 1] to [Area 3].Refer to "[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area X] screen" (P.125).

Target areas of originalsFor 2 sided documents, specify the side of the area you want to delete outside of or inside of.

Both SidesThe setting is applied to both sides of the document.

Side 1 OnlyThe setting is applied to only to Side 1 of the document.

Side 2 OnlyThe setting is applied to only to Side 2 of the document.

Job Assembly

125

Copy

4





[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area X] screenSet the area to delete outside of or inside of. The quadrangle with a diagonal line and 4 straight sides connecting the coordinates, X1/Y1 and X2/Y2 is deleted or extracted area. By making the top right comer of a document into the starting point, the X-axis is set as the direction of width, and the Y-axis is set as the direction of length.You can specify a value of 0 to 432 mm for the width (X) and the length (Y) in 1mm increments.Note • Specify the 2 coordinates from the top right corner of the document.

• When specifying multiple areas, the specified areas can overlap each other.• When [Reduce/Enlarge] is enabled, the specified area will be reduced/enlarged accordingly.

1 Select [Area X].Note • X represents the number of

the area displayed.

2 Enter the value for X1 in [X1] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

3 Enter the value for Y1 in [Y1] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

4 Enter the value for the X2 in [X2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].

5 Enter the value for the Y2 in [Y2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].Note • To change the coordinates you have entered, select [Next], move , and enter the value

again.• If all of [X1], [Y1], [X2], and [Y2] are set to [0], the area will be invalid. If no other area is

specified, the delete outside/inside function cannot be used.

Clear Area XClear the specified areas.Note • X represents the number of the area displayed.

NextThe mark moves to the next coordinate.

4 Copy

126

Copy

4

Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job)It is possible to call a stored program registered for a build job.This feature is the same as the one described in "Calling Stored Programs" in "6. Stored Programming". For more information, refer to "Calling Stored Programs" (P.156).

5 Scan

This chapter describes the scan features provided by this product.The network settings of the machine must be configured in order to use the scan features.

Scanning Procedure .................................................................................128

Stopping the Scan Job..............................................................................134

General Settings .......................................................................................135

Image Quality............................................................................................138

Layout Adjustment ....................................................................................141

Output Format...........................................................................................147

5 Scan

128

Scan

5

Scanning Procedure

This section describes basic scan procedures. The following shows the reference section for each procedure.

Step 1 Loading Documents .......................................................................................................128Step 2 Selecting Features ..........................................................................................................130Step 3 Starting the Scan Job......................................................................................................132Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in the Job Status ....................................................................133Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data ...............................................................................................133

Step 1 Loading DocumentsThere are two methods for loading documents:

Document feederSingle sheet

Multiple sheets

Document glass

Single sheet

Bound documents, such as books

Document FeederThe document feeder (250 sheets) supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 140 x 210 mm (A5, A5 , 5.5 x 8.5 inches, 5.5 x 8.5 inches ) to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.

The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] field.For information about entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying an Original Size)" (P.143).Note • The standard document sizes that can be auto-detected depend on the [Paper Size


For information about scanning documents of mixed size, refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.144).

Important • Place folded or creased documents on the document glass to avoid paper jams in the document feeder.

• 2 sided scanning of lightweight paper documents (38 - 48 g/m2) is not supported.

Document type (weight) Number of sheets

Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) 250

Plain paper (50 - 80 g/m2) 250

Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 g/m2)

150

Heavyweight paper (129 - 200 g/m2)

100

Scanning Procedure

129

Scan

5

1 Remove any paper clips and staples before loading the documents.

2 Adjust the movable document guides to match the size of the document loaded.Note • When loading a large

document such as A3, pick up the document feeder tray and open the document stopper rightward.

3 Place the document face up (the face of 2 sided document up) in the center of the document feeder.Note • The <Confirmation> indicator

lights up when the document is loaded correctly.

When loading the document in the document feeder, you can set timing for lifting up the document feeder tray. For more information, refer to "Document Feeder Tray Elevation" (P.223).

Document GlassOn the document glass, you can place a single sheet, or a book or other similar documents up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] field.For information about entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying an Original Size)" (P.143).Note • The standard document sizes that can be auto-detected depend on the [Paper Size


1 Open the document cover.

2 Place the document face down, and align it against the top left corner of the document glass.

3 Close the document cover.Note • When a standard size

document is placed on the document glass, the size of the document is displayed in the message area.

5 Scan

130

Scan

5

Step 2 Selecting FeaturesScans a document after specifying the file (job template) set with scanning conditions, information about the transfer destination server and other information.Job templates are created on a computer using the Webtools. Scanned data is converted to PDF,TIFF or JPEG format via Network Controller. The machine automatically receives the job template created by the WebTools.For information about the WebTools, refer to "Utilities" contained in USER DOCUMENTATIONS for the Network Controller.


2 Select [Network Scanning].

3 Specify a job template.Note • If a created job template is not

displayed, select [Refresh].

Job TemplateSelect a job template that is configured with the scan parameters you want. Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Go toEntering a job template number with the numeric keypad causes that job template to appear at the top of the list.

Template DescriptionYou can display a description of the job template.

4 Select the features to set from each tab as necessary.

For information about each of these features, refer to the following sections."General Settings" (P.135)

@ @


Scanning Procedure

131

Scan

5

"Image Quality" (P.138)"Layout Adjustment" (P.141)"Output Format" (P.147)

Template DescriptionYou can display a description of the job template. However, a description only appears if it has been set when the job template was created.

1 Select the job template, and select [Template Description].

5 Scan

132

Scan

5

Step 3 Starting the Scan Job

1 Press the <Start> button.Important • If the document has been set

in the document feeder, do not press the document while it is being conveyed.

Note • If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the touch screen. Solve the problem in accordance with the message.

• The following job configurations can be performed while scanning.

If You Have More DocumentsIf you have another document, select the [Next Original] on the touch screen while the current document is being scanned. This allows you to scan several documents as one set of data.Up to 999 pages can be stored.Note • If the number of document pages exceeds this maximum, then scanning stops. Follow the

displayed message, and either abort the operation, or save the scanned document data.

2 While documents are being scanned, select [Next Original].Note • When the screen is displayed and no operation is performed during a certain period of time,

the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.• When using the document feeder, set the next documents after the first documents are all

scanned.• You can change the scan settings for the next document by selecting [Change Scan

Settings] displayed after selecting the [Next Original].

3 Load the next document.

4 Press the <Start> button. If you have more documents, load the next document and press the <Start> button.

5 When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].

@ @

<Start> button

Scanning Procedure

133

Scan

5

Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in the Job Status


2 Confirm the job status. Note • Select [ ] to display the


Step 5 Saving the Scanned DataThe document stored in a mailbox of the machine is imported into your computer by using Filery Webscan. For more information, refer to "Utilities" contained in USER DOCUMENTATIONS for the Network Controller.

<Job Status> button

5 Scan

134

Scan

5

Stopping the Scan Job

Follow the procedure below to cancel a scan.


2 Select [Stop].

3 If the screen in Step 1 does not appear, press the <Job Status> button.

4 Select the job to cancel, and then select [Stop]. Note • When a scan is cancelled,

scan data already stored in a mailbox is deleted.

@ @<Stop> button

<Job Status> button

General Settings

135

Scan

5

General Settings

The Basic Scan screen allows you to configure basic features. For more information, refer to below.

Scanning Color (Selecting the Color to Scan) ......................................................................... 1352 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ........................................................ 136Original Type (Select the Document Type) ............................................................................. 137

Note • [Scanning Color] and [Output Format] in the job template cannot be changed.

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [Network Scanning].

2 Select the [General Settings] tab.

Scanning Color (Selecting the Color to Scan)You can only confirm the Scanning color of the Job Template for the documents to be scanned.

Auto DetectThe color of the document is determined automatically; the machine scans in full color when the document is colored, otherwise scans in monochrome.

ColorChoose to scan a color document.

GrayscaleScan a document in grayscale. Adds shades to monochrome, creating intermediate tones that change gradually. Suited to documents containing gradations that cannot be reproduced with monochrome (2-color).

BlackScan a document in monochrome 2 tone. You can select the document type in the [Original Type].

5 Scan

136

Scan

5

2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)You can automatically scan both sides of a 2 sided document.When setting the binding style, front / back information can also be included in the scanned data.

1 Select any item.

1 SidedSelect to scan only 1 side of the document.

2 Sided (Head to Head)Select when both sides of a 2 sided document are in the same orientation.

2 Sided (Head to Toe)Select when both sides of a 2 sided document are in opposite orientations.

More...The [2 Sided Originals] screen is displayed.Refer to "[2 Sided Originals] Screen" (P.136).

[2 Sided Originals] ScreenSelect when you want to specify the document's orientation and scan both sides.

1 Select either [1 Sided] or [2 Sided].

2 When [2 Sided] is selected, select [Originals].


OriginalsDisplayed when [2 Sided] is selected in the Originals screen.

Head to HeadSelect when both sides of a 2 sided document are in the same orientation.

Head to ToeSelect when both sides of a 2 sided document are in opposite orientations.

General Settings

137

Scan

5

Original OrientationTo scan using the document feeder, the orientation must be set to indicate the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine


Upright ImagesSelect when placing the top of the document facing the inner side of the document glass or the document feeder.

Sideways ImagesSelect when placing the top of the document facing the left side of the document glass or the document feeder. Be sure to select [Head to Left] when the top of the document is placed facing the left side (horizontal text).

Original Type (Select the Document Type)When scanning a document with [Scanning Color] set to [Black] in the [General Settings] screen, select the document type.

1 Select [Original Type].

Photo & TextSelect when scanning documents containing both text and photos. This setting automatically scans text and photo areas with the optimum document quality per area.

TextSelect when scanning text clearly.

PhotoSelect when scanning photos.

5 Scan

138

Scan

5

Image Quality

In the [Image Quality] screen under [Network Scanning], you can configure the image quality features. For more information, refer to below.

Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph)............................................................................138Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Contrast) ............................................................138Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting contrast) .......139Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)..............................................140Color Space (Specifying Color Space) .....................................................................................140

1 Select the [Image Quality] tab, and configure each feature.Note • [Color Space] is not available

for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. A setting must be made in the System Administration mode to activate [Color Space]. For more information, refer to "Shadow Suppression Level" (P.245).

Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph)Configure when scanning a color photograph.This feature is only available when [Scanning Color] is set to [Color] in the [General Settings] screen.Important • This feature is not supported by a document feeder.

1 Select [Photographs].

2 Select [Enhance Photographs].

Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Contrast)You can set the scan density for the documents to be scanned.In addition, when [Scanning Color] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale] in the [General Settings] screen, you can also adjust contrast.

Image Quality

139

Scan

5

1 Select [Image Options].

2 Adjust with [ ] and [ ].

Lighten/DarkenYou can select from among 7 density levels between [Lighter] and [Darker]. Scan density is darker the closer you get to [Darker], and lighter the closer you get to [Lighter].

SharpnessYou can select from 5 sharpness levels between [Soften] and [Sharpen]. The nearer the level is to [Sharpen], the sharper the contours of images. The nearer the level is to [Soften], the softer the contours of images.

Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting contrast)

The background color of a document such as newspaper and colored paper can be erased. In addition, when [Scanning Color] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale] in the [General Settings] screen, you can also adjust contrast.

1 Select [Image Enhancement].

2 Select [Background Suppression] and [Contrast]. Adjust contrast with [ ] and [ ].

Background Suppression

No SuppressionDocument backgrounds are scanned with no filtering.Auto SuppressionWhen a document is scanned with [Black] of [Scanning Color], the background color of documents such as newspaper and colored paper documents is erased. When [Scanning Color] is set to [Color], white backgrounds are suppressed.

ContrastYou can select from 5 contrast levels between [Less Contrast] and [More Contrast]. The nearer the level is to [More Contrast], the greater the difference between light parts and dark parts as light parts become lighter and dark parts become darker. [Less Contrast] contrasts decrease the difference between light and dark areas.

5 Scan

140

Scan

5

Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)When scanning a 2 sided document printed on thin paper, you can suppress the image on the reverse side. Only enabled when [Scanning Color] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale] in the [General Settings] screen.Important • This feature cannot be used with [Photographs].

1 Select [Shadow Suppression].

2 Select [Auto Suppression].

Color Space (Specifying Color Space)You can specify color space for scans.Important • Color Space is available when [Scanning Color] is set to [Color].

Note • This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. A setting must be made in the System Administration mode to display [Color Space] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen. For more information, refer to "Original Orientation" (P.242).

1 Select [Color Space].

2 Select either [Standard Color Space] or [Device Color Space].

Standard Color SpaceColor space for scanned data conforms to sYCC.

Device Color SpaceUse to perform advanced color processing.Note • You can find profile data in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.

• When [Device Color Space] is selected, the image quality features described below are changed to their defaults.Lighten/Darken, Sharpness, Shadow Suppression, Contrast, Background Suppression

• When [Scanning Color] is set to [Auto Detect], [Standard Color Space] is applied to color pages of the documents.

Layout Adjustment

141

Scan

5

Layout Adjustment

In the [Layout Adjustment] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to FTP/SMB], you can configure the scan options. For more information, refer to below.

Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution).............................................................. 1412 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ........................................................ 136Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .............................................. 142Original Size (Specifying an Original Size)............................................................................. 143Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ........................ 144Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) ...................................... 145Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio) ....................................................................... 146

1 Select the [Layout Adjustment] tab, and configure each feature.

Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)You can set the resolution for the documents to be scanned.As the resolution increases, the scan becomes more detailed, but the data size also increases. As the data size increases, scan and transfer times increase as well.

1 Select [Scan Resolution].

2 Select a resolution.

2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)This feature is the same as [2 Sided Originals] in the [General Settings] tab. For information, refer to "2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.136).

5 Scan

142

Scan

5

Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)The Book Scanning feature allows you to scan facing pages of a document onto separate sheets of paper in page order.This feature is useful if you need to make separate scans from facing pages of bound originals such as a booklet.Note • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.

• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.

1 Select [Book Scanning].

2 Select any item.

OffThe document is not scanned as a bound document.

Left Page then RightScans from the left page of facing pages in a document starting from the left page.

Right Page then LeftScans from the right page of facing pages in a document starting from the right page.

Top Page then BottomScans from the top page of facing pages in a document starting from the top page.

Both PagesScans both pages in page order.

Left Page OnlyScans the left page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Right Page OnlyScans the right page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Top Page OnlyScans the top page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Bottom Page OnlyScans the bottom page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.


Layout Adjustment

143

Scan

5

Original Size (Specifying an Original Size)You can set the scan size for the document.Specify the scan size when scanning non-standard size documents or when making scans at a size different from the size of the currently loaded document.When a document size is specified, it is scanned at the specified size regardless of the size of the loaded document. This feature allows you to scan the document with adding or deleting the margin.

1 Select [Original Size].

2 Select a size.

Auto Size DetectScan sizes are detected automatically. The machine can detect the following document sizes.

Note • If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size appears.

• You can change document sizes that can be detected automatically on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer to "Paper Size Settings" (P.219).

Standard SizeSelect a document size from a list of 17 pre-configured types.

Free SizeEnter the desired scan size when scanning non-standard size documents or when making copies at a size different from that of the currently loaded document. Set the size in the document glass X (horizontal) direction within the range 15 to 432 mm and in the Y (vertical) direction within the range 15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments. The scale on the outside of the document glass is a useful reference for specifying the document size.

Document feeder Document glass

Document size B5, B5 , B4, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11 inches, 8.5 x 11 inches , 11 x 17 inches, 16K , 8K

B6, B6 , B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11 inches , 16K, 16K , 8K

5 Scan

144

Scan

5

Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)

When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size documents with the sizes matching the respective sizes of the documents. You can also specify the size of the paper so that scanning is made on the same size of paper.Important • When selecting [Color] for [Scanning Color], and [2 Sided] for [2 Sided Originals], set the

[Scan Resolution] to a maximum of [400dpi].• Be sure to load A5 documents vertically.• When loading a B5 size document with A3 or A4 size documents in a vertical direction, place

the B5 document also in a vertical direction.• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5

portrait and B4 landscape. If the combination of the document sizes is not our recommendation, the documents can be fed at an angle may not be copied properly.

Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

• When setting the [Reduce/Enlarge] to [Auto %] and specifying an [Output Size], the scan is performed with automatic reduce/enlarge to the specified size.

• If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size appears.

1 Select [Mixed Size Originals].

2 Select [On].

OffSelect this item when all documents are of the same size.

OnWhen scanning documents of different sizes, the machine automatically detects the size of each document.

Layout Adjustment

145

Scan

5

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document)When you scan the document cover open or scan a book, black shadows sometimes appear along the edges or center margin of the output scanned image. If this happens, you can scan with the shadows erased.Note • When making 2 sided scans, the same border erase amount is set to the top and reverse

sides.• When selecting [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase dimensions will be reduced or enlarged in

proportion to the ratio you configured.



3 Use [ ] and [ ] to set the width to erase for each of the top and bottom, left and right, and center.


NormalThe border erase amount is set to 2 mm for the top, bottom, left and right.If you do not want to erase edges, set each [Edge Erase] value to 0 mm.

Edge EraseYou can erase only the amount necessary.

Top & Bottom EdgesShadows at the top and bottom of the document are erased. Edges at the top and bottom are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded. The edge erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Left & Right EdgesShadows on the left and right of the document are erased. Edges on the left and right are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded. The edge erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

CenterShadows in the center of documents such as booklets or documents with facing pages are erased. The binding erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Original OrientationIn order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the set document must be configured.For more information, refer to "Original Orientation" (P.137).

5 Scan

146

Scan

5

Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)You can set the scanning ratio for the documents to be scanned.

1 Select [Reduce/Enlarge].

2 Select the scanning ratio.

Proportional %

100%Scan is made at the same size as the document.

Preset % Select from among 12 preset ratios.You can change the indicated ratios. For more information, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.244).

Variable %You can scan by selecting a variable ratio. The ratio can be set within the range 25 - 400% in 1% increments.

Auto %Automatically sets the scanning ratio based on the document size and specified [Output Size].Note • White space after scanning with [Auto %] is blank data.

Output Format

147

Scan

5

Output Format

In the [Output Format] screen, you can configure the output formats. For more information, refer to below.

Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio) ............................................. 147

1 Select the [Output Format] tab. Note • Fields displayed vary

depending on the selected feature.

Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio)When scanning a document from the [General Settings] screen with [Scanning Color] set to [Full Color] or [Grayscale], select the image compression ratio.

1 Select [Image Compression].

2 You can select from among 5 levels of compression, including the 3 below.

HigherImage is saved with high compression. Image quality degrades, but file size decreases.

NormalImage is saved with standard compression. Results in a standard image quality and file size.

LowerImage is saved with low compression. Image quality improves, but file size increases.

6 Stored Programming

This chapter describes the Stored Programming features provided by the machine.

Stored Programming Overview.................................................................150

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs....................................151

Calling Stored Programs...........................................................................156


150

Stored Programm

ing

6

Stored Programming Overview

Frequently used features can be registered as Stored Programming and recalled by a single button operation. In addition, you can also register a screen to open from a shortcut button.Stored Programming not only remembers feature settings, but also can record a series of operations. This enables you to record the hierarchy of displayed screens for each step.For example, Stored Programming can be used when you want to record a procedure starting from pressing the <Machine Status> button, to displaying the [Report Job] screen to print a job history report.

The following shows the reference sections for registering and recalling stored programs.

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs....................................................................151Calling Stored Programs ...........................................................................................................156

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs

151

Stored Programm

ing

6


The [Stored Programming] screen allows you to set the following items:Registering Stored Programs.................................................................................................... 152Registering Stored Program (Build Job) .................................................................................. 153Deleting Stored Programs ........................................................................................................ 154Entering/Changing Stored Program Name............................................................................... 154Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs...................................................................... 155


2 Select [Setup Menu].

3 Select [Stored Programming].


152

Stored Programm

ing

6

Registering Stored ProgramsUp to 58 actions can be registered with one stored program. Up to 40 stored programs can be registered in the machine.The following describes the procedure for registering actions with stored programs.Important • If registered settings such as tray paper size and comments, or default values in the system

settings are changed after a stored program is registered, then the program's content also changes.

Note • Services using System Settings, Job Flow Sheet, Network Scanning, or Address Book cannot be registered.

• The registering procedure for a stored program is cancelled when the <Interrupt> button is pressed, the Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or a popup window (paper jam, etc.) appears.

1 Select [Store].

2 Select the number to register.Note • Once a job is stored to a

button, it cannot be overwritten.

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

3 Set the feature you want to register.Note • The machine produces an

audible tone while a stored memory is registered.

4 Press the <Start> button or <Clear All> button.

You can change the volume of the sound that notifies of stored program registration. For more information, refer to "Stored Programming Tone" (P.199).


153

Stored Programm

ing

6

Registering Stored Program (Build Job)Stored program for Build Job can record up to 40 features. In addition, up to 100 actions can be registered with a stored program.The following describes the procedure for registering actions with a stored program.Important • A stored program, which is registered, may not be called out correctly if following operations

are launched after the stored program registration.• When changing default settings for Watermark feature after a stored program is registered

as the Watermark feature is registered to the stored program.• When features registered to the stored program does not work after default values are

changed by system settings.• When the Passcode for the object of mailbox operation differs from the time of the stored

program registration at the stored program operating mailbox.• When registering the paper size and paper quality of bypass to the selecting the stored

program, register both the size and quality. Only registering the paper size or paper quality may not call for the stored program correctly.

• If launching the following operations while a stored program is being registered, registering a stored program and the stored program performance are not working well.

• Removing and setting a paper tray.• Loading paper into bypass.• Removing paper loaded in bypass.

Note • If the <Interrupt> button is pressed, if the Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or if a popup window (paper jam, etc.) appears, then the stored program record operation is cancelled.

1 Select [Store Build Job].

2 Select the number to register.Note • Once a job is stored to a

button, it cannot be overwritten.

• Select [ ] to display the previous screen and select [ ] to display the next screen.

3 Set the feature you want to register.Note • A tone is generated while

registering to job memory.

4 Press the <Start> button or <Clear All> button.

You can change the volume of the sound that notifies of stored program registration.Refer to "Stored Programming Tone" (P.199) for configuration procedure.


154

Stored Programm

ing

6

Deleting Stored ProgramsThe following describes the procedure for deleting stored programs.

1 Select [Delete].

2 Select the number to delete.Note • Select [ ] to return to the


3 Select [Yes].

YesDeletes a stored program.Note • Deleted stored programs

cannot be restored.

NoCancels deleting a stored program.

Entering/Changing Stored Program NameThe following describes the procedure for entering or changing a name of a stored program.Up to 18 characters are allowed for a stored program's name.For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.193).

1 Select [Enter/Change Name].

2 Select the number to register or change a name.Note • Select [ ] to return to the



155

Stored Programm

ing

6

3 Enter a name, and select [Save]

Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored ProgramsThe following describes the procedure for assigning or changing a icon of a stored program.Nine icons are available.

1 Select [Assign/Change Icon].

2 Select the number to assign or change a icon.Note • Select [ ] to return to the


3 Select a icon, and select [Save].


156

Stored Programm

ing

6

Calling Stored Programs

This describes the procedure for calling a stored program.When calling a specified stored program, the last screen shown when you registered the stored programming appears.


2 Display the next screen, and select [Stored Programming].

3 Select the number of a stored program containing the features you want to use.Note • You can only select registered

numbers.• Select [ ] to return to the


4 After the stored program is called, select other features if necessary.

5 Press the <Start> button if necessary.

@ @


@ @

<Start> button

7 Paper and Other Media

This chapter describes the types of paper that can be used on the machine, precautions when handling paper, and how to load paper in trays.

Paper Types .............................................................................................158

Loading Paper ..........................................................................................162

Changing the Paper Size for the Trays.....................................................173

Changing Paper Settings..........................................................................179


158

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Paper Types

This section describes the kinds of paper available for this device.Use of inappropriate paper may result in paper jams, cause reduced print quality, malfunctions and other trouble. To make full and effect use of the machine's performance, we recommend using only paper recommended by Fuji Xerox.If you want to use paper not recommended by Fuji Xerox, contact our Customer Support Center.Important • The printed image may fade due to moisture such as water, rain or vapor. For more


Supported Paper Weight and Quantity

Plain Paper (Printable Paper)When using supplier paper (known as printable paper) for copying or printing, make sure that it complies with the following specifications. However, it is recommended that you use the standard paper types introduced on the next page, to achieve clear copy and print results.

WARNINGDo not use conductive paper such as carbonic paper or coated paper. When paper jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a fire accident.

Paper tray Weight Loadable quantity Paper type

Paper tray 1 to 2 64 to 176 g/m2 560 sheets Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, transparencies, heavyweight paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), punched paper

Tray 3 980 sheets

Tray 4 1,280 sheets

Tray 5 (bypass)

64 to 280 g/m2 Up to 27mm 250 sheets

Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, transparencies, heavyweight paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), heavyweight paper 2 (177 - 280 g/m2), coated paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), coated paper 2 (177 - 280 g/m2), heavyweight paper 1 (side 2), heavyweight paper 2 (side 2), coated paper 1 (side 2), coated paper 2 (side 2), Labels 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), Labels 2 (177 - 280 g/m2), tack film, punched paper, tab paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), tab paper 2 (177 - 280 g/m2)

Paper Types

159

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Important • Printing with paper whose type or size differs from the paper specified by the print driver, or printing from a tray not supporting the loaded paper can result in paper jams. To ensure correct printing, select the correct paper size, paper type, and paper tray.

Note • Basic weight means a weight of 1 m2 of a paper sheet.• Ream weight means weight of 1,000 sheets of paper in duodecimo size (788 x 1,091mm).• When copying with a non-standard paper size from Tray 5 (bypass), you must manually

enter the paper size. In addition, if you use a non-standard paper size often, you can preset the size in the device. Then the preset size appears under [Standard Sizes] in the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen. For more information, refer to "Tray 5 (Bypass) - Paper Size Defaults" (P.208).

• Image quality best suited to the paper type can be obtained by setting the desired image processing to particular paper types.

Tray 6 (high capacity)(optional)

64 to 176 g/m2 2,300 sheets Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, heavyweight paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), punched paper

Tray 6 (A3+ high capacity)(optional)

64 to 280 g/m2 Plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, transparencies, heavyweight paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), heavyweight paper 2 (177 - 280 g/m2), coated paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), coated paper 2 (177 - 280 g/m2), heavyweight paper 1 (side 2), heavyweight paper 2 (side 2), coated paper 1 (side 2), coated paper 2 (side 2), Labels 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), Labels 2 (177 - 280 g/m2), tack film, punched paper, tab paper 1 (106 - 176 g/m2), tab paper 2 (177 - 280 g/m2)

Paper tray Weight Loadable quantity Paper type


160

Paper and Other M

edia

7

StandardRecommended paper

Usable paperPaper stock that can be used

Special MediaCopy or print can be made on the following paper by using tray 5 (bypass). This type of paper is called Special Media. The type of the special media that can be used is as follows.

Note • For more information about other heavyweight or special media, contact our Customer Support Center.

Paper GSM

FX P Paper 64 g/m2

Colotech+ 90 g/m2

FX J Paper 80 g/m2

FX JD Paper 98 g/m2

FXK-H (H803, H804) 75 g/m2

AG KXPI Blue (A3) 80 g/m2

Paper Q 80 g/m2

Premier (3R91720) 80 g/m2

No.1 (Xerox Brand) 80 g/m2

No.2 (Package Green) 80 g/m2

Purple Wrap (212A00297) 80 g/m2

Business (3R91820) 80 g/m2

Paper GSM (Unit g/m2) and Paper type

Indagiat (K704 A4) 75 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

Paper N 80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

Performer (3R90649) 80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

AG KXPI Red 80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

No. GA (Package: Green) 80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

No. ZA (Package: Orange) 70 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

White & Red Label (=P70) 70 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

Performer White A3 80 g/m2 : Plain A (64 - 80 g/m2)

Paper Paper Type

Labels 3R97408 Label 1 (106 - 176 g/m2)

Paper Types

161

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Storing and Handling Paper

Please keep the following points in mind when storing paperStore paper inside a cabinet or in other dry place. Paper that has absorbed moisture can cause paper jams and image quality defects.

After opening a package of paper, wrap up the remaining paper to store it. It is recommended that you include moisture prevention packets.

Paper should be stored flat to prevent bends or warping.

Please adhere to the following when setting paper into the trayAlign the stack of paper neatly before setting it in the tray.

Do not use paper that is folded, creased, or heavily warped.

Do not use waved or curled paper.

Do not load paper of mixed size together into the tray.

Transparency paper and label paper can cause paper jams, and multiple sheets can be fed to the printer at once. Be sure to carefully fan these types of paper.

When continuously outputting onto transparencies, transparency sheets may sometimes stick to each other. Remove transparencies from the output tray every 20 or so sheets, and fan them to cool them down.


162

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Loading Paper

This section describes how to load paper.

Types of paper loaded in traysThe machine automatically detects the size and orientation of loaded paper in trays. You need to set a paper type, however. Normally, each of the trays is set to plain paper. When loading paper other than plain paper in trays, change the paper type setting. Plain paper, recycled paper and bond paper can also be named and set as user-defined paper. Up to five paper types can be set as user-defined paper.For information about changing the paper type in trays, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for the Trays" (P.173).

Automatic Tray SelectionIf you set paper source on the [Paper/Output] tab to [Paper Tray] in the PCL print driver's properties screen when making prints, the machine automatically selects the corresponding paper tray according to the size and orientation of the document to print. This is called [Automatic Tray Selection].When making copies, automatic tray selection is active if [Auto] is selected for [Paper Select]. If the machine judges that there are two or more corresponding trays in automatic tray selection, the machine gives higher priority to the tray having the highest [Paper Type Priority] set at [Tray Paper Type]. During automatic tray selection, trays whose [Paper Type Priority] setting is set to [Off] are not targeted in [Automatic Tray Selection]. Also, if the [Paper Priority] setting is exactly the same, automatic tray selection is determined by [Tray Priority].Note • Depending on the setting of [Auto Paper by Output Color] for the paper tray, [Automatic Tray

Selection] may not be applied to the tray. For [Auto Paper by Output Color], refer to "Auto Paper Select" (P.205)

Adding paperWhen the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message is displayedon the control panel. Add paper according to the displayed instructions. Copying orPrinting is automatically resumed when paper is added.

Note • Fan the paper well before loading paper in a tray. It prevents paper from adhering to each other and reduces paper jams.

• Tray 5 (bypass) cannot be selected in the automatic tray selection.• When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, select the tray containing the

paper of the same size and orientation that was being used for copying or printing, and continue copying or printing (Auto Tray Switch feature). During this operation, a tray containing paper of type whose [Paper Priority] setting is set to [Off] cannot be switched to.

For information about setting [Paper Type], [Paper Type Priority], [Paper Tray Priority], and setting the paper substitute feature, refer to "Paper Tray Settings" (P.203).

Loading Paper

163

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Loading Paper in the Trays 1 to 2The following describes the procedure for loading paper in the Trays 1 to 2.When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message is displayed on the touch screen. Add paper according to the displayed instructions. Copying or printing is automatically resumed when paper is supplied.Note • Before loading paper in a tray, fan the paper well. It prevents paper from adhering to each

other and reduces paper jams.For information about changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for the Trays" (P.173).

1 Pull out the tray towards you until it stops.Important • While the machine processes

a job, do not pull the tray out that the job uses.

• Do not add new paper to the paper on the tray in order to prevent paper jams or making mistakes of paper loading. Remove any paper remaining in the tray and then load the paper on newly loaded paper.

2 Load and align the edge of the paper against the left edge of the tray with the side to be copied or printed on face down.Important • Do not load paper exceeding

the maximum fill line (MAX in the figure to the right). It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.

• Do not place any paper or things in the empty space on the right side of the Tray 1 or 2. It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.

3 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.


164

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Loading Paper in the Tray 3The following describes the procedure for loading paper in the Tray 3.When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message is displayed on the touch screen. Add paper according to the displayed instructions. Copying or printing is automatically resumed when paper is supplied.For information about changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for the Trays" (P.173).







Loading Paper

165

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Loading Paper in the Tray 4The following describes the procedure for loading paper in the Tray 4.When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message is displayed on the touch screen. Add paper according to the displayed instructions. Copying or printing is automatically resumed when paper is supplied.For information about changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for the Trays" (P.173).








166

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)When printing or copying with paper sizes or types that cannot be set in the Trays 1 to 4 and 6, use the Tray 5 (bypass).The following describes how to load paper into the Tray 5 (bypass).To make detailed instructions during printings, specify the instructions using the [Tray/Output] tab in the print driver. When doing this, also specify the type of paper to load.Important • Do not supply new paper until the loaded paper runs out in order to prevent paper jams or

making mistakes of paper loading.

Note • Be sure to fan the paper well. Otherwise, paper may cause paper jams, and multiple sheets may be fed to the printer at once.

1 Open the Tray 5 (bypass) as necessary.Note • If necessary, extend the

extension flap. The extension flap can be extended in two stages. When pulling out the extension flap, do it gently.

2 Hold the center of the paper guides and slide them to the desired paper size.

3 Load paper with the side to be copied or printed on facing up, and insert the paper lightly along the paper guide until it comes to a stop.Important • Do not load mixed paper types

into the tray.• Do not load paper exceeding


4 When loading a non-standard paper size on the Tray 5 (bypass), move the paper guides to accommodate the paper.

Loading Paper

167

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Loading Tab Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)The following describes the procedure for loading tab paper in the Tray 5.Important • Tab paper can be loaded on the Tray 5 (Bypass) and Tray 6 (A3+ Higy Capacity) only.

• Tab paper can be used only with [Tab Margin Shift] and [Covers/Separators].


1 Open the Tray 5 (bypass).Note • If necessary, extend the

extension flap. The extension flap can be extended in two stages. When pulling out the extension flap, do it gently.


3 Load paper with the side to be copied or printed on facing up and the top edge frontward, and insert the paper lightly along the paper guide until it comes to a stop.Important • Do not load mixed paper types

into the tray.• Do not load paper exceeding

the maximum fill line (MAX in the figure). It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.


168

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Loading Paper in the Tray 6 (High Capacity)The following describes the procedure for loading paper in the optional Tray 6.When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message is displayed on the touch screen. Add paper according to the displayed instructions. Copying or printing is automatically resumed when paper is supplied.Note • Be sure to fan the paper well. Otherwise, paper may cause paper jams, and multiple sheets

may be fed to the printer at once.For information about changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for the Trays" (P.173).




2 Load and align the edge of the paper against the right edge of the tray with the side to be copied or printed on facing up.Important • Do not load paper exceeding

the maximum fill line. It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.


Loading Paper

169

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Loading Paper in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)The following describes the procedure for loading paper in the optional Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity).When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message is displayed on the touch screen. Add paper according to the displayed instructions. Copying or printing is automatically resumed when paper is supplied.Note • Be sure to fan the paper well. Otherwise, paper may cause paper jams, and multiple sheets

may be fed to the printer at once.For information about changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Paper Size for the Trays" (P.173).








170

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Loading Tab Paper in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)The following describes the procedure for loading tab paper in the optional Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity).Important • Tab paper can be loaded on the Tray 5 (Bypass) and Tray 6 (A3+ Higy Capacity) only.

• Tab paper can be used only for [Tab Margin Shift], and [Covers/Separators].







Note • When loading tab paper, make sure the drilled side toward the right.


Loading Paper

171

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Loading Paper in the Tray 8 (Interposer)The following describes the procedure for loading paper in the Tray 8 (Interposer).Interposer is meant for loading paper (blank, copied paper, etc.) to be used as separators and covers, so it cannot copy.Note • When adding paper to interposer, remove any paper remaining in the tray, add it to the stack

of paper to be added, then load all of the paper into the interposer at once.


2 Load the paper, aligning to the front side of the tray.Important • Do not load paper exceeding

the maximum fill line. It might cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.

Loading Tab Paper in the Tray 8 (Interposer)The following describes the procedure for loading tab paper in the Tray 8 (Interposer).


2 If the paper in already printed on, load the paper with the printed side facing up and with the tab side to be fed first.Important • Do not load paper exceeding

the maximum fill line. It might cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.

A

A


172

Paper and Other M

edia

7

Facilitating Feeding of Heavyweight Paper Loaded in Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)

The following describes how to make it easier to feed heavyweight paper loaded in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity).Use the weight switch button to adjust the air assist level. This helps the paper to be fed smoothly. For the paper heavier than 256 g/m2, slide the switch button to the heavier weight group. Important • If 256 g/m2 or heavier paper is loaded in the tray, be sure to switch the button to the heavier

weight group. Otherwise, paper jams or malfunctions may occur.



2 Switch both buttons to the appropriate weight group.


Changing the Paper Size for the Trays

173

Paper and Other M

edia

7


The following describes how to change the paper size for the Trays 1 to 4 and 6.Note • The paper types for the Trays 1 to 4 and 6 are preset. Normally, plain paper is set. When

changing the setting to a different paper type, change the paper quality settings to match the type of paper to be loaded to maintain high print quality.For more information about paper type, refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.203).

• Non-standard paper can be loaded in the Trays 1 and 2. When setting a non-standard paper, you must register the paper size in advance. For information about assigning features, refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.203).

For information about paper size, "Main Unit and Copier Specifications" (P.394)For a description of how to make copies on non-standard size paper, refer to "Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)" (P.66). For information on how to print to non-standard size paper, refer to the print driver's online help.

Changing the Paper Size for the Trays 1 to 2The following describes how to change the paper size for the Trays 1 to 2.




2 Remove any paper loaded on the tray.

3 Hold the long-side paper guide and slide it until it comes to a stop (1). Hold the short-side paper guide on the right side and slide it until it comes to a stop (2).

1

2


174

Paper and Other M

edia

7

4 Load and align the edge of the paper against the left edge of the tray with the side to be copied or printed on facing up.Important • Do not load paper exceeding


• Do not place any paper or things in the empty space on the right side of the Tray 1 or 2. It may cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.

5 Move the long-side and short-side paper guides while holding their grips so that they lightly contact the edges of the paper.

6 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.Note • Affix the paper size label to the

front of the paper tray.

7 If you have changed the paper type, you need to change the tray settings. For information on setting paper type, refer to "Changing Paper Settings" (P.179).

Changing the Paper Size for the Trays 3The following describes how to change the paper size for the Tray 3.





3 Hold the paper guide and slide it until it comes to a stop.


175

Paper and Other M

edia

7



5 Hold the paper guide and move it to gently touch the edge of the paper.


7 If you have changed the paper type, you need to change the tray settings.

For information on setting paper type, refer to "Changing Paper Settings" (P.179).

Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 4The following describes how to change the paper size for the Tray 4.





3 Hold the paper guide and slide it until it comes to a stop.



5 Hold the paper guide and move it to gently touch the edge of the paper.


176

Paper and Other M

edia

7


7 If you have changed the paper type, you need to change the tray settings.

For information on setting paper type, refer to "Changing Paper Settings" (P.179).

Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 6 (High Capacity)The following describes how to change the paper size for the Tray 6 (High Capacity).





3 Open the end guide (1) and unscrew the screw (2). Then remove the guide from the Tray.

4 Insert the small protrusions at the bottom of the guide into holes corresponding to the paper size (1). Insert the screw into a hole corresponding to the paper size on the top of the guide and screw up (2).

1

2


177

Paper and Other M

edia

7

5 Unscrew the screw of the front guide and remove the guide from the Tray.

6 Insert the small protrusions at the bottom of the guide into holes corresponding to the paper size (1). Insert the screw into a hole corresponding to the paper size on the top of the guide and screw up (2).

7 Pull the lever up of the end guide and move it along the slot (1). Set the lever at the position corresponding to the paper size (2) and press the lever down (3). Note • Set the guide to gently touch

the edge of the paper. If the position of the guide is not correct, the paper may not be fed properly and cause paper jams.

Note • The slot on the left of 8.5 is not used.

8 Open the end guide and load and align the edge of the paper against the right edge of the tray with the side to be copied or printed on facing up.Note • Do not load paper exceeding

the maximum fill line or the maximum capacity of the tray.

1

2

1

2

3


178

Paper and Other M

edia

7

9 Close the end guide tightly.


Changing the Paper Size for the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)The following describes how to change the paper size for the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity).


a job, do not pull the tray outthat the job uses.



3 Hold the long-side paper guide and slide it until it comes to a stop (1). Hold the short-side paper guide on the left side and slide it until it comes to a stop (2).

4 With the side to be copied or printed on facing up, load and align the edges of the paper in the arrow direction.Important • Do not load paper exceeding

the maximum fill line. It maycause paper jams or machinemalfunctions.

5 Slide the long-side and short-side paper guides to just touch the edges of the paper stack.Note • Position the guides correctly to match the paper size. If the position of the guide is not

correct, the paper may not be fed properly and cause paper jams.


Changing Paper Settings

179

Paper and Other M

edia

7


The following describes how to change the paper type on trays and how to set image quality processing by individual paper type.After loading paper, change tray settings including paper type and image quality processing for the paper type. Image quality best suited to the paper type can be obtained by setting the desired image processing to particular paper types. For information on image quality processing for different paper types, refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.73).Note • Users can name custom paper 1 to 5 displayed in the paper type.For information about how to set names to custom paper 1 to 5, refer to "Custom Paper Name" (P.203).For information about image quality processing for different paper types, refer to "Image Quality" (P.209).


2 Enter the system administrator UserID with the numeric keypad or a keyboard displayed by pressing [Keyboard], and select [Confirm]. Note • The default UserID value is



<Log In/Out> button


180

Paper and Other M

edia

7



6 Select [Paper Tray Settings].

7 Select [Paper Tray Attributes].


181

Paper and Other M

edia

7

8 Select the paper tray whose paper type setting is to be changed at [Items], and select [Change Settings]. Note • Select [ ] to return to the


9 Select [Change Settings].

10 Select the paper type and paper size to change, and select [Save].Note • Select [ ] to return to the


11 Make sure that [Paper Type] you changed is the newly entered value, and select [Confirm].

12 Select [Close].

13 Select [Image Quality].

14 Select the paper type whose image processing is to be changed at [Items], and select [Change Settings].Note • Select [ ] to return to the


15 Select the image processing value to change, and select [Save].


182

Paper and Other M

edia

7

16 Make sure that the [Current Settings] at the [Items] you changed is the newly entered value, and select [Close].



8 System Settings

The machine has factory default (initial) settings, but you can customize the system settings. To change the settings, enter System Administration mode, and use the [System Settings] screen.This chapter contains information for System Administrators on the features used to change the settings and on the setting procedures.

System Settings Procedure ......................................................................184

System Settings Menu List .......................................................................187

Entering Text ............................................................................................193

Common Settings .....................................................................................194

Copy Mode Settings .................................................................................224

Scan Mode Settings..................................................................................240

Network Controller Settings ......................................................................247

System Administrator Settings..................................................................249

Login Setup/Auditron Administration ........................................................252

8 System Settings

184

System Settings

8

System Settings Procedure

To make or change the system settings, it is necessary to be in the System Administration mode.This section describes the basic procedures for system settings. The following shows the reference section for each procedure.

Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode .........................................................................184Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Passcode ............................................184Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu ..........................185Step 4 Selecting an Item from the [System Settings] Screen....................................................185Step 5 Setting the Feature .........................................................................................................186Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode ...........................................................................186

Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode


Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and PasscodeTo enter System Administration mode, enter the system administrator UserID. If you are using the authentication feature, a Passcode may be required.It is recommended to change the system administrator UserID and Passcode immediately after installing the machine. For more information, refer to "System Administrator Settings" (P.249).

1 Enter the UserID with the numeric keypad or a keyboard displayed by selecting [Keyboard], and select [Confirm].Note • The default UserID value is


<Log In/Out> button

System Settings Procedure

185

System Settings

8

Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu


User ModeWhile still in the System Administration mode, you can carry out normal operations such as copying and scanning.Note • To exit a mode entered from

[User Mode], use the following procedure.(1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.(2) In the [Log In] screen, select [Cancel].

System SettingsYou can set or register the system settings.

Step 4 Selecting an Item from the [System Settings] ScreenIn the [System Settings] screen, select an item to be set.For the items that can be selected in the system settings, refer to "System Settings Menu List" (P.187).

1 Select the item to be set.

System SettingsYou can set or change the default values.

Common SettingsThese settings relate to the machine itself.For information, refer to "Common Settings" (P.194).

Copy Mode SettingsYou can set the copy feature defaults, copy operation control, button indications, and so on.For information, refer to "Copy Mode Settings" (P.224).

Scan Mode SettingsYou can set the scanner feature defaults, button indications, and so on.For information, refer to "Scan Mode Settings" (P.240).

8 System Settings

186

System Settings

8

Network Controller SettingsYou can set the IP adress, and so on.For the items in the Print Settings, refer to "Network Controller Settings" (P.247).

Setup MenuYou can change Paper Tray Attributes.For information, refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.203).

System Administrator SettingsYou can set the system administrator ID and system administrator Passcode for entering System Administration mode.For information, refer to "System Administrator Settings" (P.249).

Login Setup/Auditron AdministrationYou can set restrictions on users using feature of the machine, or set restrictions on individual users.For information, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Administration" (P.252).

Step 5 Setting the Feature

1 Set any feature.

2 After setting the feature, select [Save].

Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode

1 When the settings are completed, select [Close] until the [System Settings] screen appears.

2 Select [Exit].

System Settings Menu List

187

System Settings

8


The following table shows a list of the items that can be set. Note that the items appearing depend on the configuration of the machine.

System Settings

Common Settings

Machine Clock/Timers(P.195) Date(P.195)Time(P.195)Auto Clear(P.196)Auto Job Release(P.196)Printer Lockout Duration(P.197)Auto Power Saver/Energy Saver(P.197)Time Zone(P.197)Daylight Savings(P.198)

Audio Tones (P.198) Control Panel Select Tone(P.198)Control Panel Alert Tone(P.198)Base Tone(P.198)Machine Ready Tone(P.198)Copy Job Complete Tone(P.198)Non-Copy Job Complete Tone(P.199)Fault Tone(P.199)Auto Clear Alert Tone(P.199)Alert Tone(P.199)Out of Paper Warning Tone(P.199)Low Toner Alert Tone(P.199)Stored Programming Tone(P.199)

Screen/Button Settings(P.200) Screen Default(P.200)Screen After Auto Clear(P.200)Screen After Auto Clear(P.200)Auto Display of Login Screen(P.201)Custom Button 1 to 3(P.201)All Services(P.201)All Services - Additional Features(P.202)Job Type on Job Status Screen(P.203)

Paper Tray Settings(P.203) Custom Paper Name(P.203)Paper Tray Attributes(P.203) Paper Size(P.204) Paper Type(P.205) Auto Paper Select(P.205)Customize Paper Supply Screen(P.206)Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Menu(P.206)Paper Tray Attributes During Loading(P.206)Paper Tray Priority(P.207)Paper Type Priority(P.207)Tray 5 (Bypass) - Paper Size Defaults(P.208)Auto Tray Switching(P.209)Image Quality(P.209)

8 System Settings

188

System Settings

8

Copy Mode Settings

Image Quality Adjustment(P.211) Image Quality(P.211) Photo & Text Recognition(P.211) Output Color Recognition(P.211) Photo Reproduction Level(P.211) Background Suppression (Color Copy)(P.212) Background Suppression (B/W Copy)(P.212) Background Suppression (Scan Jobs)(P.212)Image Enhancement(P.212)Calibration(P.212)

Reports (P.214) Print Report Button(P.214)Job History Report(P.214)2 Sided Report(P.214)

Maintenance (P.215) Initialize Hard Disk(P.215)Delete All Data(P.216)Software Options(P.216)Adjust Image Position(P.216)

Watermark (P.216) Date Format(P.216)Text Effect Default(P.216)Text Default(P.216)Text Size(P.217)Background Pattern(P.217)Color(P.217)Density(P.217)Text/Background Contrast(P.217)Force Watermark - Copy Job(P.217)Custom Text 1 to 3(P.217)

Other Settings (P.217) Auto Job Promotion(P.217)Offset Stacking (Finisher Tray)(P.218)Default Print Paper Size(P.218)Paper Size Settings(P.219)Millimeters/Inches(P.221)Keyboard Input Restriction(P.221)Operation of Up/Down Buttons(P.221)Display Consumables Screen(P.221)Overwrite Hard Disk(P.221)Data Encryption(P.222)Encryption Key for Confidential Data(P.223)Service Rep. Restricted Operation(P.223)Software Download(P.223)Document Feeder Tray Elevation(P.223)Gloss Level(P.223)Estimated Job Time(P.223)

General Settings Tab - Features Allocation (P.225)

-

Preset Buttons(P.225) -


189

System Settings

8

Copy Defaults (P.226) Paper Supply(P.226)Reduce/Enlarge(P.226)Output Color(P.226)Single Color - Color(P.226)Dual Color - Source Color(P.226)Dual Color - Target Area Color(P.226)Dual Color - Non-target Area Color(P.227)Original Type(P.227)Original Type - Auto (Non-Black)(P.227)Original Type - Auto (Black)(P.227)Lighten/Darken(P.227)Contrast(P.227)Sharpness(P.227)Saturation(P.227)Background Suppression(P.227)Color Balance - Yellow(P.227)Color Balance - Magenta(P.227)Color Balance - Cyan(P.228)Color Balance - Black(P.228)Color Shift(P.228)2 Sided Copying(P.228)Mixed Size Originals(P.228)Edge Erase - Top Edge(P.228)Edge Erase - Bottom Edge(P.228)Edge Erase - Left Edge(P.228)Edge Erase- Right Edge(P.228)Center Erase/Binding Erase(P.228)Edge Erase - Side 2(P.228)Image Shift - Side 1(P.228)Image Shift - Side 2(P.229)Image Rotation(P.229)Image Rotation - Rotation Direction(P.229)Original Orientation(P.229)Copy Output(P.229)Output Orientation(P.229)Sample Set(P.229)Stamp Text(P.229)Stamp Position (Side 1)(P.229)Stamp Position (Side 2)(P.229)Stamp Size(P.229)Stamp Color(P.229)Date Position (Side 1)(P.230)Date Position (Side 2)(P.230)Date Size(P.230)Page Number Style(P.230)Page Number Position (Side 1)(P.230)Page Number Position (Side 2)(P.230)Page Number Size(P.230)Bates Stamping - Number of Digits(P.230)Bates Stamping - Position (Side 1)(P.230)Bates Stamping - Position (Side 2)(P.230)Bates Stamping - Size(P.230)Tab Margin Shift - Shift Value(P.231)Booklet Creation - Covers Tray(P.231)Covers - Front Cover Tray(P.231)Covers - Back Cover Tray(P.231)Insert Separators - Separators Tray(P.231)

8 System Settings

190

System Settings

8

Scan Mode Settings

Copy Control (P.231) Memory Full Procedure(P.231)Maximum Stored Pages(P.232)Auto Paper Off(P.232)Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy(P.232)Fine-tune 100%(P.232)Background Suppress Level (Photo& Text)(P.232)Background Suppression Level (Text)(P.233)Photo & Text/ Printed Original(P.233)Original Type - Lightweight Originals(P.233)Output Orientation - Reverse Order(P.233)Output Orientation - Auto (Single Sheet)(P.233)Stamp Density(P.233)Stamp Position-Top Left(P.233)Stamp Position-Top Center(P.233)Stamp Position-Top Right(P.234)Stamp Position-Left Center(P.234)Stamp Position-Center(P.234)Stamp Position- Right Center(P.234)Stamp Position- Bottom Left(P.234)Stamp Position- Bottom Center(P.234)Stamp Position- Bottom Right(P.234)Date Position-Top Left(P.234)Date Position-Top Center(P.234)Date Position-Top Right(P.235)Date Position- Bottom Left(P.235)Date Position-Bottom Center(P.235)Date Position-Bottom Right(P.235)Page Number Position-Top Left(P.235)Page Number Position-Top Center(P.235)Page Number Position-Top Right(P.235)Page Number Position-Bottom Left(P.235)Page Number Position-Bottom Center(P.236)Page Number Position-Bottom Right(P.236)Bates Stamping - Top Left(P.236)Bates Stamping - Top Center(P.236)Bates Stamping - Top Right(P.236)Bates Stamping - Bottom Left(P.236)Bates Stamping - Bottom Center(P.236)Bates Stamping - Bottom Right(P.236)Quantity Display(P.236)Maximum Number of Sets(P.237)

Original Size Defaults(P.237) Original Size Defaults 1 to 17

Reduce/Enlarge Presets(P.238) Reduce/Enlarge Presets 1 to 12

Custom Colors(P.238) -

Annotation - Create Stamps(P.239) -

General Settings Tab(P.241) Feature in 2nd Column(P.241)Reduce/Enlarge - Button 2(P.241)Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3(P.241)


191

System Settings

8

Network Controller Settings

Setup Menu

System Administrator Settings

Login Setup/Auditron Administration

Scan Defaults (P.242) Sharpness(P.242)Shadow Suppression(P.242)Original Orientation(P.242)Edge Erase(P.242)Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges(P.242)Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges(P.242)Center Erase/Binding Erase(P.242)

Original Size Defaults(P.243) Scan size buttons 1 to 17

Output Size Defaults(P.244) Output Size buttons 1 to 17

Reduce/Enlarge Presets(P.244) Preset % 1 to 12

Other Settings (P.245) Scan Service(P.245)Memory Full Procedure(P.245)Maximum Stored Pages(P.245)Saturation(P.245)Background Suppression Level(P.245)Shadow Suppression Level(P.245)Color Space(P.245)TIFF Format(P.246)Image Transfer Screen(P.246)

Network Settings(P.247) Ethernet Setting(P.247)TCP/IP - Get IP Address(P.247)TCP/IP - IP Address(P.248)TCP/IP - Subnet Mask(P.248)TCP/IP - Gateway Address(P.248)Frame Type(P.248)

Paper Tray Attributes(P.203) -

System Administrator Login ID(P.249) -

System Administrator’s Passcode(P.250)

-

Maximum Login Attempts(P.251) -

Create/Check User Accounts(P.253) UserID(P.253)User Name(P.253)Passcode(P.253)Account Limit(P.254) Feature Access(P.254) Account xxxx - Copy Limit(P.254)Reset Total Impressions(P.255)Reset Account(P.255)

8 System Settings

192

System Settings

8

Reset User Accounts(P.256) All User Accounts(P.256)All Feature Access Settings(P.256)All Account Limits(P.256)Total Impressions(P.256)Print the Auditron Report(P.256)Reset(P.256)

System Administrator’s Meter (Copy Jobs) (P.257)

-

User Details Setup(P.257) User ID Characters(P.257)Hide User ID (***)(P.257)Failed Access Log(P.258)

Passcode Entry from Control Panel(P.258)

-

Login Setup/Auditron Mode(P.258) Local Machine Access(P.258)Auditron Mode(P.259)

Entering Text

193

System Settings

8

Entering Text

During operations, a screen sometimes appears for the entry of text. This section describes how to enter such text.

In the text you can enter the following characters: numerals, letters, and symbols.

Item Description

Entering letters and numerals Select [Alphanumeric].If you select [Shift], capital letters appear. To return to lowercase, select [Shift] once more.

Entering symbols Select [Symbol].

Entering a space Select [Space].

Deleting characters Select [Backspace]. You can delete one character at a time.

8 System Settings

194

System Settings

8

Common Settings

In [Common Settings], you can make settings relating to the machine itself. The following shows the reference section for each item.

Machine Clock/Timers..............................................................................................................195Audio Tones..............................................................................................................................198Screen/Button Settings..............................................................................................................200Paper Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................203Image Quality Adjustment ........................................................................................................211Reports ......................................................................................................................................214Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................215Watermark.................................................................................................................................216Other Settings............................................................................................................................217

1 In the [System Settings] screen, select [System Settings].For the method of displaying the [System Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.184).


3 Select the feature to be set.

Common Settings

195

System Settings

8

Machine Clock/TimersYou can set the clock time, or the timer interval until power saving or reset features take effect.

1 Select [Machine Clock/Timers].

2 Select the item to be set or changed, and select [Change Settings].Note • Select [ ] to return to the


3 Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad to enter a value.Note • Depending on the item, entry

with the numeric keypad may not always be possible.

4 Select [Close].

DateSet the date in the system clock of the machine. The date set here is printed on lists and reports.

1 Select [Date], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select the date format.

3 Select Year/Month/Day.

TimeSet the time in the system clock of the machine, using 12-hour or 24-hour format.The time set here is printed on lists and reports.

1 Select [Time], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select the display format.

3 When [12 Hour Clock] is selected, select [AM] or [PM].

4 Set the hours and minutes.

8 System Settings

196

System Settings

8

Auto ClearIf a given time period elapses with no operation, the machine automatically returns to the initial screen.Set the time from 30 to 240 seconds in 1 second increments. In order not to set this feature, select [Off].Note • Even if [Off] is selected, when there is no operation for 1 minute on the screen waiting for a

job command after scanning, the machine cancels the waiting condition and starts to process the job.

1 Select [Auto Clear], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select [Off] or [On].

3 If you selected [On], set the time.

Auto Job ReleaseSet the period to cancel the current job and start the next job when an error occurs (document or paper jams, running out of paper, etc.) during making copies or printing documents. In this case, jobs that can be continued are limited to those that only use parts of the machine not affected by the error.Set the period from 4 to 99 minutes in 1 minute increments. In order not to set this feature, select [Off].

1 Select [Auto Job Release], and select [Change Settings].


3 If you selected [On], set the time.

Common Settings

197

System Settings

8

Printer Lockout DurationThe machine disables to print documents received and reports during a given period of time.

1 Select [Printer Lockout Duration], and select [Change Settings].


3 If you selected [On], specify a starting time and an ending time to disable printing, in 1 minute increments.

Auto Power Saver/Energy SaverIn power saving mode, there is a Low Power mode and a Sleep mode, and when the set time has elapsed, these modes are switched to in the following way, thus reducing the power consumption. Last selection on the machine Low Power mode Sleep mode

1 Select [Auto Power Saver/Energy Saver], and select [Change Settings].

2 Set Low Power mode and Sleep mode.

Note • There is no setting to disable switching to the Low Power mode or the Sleep mode.

From Last Selection to Low Power ModeSpecify a time period between the last operation and entering the Low Power mode in the range from 1 to 240 minutes, in 1 minute increments.Note • Configure the [From Last Selection to Sleep Mode] time to be longer than the [From Last

Selection to Low Power Mode] time.

From Last Selection to Sleep ModeSpecify a time period between the last selection and entering the Sleep mode from 1 to 240 minutes, in 1 minute increments.

Time ZoneSet the time difference from GMT.

8 System Settings

198

System Settings

8

Daylight SavingsWith this feature enabled, the machine automatically adjusts the current time when the summer time starts and ends. Specify the start and end dates of summer time period.

Audio TonesSelect whether or not to sound an alarm, for example when a job ends or there is a fault.

1 Select [Audio Tones].



3 Select the setting value.

4 Select [Save].

Control Panel Select ToneSelect the sound to be made when a button displayed on the screen is correctly selected.You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Control Panel Alert ToneSelect the sound to be made when a button that cannot be selected is selected, or an error occurs.You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Base ToneFor a button that toggles (changes setting each time it is pressed), set the sound to be made when in the home position. In the machine this sound is made when the <Interrupt> button is released.You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Machine Ready ToneSet the sound for when the machine is ready to copy or print, after powering on, for example.You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Copy Job Complete ToneSelect the sound to be made when a copy completes normally.You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Common Settings

199

System Settings

8

Non-Copy Job Complete ToneSelect the sound to be made when a job other than copying completes.You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Fault ToneSelect the sound to be made when there is an error termination.You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Auto Clear Alert ToneSelect the sound to be made when the automatic clear feature is enabled and it is 5 seconds before automatically returning to the initial screen.You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Alert ToneSelect the sound to be made when a fault such as a paper jam occurs, and the fault is left unattended to.You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Out of Paper Warning ToneSelect the sound to be made when there is no paper in the paper tray and the job is left unattended to.You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Low Toner Alert ToneSelect the sound to be made when the toner cartridge is due to be replaced.You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].

Stored Programming ToneSelect the sound to be made while recording in job memory.You can select the volume from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud].Note • It is not possible to disable this sound.

8 System Settings

200

System Settings

8

Screen/Button SettingsSet screens and buttons.

1 Select [Screen/Button Settings].

2 Select the item to be set or changed, and select [Change Settings].


4 Select [Save].

Screen DefaultSet the initial screen display that appears after turning the machine on or canceling the Power Saver mode.

1 Select [Screen Default], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select the feature to be assigned.

Screen After Auto ClearSet service screens to be displayed after auto clear.

1 Select [Screen After Auto Clear], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select [Last Selection Screen] or [All Services].

Common Settings

201

System Settings

8

Auto Display of Login ScreenSelect whether to enable or disable auto-displaying of login screen.

1 Select [Auto Display of Login Screen], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select [Off] to disable auto-displaying of login screen.

Custom Button 1 to 3You can assign features such as Copy and Network Scanning to the custom buttons on the control panel: Custom Button 1 to Custom Button 3.To leave a feature unassigned, select [Not Set].For more information, refer to "Customizing the Control Panel" (P.47).Note • The operation settings can be registered in the [Stored Programming] screen. For

information on Stored Programming, refer to "Registering Stored Programs" (P.152).• The default setting of [Custom Button 1] is [Copy].

1 Select any of [Custom Button 1] to [Custom Button 3], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select any item.

All ServicesSet the layout of buttons that appear in the [All Services] screen when the <All Services> button on the control panel is pressed.The layout of buttons shown on the [Button Layout on the Menu Screen] screen shows the layout of buttons on the [All Services] screen.If you select [Unassigned], the selected button position will remain empty.Note • It is not possible to assign the same feature to more than one button.

8 System Settings

202

System Settings

8

1 Select [All Services], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select the button in the position where you want to display a feature.Note • Select [ ] to display the


3 Select the feature to be displayed.

All Services - Additional FeaturesSet the layout of supplementary feature buttons that appear in the [All Services] screen when the <All Services> button on the control panel is pressed.The Additional Features appear in the [Menu] screen as rectangular buttons.The layout of numbers shown on the [All Services - Additional Features] screen shows the layout of buttons on the [Menu] screen.If you select [Not Set], the selected button position will remain empty.Note • It is not possible to assign the same feature to more than one button.

1 Select [All Services - Additional Features], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select the button in the position where you want to display a feature.

3 Select the features to be displayed.

Common Settings

203

System Settings

8

Job Type on Job Status ScreenSelect the job types to be shown on the [Completed Jobs] screen of the [Job Status] screen when the <Job Status> button on the control panel is pressed.

Paper Tray SettingsSet the items relating to the paper and trays, including the types of paper loaded in the trays, precedence, and image processing settings for each paper.

1 Select [Paper Tray Settings].



4 Set the setting value.

5 Select [Save].

Custom Paper NameYou can set a custom name to custom paper 1 to 5, plain paper, bond paper, and recycled paper. You can use letters, numerals, and symbols in the name, up to 24 characters.For example, you can use a name showing its usage, such as “Color” for colored paper, and “Covers” for bond paper.For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.193).

1 Select [Custom Paper Name].


3 Enter the name.

Paper Tray AttributesConfigure the paper size and paper type to be loaded on Tray 1 to 3, Tray 5 (Bypass) and Tray 6.When loading non-standard size into a tray, select [Variable Size] and specify the width and height. When loading standard size paper, select [Auto Size Detect].

8 System Settings

204

System Settings

8

1 Select [Paper Tray Attributes].


3 Select [ChangeSettings].

4 Select [Paper Size] or [Paper Type].

Paper SizeThe machine automatically detects standard size paper loaded into the Trays 1 and 2. However, when a non-standard size paper is loaded, it is necessary to specify the width and height.Important • Align the paper guide to the paper edge in a tray. It prevents paper from paper jams or

errors. In such cases, use the tray 5 (bypass).• Paper size loaded in the tray 3 to 4 cannot be changed.

Common Settings

205

System Settings

8

1 Select [Auto Size Detect] or [Variable Size].

2 When [Variable Size] is selected, specify the size of paper using [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].

Auto Size DetectStandard sized paper loaded in trays is automatically detected.

Variable SizeWhen setting non-standard size into the Tray 1 to 2, set the size in the X (horizontal) direction within the range 182 to 432 mm and in the Y (vertical) direction within the range 140 to 297 mm in 1mm increments.

Paper TypeYou can set paper type for paper loaded in trays.

Auto Paper SelectThe automatically selected paper tray can be designated according to the output color settings. In any mode other than the specified output color mode, the designated tray will not be selected when the paper tray is set to auto. Choose from [For All Output Colors], [When Color is Selected Only], or [When Black is Selected Only].Automatic tray selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically selected by the machine for copying or printing.You can select the Trays 1 to 4 and 6. The Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be selected..

8 System Settings

206

System Settings

8

Customize Paper Supply ScreenSet what is displayed as on a paper in the paper tray selection screen.

1 Select [Customize Paper Supply Screen].

2 Select any item.

Paper ColorSelect whether or not to display paper color.

Other AttributesSelect whether to display the attributes.

Paper Tray Attributes on Setup MenuYou can select whether [Paper Size/Type] is displayed in the [Setup Menu] screen or not.Displaying [Paper Size/Type] in the [Setup Menu] screen allows users to configure the paper size and type loaded in the tray without entering the System Administration mode.

Paper Tray Attributes During LoadingYou can select whether the [Change Settings] screen ([Paper Size/Type] screen) for the target tray is displayed or not when pulling out or inserting the tray.Tray 5 (bypass) cannot be selected.

Common Settings

207

System Settings

8

Paper Tray PrioritySet the paper tray priority sequence for automatic tray selection.Automatic tray selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically selected by the machine for copying or printing.You can select the Trays 1 to 4 and 6. The tray 5 (bypass) cannot be selected.

1 Select [Paper Tray Priority].


3 Select any of numbers 1 to 4, to assign a tray from the Trays 1 to 4 and 6.Note • You cannot set the same

paper tray to different positions in the sequence.

Paper Type PrioritySet the paper type priority sequence for automatic tray selection.Automatic tray selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically selected by the machine for copying or printing.You can set plain paper, bond paper, recycled paper and custom paper 1 to 5.The paper type setting takes precedence over the tray priority sequence.If different paper types appear in the same priority sequence, the paper selection is determined by tray priority sequence.For a tray that is loaded with a paper type with [Auto Paper Off] set, automatic tray selection is not performed.For information about the tray priority sequence, refer to "Paper Tray Priority" (P.207).

1 Select [Paper Type Priority].


3 Select the priority sequence.

8 System Settings

208

System Settings

8

Tray 5 (Bypass) - Paper Size DefaultsSet the paper sizes shown in the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen for [Paper Selection] when copying with the Tray 5 (Bypass).You can assign 20 paper sizes to Tray 5 standard size buttons 1 to 20.If a non-standard size paper is frequently used for copying, by setting this size, it is no longer necessary to set the paper dimensions each time a copy is made. It is also convenient to set the commonly used paper sizes toward the top.

1 Select [Tray 5 (Bypass) - Paper Size Defaults].


3 Select the paper size.

4 When [Variable Size] is selected, set the numeric values using [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].

A/B Series SizeYou can select from 10 sizes of A and B series.

Inch SizeYou can select from 14 sizes of inch series.

OthersYou can select from 15 other sizes.

Variable SizeYou can specify any sizes. Specify width (X) from 100 to 483 mm and height (Y) from 100 to 305 mm in 1mm increments.

Common Settings

209

System Settings

8

Auto Tray SwitchingSet the method of auto tray switching when the selected tray runs out of paper.

1 Select [Auto Tray Switching].


3 Select the method of switching.

Enable during Auto PaperWhen the paper selection is [Auto] only, the machine automatically selects a tray containing appropriate paper.

Always EnableRegardless of the setting of [Paper Supply], the machine automatically selects a tray containing appropriate paper according to the situation.Note • Auto tray switching cannot be worked at the following.

• When the Tray 5 (Bypass) is selected• When a tray containing paper other than plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper or user-defined paper is selected• When a tray containing paper set to [Auto Paper Off] at [Paper Type Priority] is selected

Image QualityYou can specify the image quality processing method for each of plain paper, recycled paper, heavyweight paper 1, heavyweight paper 1 (side 2), heavyweight paper 2, heavy paper 2 (side 2), and custom paper 1 to 5.When the machine is copying or printing, the type of paper set in [Paper Type], and the image quality processing specified for that type of paper are used to control the image quality.



3 Select image quality processing.

4 Select [Save].

8 System Settings

210

System Settings

8

Refer to the following table for the items that can be set.For information about paper characteristics and notes on use, refer to "Supported Paper Weight and Quantity" (P.158).

Setting values Meaning

Plain Paper A Paper having ream weight of 64 - 80 g/m2.

Plain Paper B Paper having ream weight of 81 - 105 g/m2.

Plain Paper C Thin coated paper, intermediate paper, etc.

Plain Paper - Special 1 The setting values are set by our customer engineer.

Plain Paper - Special 2 The setting values are set by our customer engineer.

Recycled A Recycled paper with rough surface having ream weight of 64 - 80 g/m2.

Recycled B Recycled paper with rough surface having ream weight of 81 - 105 g/m2.

Heavyweight 1A Paper having ream weight of 106 - 128 g/m2.

Heavyweight 1B Paper having ream weight of 129 - 176 g/m2.

Heavyweight 1 - Special 1 The setting values are set by our customer engineer.




Heavyweight 2C Postal cards having ream weight of not less than 177 g/m2.

Heavyweight 2D Postcards having ream weight of not less than 177 g/m2.

Heavyweight 2E Envelopes, etc.







Coated 1A Coated paper having ream weight of 106 - 128 g/m2.

Coated 1B Coated paper having ream weight of 129 - 176 g/m2.

Common Settings

211

System Settings

8

Image Quality AdjustmentYou can set the image quality and calibration settings.

1 Select [Image Quality Adjustment].




5 Select [Save].

Image QualityYou can select the image quality processing method when the machine is scanning an original.





Photo & Text RecognitionYou can change the level at which the machine separates text from photos while scanning the original, when copying with [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen set to [Text & Photo].Selecting [More Text] makes it easier for very fine print to be recognized as text.Selecting [More Photo] makes it easier for newspaper and advertisement halftone images to be recognized as photos.

Output Color RecognitionIn the [General Settings] screen, when copying with [Output Color] set to [Auto], you can change the five level at which the machine distinguishes monochrome and color images.Selecting [More Black] makes originals more easily recognized as monochrome.Selecting [More Color] makes originals more easily recognized as color.

Photo Reproduction LevelWhen copying with [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen set to [Text & Photo], you can adjust the color reproduction level in the areas determined by the machine to be photos.

8 System Settings

212

System Settings

8

Selecting [More Text] emphasizes the dense parts of the image, yielding a bold copy effect.Selecting [More Photo] makes the gradation of the photo parts of the image softer.

Background Suppression (Color Copy)Set the method of auto exposure to be used when making color copies.Set how the machine detects the density of and deletes the background color.Select [High Speed] to sample a section of the original and detect the background color.Select [High Quality] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the background color.Important • When you select [High Quality], and if [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] and a ratio

not greater than 60% in [Reduce/Enlarge] is set, a part of an image may not be printed or blank paper may be output.

Background Suppression (B/W Copy)Set the method of auto exposure to be used when making monochrome copies.Set how the machine detects the density of and deletes the background color.Select [High Speed] to sample a section of the original and detect the background color.Select [High Quality] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the background color.Important • When you select [High Quality]], and if [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] and a ratio


Background Suppression (Scan Jobs)Set the method of auto exposure to be used when scanning.Set how the machine detects the density of and deletes the background color.Select [High Speed] to sample a section of the original and detect the background color.Select [High Quality] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the background color.Important • When you select [High Quality]], and if [Corner Shift] is selected in [Image Shift] and a ratio


Image EnhancementYou can select whether or not to carry out image enhancement. If you select [On], copy data is smoothed, to give a smoother appearance.

CalibrationWhen the color gradation of a printed image is shifted, the gradation can be adjusted. By means of this adjustment, the print image quality of the machine can be maintained at a constant level.For information about procedures for calibration, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.310).Note • If color gradation is not compensated despite the periodic execution of calibration, contact

our Customer Support Center.

Common Settings

213

System Settings

8

1 Select [Calibration].

Screen TypeCopy JobAdjusts the gradation for copying documents.

Print Job 1Basic screen for printing.For PCL print driversAdjusts the gradation for items other than [Graphic] and [Presentation] of [Color Wise] in the [Fiery Printing] tab.For PostScript printersAdjusts the gradation for [Auto] and [Standard] of [Screen] in the [Graphics] tab.Note • Displayed Screen may differ corresponding to settings of [Image Type], [RGB Correction]

and [CMYK Correction], when [Auto] is selected.

Print Job 2For PCL print driversAdjusts the gradation for [Presentation] at [Color Wise] in the [Fiery Printing] tab.For PostScript printersAdjusts the gradation for [Auto] and [Gradation] of [Screen] in the [Graphics] tab.Note • Displayed Screen may differ corresponding to settings of [Image Type], [RGB Correction]


Paper SupplySelect a tray to be used for calibration.

TargetSelect whether to apply calibration to copy and print jobs, copy jobs only, print jobs only, or none.

8 System Settings

214

System Settings

8

ReportsThese settings relate to printing reports.

1 Select [Reports].




4 Select [Save].

Print Report ButtonSelect whether to allow printing of reports during normal operation in the System Administration mode. When this option is disabled, [Print Report Button] appears only in [Print Report/List] on the [Billing Meter/Print Report] tab under [Machine Status] and [Error History Report] on the [Faults] tab, while in the System Administration mode. For [Print Report/List] and [Error History Report], refer to "Machine Status" (P.269)

Job History ReportYou can select whether or not to automatically print a [Job History Report] when a total of 50 jobs have been processed. All jobs are automatically listed on the printed report.

2 Sided ReportSelect whether to print 1 sided or 2 sided when printing a report/list.

Common Settings

215

System Settings

8

MaintenanceYou can initialize the hard disk or delete data recorded in the machine.

1 Select [Maintenance].

2 Select the item to be carried out.

Initialize Hard DiskThis initializes the hard disk.The data erased by the formatting includes supplementary fonts, HP-GL/2 form, and SMB folders.Note • The secure print documents and logs are not erased.

1 Select [Initialize Hard Disk].

2 Select the partition to be reformatted, and select [Start].

3 Select [Yes].

4 When the initialization completes successfully, the message appears on the screen; select [Confirm].

8 System Settings

216

System Settings

8

Delete All DataThis feature is used to prevent leakage of customer's confidential information, when the machine is replaced. All data registered in the machine is deleted, when executing [Delete All Data].Do not use this function.

Software OptionsThis feature is for customer engineer use. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Adjust Image PositionThis feature is used to adjust the position of printed image. The image position can be adjusted according to paper tray, paper type, and Side 1 and side 2 of paper.You can use this feature if you want to align the printed image on Side 1 with that on Side 2, for example when printing documents with registration marks or when cutting the paper. The image position is shifted in the X (horizontal) direction and in the Y (vertical) direction accordingly.Note • Changing the image position may cause the image to be out of range of the paper. Adjust

the value while checking the print result.

WatermarkYou can configure the Watermark.

Date FormatSet the format for printing dates in annotations and Watermark. This setting is common to annotation and Watermark.Three types of format are available: 20yy/mm/dd, mm/dd/20yy, and dd/mm/20yy.

Text Effect DefaultSet the text effects for Watermark.

OffA text effect is not applied.

EmbossedThe text hidden in the background is printed as embossing. The text part of the text is printed with the pattern set in [Watermark - Background Pattern].

OutlineThe text hidden in the background is printed as white cutout. In the background other than the text printed as white cutout, the pattern set in [Watermark - Background Pattern] is printed.

Text DefaultSet the text string to be displayed by default.You can select from Copy Prohibited, Copy, Duplicate, and custom settings.

Common Settings

217

System Settings

8

Text SizeSet the size of the text printed in Watermark.You can select from 3 point sizes: 48 point, 64 point, and 80 point.You can also set the value from 24 to 80 points in 1 point increments.

Background PatternSet the background pattern to be used for the Watermark text effect.You can select from eight patterns: wave, circle, stripe, chain, beam, rhombic, sunflower, and fan.

ColorSet the color used for printing Watermark text.You can select from 3 colors: black, magenta, and cyan.

DensitySet the density for printing the text in Watermark.You can select from three levels from lighten to darken.

Text/Background ContrastSet the text/background contrast for printing Watermark.You can select from contrast levels 1 to 9.

Force Watermark - Copy JobSet whether to force Watermark printing for copying.

Custom Text 1 to 3Set the character string to be displayed as a custom option in [Text Default].

Other SettingsThese are other settings relating to the machine itself.

1 Select [Other Settings].




4 Select [Save].

Auto Job PromotionYou can select whether to allow other jobs that can be started to automatically bypass the job, if the machine is unable to start an operation for any reason, (for example, running out of paper in a tray when starting copying or printing).

8 System Settings

218

System Settings

8

Note • Stored documents such as secure prints and sample prints are excluded from bypassing permission.

Offset Stacking (Finisher Tray)Set the offset feature for the finisher tray.When you select offset stacking, each of output documents is delivered at a slightly shifted position from the position of the previous document. If the previous document is delivered at the front side of the machine, the next document is delivered at the rear side of the machine. Set the operation of this offset feature.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


NoneNo offset output.

Offset per setOutput paper in the number of copy sets being made.

Offset per jobOutput paper with each job offset.

Default Print Paper SizeSet the paper size used when printing reports or lists.You can select from 2 sizes: A4, or 8.5 x 11 inches.

Common Settings

219

System Settings

8

Paper Size SettingsSet the paper sizes for standard size originals and for automatic paper detection.You can select from 5 types: A/B series (8 x 13”), A/B series, A/B series (8K/16K), A/B series (8 x 13”/8 x 14”), and inch series.Refer to the following table for the combinations of sizes that can be detected automatically.

Paper size group A/B series (8 x 13”) A/B series

Original position

Size/Orientation

Docum

ent glass

Docum

ent feeder

Trays 1 to 2

Trays 3 to 4

Tray 5 (Bypass)

Tray 6

Docum

ent glass

Document feeder

Trays 1 to 2

Trays 3 to 4

Tray 5 (Bypass)

Tray 6

A6 O - - - - - O - - - - -

A5 O O O - O - O O O - O -

A5 O - - - - - O O - - - -

A4 O O O - O - O O O - O -

A4 O O O O O O O O O O O O

A3 O O O - O - O O O - O -

B6 O - - - - - O - - - - -

B6 - - - - - - O - - - - -

B5 - - O - O - O O O - O -

B5 - O O O O O O O O O O O

B4 - O O - O - O O O - O -

5.5 x 8.5 - - - - - - - - - - - -

5.5 x 8.5 - O - - - - - - - - - -

7.25 x 10.5 O O - - - - - - - - - -

8 x 10 - - - - - - - - - - - -

8 x 10 - - - - - - - - - - - -

8.5 x 11 - O O - - - - O O - - -

8.5 x 11 O O O O - O - O O O - O

8.5 x 13 O O O - - - - - O - - -

8.5 x 14 - - O - - - - - O - - -

11 x 17 O O O - - - - O O - - -

16K - - - - - - - - - - - -

16K - - O - - - - O O - - -

8K - - O - - - - O - - - -

Postcard - - - - - - - - - - - -

Choukei 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -

Photo 2L - - - - - - - - - - - -

4 x 6 - - - - - - - - - - - -

4 x 6 - - - - - - - - - - - -

8 System Settings

220

System Settings

8

Paper size group A/B series (8 K/ 16 K) A/B series (8 x 13”/8 x 14”) Inch series

Original position

Size/Orientation

Docum

ent glass

Document feeder

Trays 1 to 2

Trays 3 to 4

Tray 5 (Bypass)

Tray 6

Docum

ent glass

Document feeder

Trays 1 to 2

Trays 3 to 4

Tray 5 (Bypass)

Tray 6

Docum

ent glass

Document feeder

Trays 1 to 2

Trays 3 to 4

Tray 5 (Bypass)

Tray 6

A6 O - - - - - O - - - - - - - - - - -

A5 O O O - O - O O O - O - - - - - - -

A5 O O - - - - O - - - - - - - - - - -

A4 O O O - - - O O O - - - - O O - - -

A4 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O - O

A3 O O O - O - O O O - O - O O O - - -

B6 O - - - - - O - - - - - - - - - - -

B6 O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

B5 O O O - O - O - O - O - - - O - O -

B5 O O O O O O O O O O O O - O - - - -

B4 O O O - O - O O O - O - - O O - - -

5.5 x 8.5 - - - - - - - - - - - - O O O - O -

5.5 x 8.5 - - - - - - O O - - - - O O - - - -

7.25 x 10.5 - - - - - - - O - - - - O O O O - O

8 x 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - -

8 x 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

8.5 x 11 - O O - - - O O O - - - O O O - O -

8.5 x 11 - O O O - O O O O O - O O O O O O O

8.5 x 13 - - O - O - O O O - O - - - O - - -

8.5 x 14 - - O - O - - - O - O - O O O - O -

11 x 17 O O O - - - O O O - - - O O O - O -

16K O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

16K O O O - - - - - O - - - - - - - - -

8K O O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Postcard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Choukei 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Photo 2L - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - - - -

Photo 2L - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

4 x 6 - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - - - -

4 x 6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Common Settings

221

System Settings

8

Millimeters/InchesSelect whether dimensions on the screen are shown in millimeters or inches.

Keyboard Input RestrictionSelect whether to restrict the display of the virtual keyboard on the machine. To prevent characters being garbled when switched from one character set to another, you can restrict the input to ASCII characters only. If you select [On (ASCII only)], the displayed keyboard shows ASCII characters only.

Operation of Up/Down ButtonsSelect whether or not there is a continuous scrolling effect when the scroll buttons are held down.

Disable Fast ScrollingHolding down the scroll buttons does not scroll.

Enable Fast ScrollingHolding down the scroll buttons causes continuous scrolling.

Display Consumables ScreenSelect whether to display the supplies screen. If yes, select [When power is switched on] or [When Auto Clear is activated].

Overwrite Hard DiskSelect whether or not to carry out hard disk overwrite erasing. If so, you can select whether to overwrite once or three times.After deleting data from the hard disk, the area on which the data was stored is overwritten. This prevents unauthorized retrieval or restoration of the data recorded on the hard disk. This applies to copy source, and other information stored temporarily by the system.Important • If the machine is powered off during the overwriting operation, unfinished files may remain

on the hard disk.• The data is erased by overwriting once, but overwriting three times makes it even more

definite that the data cannot be recovered. It does, however, take longer.• During the overwriting process, processing of normal operations may be slowed down.

For information about how to check the status during the overwriting process, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.271).

8 System Settings

222

System Settings

8

Data EncryptionSelect whether to encrypt the data recorded on the hard disk of the machine.By setting data encryption, when copy or print data is written to the hard disk it is automatically encrypted. The encryption prevents unauthorized access to the stored data. In order to activate this feature, set an encryption key.Note • An optional package is necessary for this feature. For more information, contact our

Customer Support Center.

1 Select [Data Encryption].

2 Select [On].

3 Select [Keyboard], and enter an encryption key of up to 12 digits.

4 Select [Save].

5 Using the same procedure, enter the same encryption key once more.

Data RestorationThe enciphered data cannot be restored at the following.

When a trouble occurs in the hard disk.

When you have forgotten the encryption key.

When you have forgotten the System Administrator UserID and a Passcode whenmaking the [Service Rep. Restricted Operation] set to [On].

Data encryption feature and changing the settingsWhen data encryption is started or cancelled, and when the encryption key is changed, the machine must be restarted. The corresponding recording area (the hard disk) is reformatted when restarting. In this case, the previous data is not guaranteed.The recording area stores the following data.

- Spooled print data- Secure print, sample print, and similar print data- Forms for the form overlay feature- Mailbox and job flow sheet settings (box name, passcodes, etc.)- Documents in mailbox

Important • Be sure to save all necessary settings and documents before starting to use the data encryption feature or changing the settings.

• An error occurs if the connected hard disk does not match the encryption settings. For information on error messages and their remedies, refer to "Other Errors" (P.343).

• The following procedure is recommended for changing the settings of the encryption while a large amount of data (100 jobs or more) is stored in a mailbox, and [Overwrite Hard Disk] is specified to [1 Overwrite] or [3 Overwrites].1. Select [System Settings] > [Setup Menu] > [Mailbox] to display the [Mailbox] screen.2. Select the mailbox, then select [Create / Delete] > [Delete Mailbox].3. Select [Close] until the [System Settings] screen is displayed. Then select [Exit] to exit the

system administration mode.4. Press the <Machine Status> button, then make sure that [Standby] in [Overwrite Hard Disk]

is displayed.5. Enter the System Administration mode, and change the data encryption settings. For

information on how to enter the System Administration mode, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.184).

Common Settings

223

System Settings

8

Encryption Key for Confidential DataUse this feature to set the encryption key to protect confidential data recorded on the hard disk of the machine. Select [Keyboard], enter an encryption key. and then re-enter the same key to confirm.

Service Rep. Restricted OperationThis feature protects the Security Kit settings from being changed by an outsider pretending to be our customer engineer. Select whether to permit our customer engineer to perform [Overwrite Hard Disk] and [Data Encryption] operations, and to change the [HTTP - SSL/TLS], [System Administrator Login ID], [System Administrator’s Passcode], and [Maximum Login Attempts] settings. Important • When [On] is selected, make sure not to forget the system administrator's UserID and

Passcode. If this happens, the machine must be reset to the factory defaults. Contact our Customer Support Center.

Note • An optional package is necessary for this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Software DownloadThis feature is for customer engineer use. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Document Feeder Tray ElevationWhen a document is loaded in the document feeder, set to which timing to raise an elevator tray can be performed. Select from [When loading originals] and [When pressing Start].Note • This feature does not appear for some models.

Gloss LevelSet whether to display the gloss level feature.When [Enable] is selected, the [Gloss] button appears in [Image Quality] of the [Copy] screen.Select [Enable] if the following feature is used in the print mode of the print driver.Note • When you use the print mode above from the print driver. 1024MB system memory is

needen in the machine.

Estimated Job TimeThe information to display can be set when displaying prediction time until it completes to the waiting job for a print.

Cumulative time for all jobsDisplays the remaining time.

Time required for single jobDisplays the time required.

8 System Settings

224

System Settings

8

Copy Mode Settings

In [Copy Mode Settings], you can make settings relating to the copy feature. The following shows the reference section for each item.

General Settings Tab - Features Allocation ..............................................................................225Preset Buttons ...........................................................................................................................225Copy Defaults ...........................................................................................................................226Copy Control.............................................................................................................................231Original Size Defaults ...............................................................................................................237Reduce/Enlarge Presets.............................................................................................................238Custom Colors...........................................................................................................................238Annotation - Create Stamps ......................................................................................................239


2 Select [Copy Mode Settings].


Copy Mode Settings

225

System Settings

8

General Settings Tab - Features AllocationYou can set the features that appear in the third and fourth columns from the left of the [General Settings] screen. By setting the most commonly used features, you can avoid extra operations such as selecting tabs.

1 Select [General Settings Tab - Features Allocation], and select [Change Settings].

2 Select the number of features to be displayed.

3 From the buttons appearing on the right, select the position where you want to allocate a feature.Note • The position of the buttons on

the right of the screen shows the position of the buttons in the [General Settings] screen.

5 FeaturesThe [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], [Paper Supply], [2 Sided Copying], and [Output Format] features are displayed on the [Copy] screen. You cannot change the displayed features and their positions.

7 FeaturesYou can set the features appearing in the fourth column from the left of the [Copy] screen. Up to 3 features can be allocated. [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], and [Paper Supply] cannot be allocated.

10 FeaturesYou can set the features appearing in the third and fourth columns from the left of the [Copy] screen. Up to 5 features can be allocated. However, [Output Color] at the top in the third column is fixed.Note • [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], and [Paper Supply] cannot be allocated.

4 Select [Features] or [Settings].

5 Select the feature to be displayed, and select [Save].

6 Repeat operations as required.

Preset ButtonsYou can set the items that appear in the preset buttons of the [General Settings] screen. By setting the most commonly used items, you can avoid extra operations such as selecting tabs.

Paper Supply - Button 2-5For the 6 feature buttons appearing in [Paper Supply] in the [General Settings] screen, you can set the second, third, fourh, and fifth paper tray.

Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3-5For the 6 feature buttons appearing in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [General Settings] screen, you can set the ratio for the third, fourh, and fifth row from the top.You can select the ratio from the registered R/E Preset buttons.For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.238).

8 System Settings

226

System Settings

8

Copy DefaultsThis sets the default settings of copy feature settings. When the power is turned on or the machine returns from a Power Save mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, the system returns to the defaults set here. By setting features you often use as defaults, you can avoid extra operations required in use.

1 Select [Copy Defaults].




4 Select [Save].

Paper SupplySet the default value for [Paper Supply] in the [General Settings] screen.When the default value of [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Auto %], [Auto Paper] cannot be selected for [Paper Supply].

Reduce/EnlargeSet the default value for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [General Settings] screen.Select the ratio from the buttons registered as R/E Preset buttons, [100%], and [Auto %].When the default setting for [Paper Supply] is [Auto], [Auto %] cannot be selected for [Reduce/Enlarge].For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.238).

Output ColorSet the default value for [Output Color] in the [General Settings] screen.When [No Default] is selected, select the output color in the [General Settings] screen before making copies.

Single Color - ColorSet the default value for [Output Color] > [More...] > [Single Color] in the [General Settings] screen. You can select from 6 preset colors and 6 custom colors.For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.238).

Dual Color - Source ColorSet the default value for [Source Color] that appears when [Output Color]>[More...]>[Dual Color] is selected in the [General Settings] screen.After selecting [Color Selection], you can select from 6 colors.

Dual Color - Target Area ColorSet the default value for [Target Area Color] that appears when [Output Color] > [More...] > [Dual Color] is selected in the [General Settings Tab] screen. You can select from 7 preset colors and 6 custom colors.

Copy Mode Settings

227

System Settings

8

For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.238).

Dual Color - Non-target Area ColorSet the default value for [Non-target Area Color] that appears when [Output Color] > [More...] > [Dual Color] is selected in the [General Settings] screen. You can select from 7 preset colors and 6 custom colors.For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.238).

Original TypeSet the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Original Type - Auto (Non-Black)Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.This is valid when an item other than [Black] is selected for [Output Color] in the [General Settings Tab] screen.

Original Type - Auto (Black)Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.This is valid when [Black] is selected for [Output Color] in the [General Settings] screen.

Lighten/DarkenSet the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Lighten/Darken/Contrast] in the [Image Quality] screen.

ContrastSet the default value for [Contrast] of [Lighten/Darken/Contrast] in the [Image Quality] screen.

SharpnessSet the default value for [Sharpness] of [Sharpness/Saturation] in the [Image Quality] screen.

SaturationSet the default value for [Saturation] of [Sharpness/Saturation] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Background SuppressionSet the default value for [Background Suppression] in the [Image Quality] screen. [Background Suppression] is valid when [Original Type] is set to [Photo & Text], [Text], or [Map].

Color Balance - YellowSet the default density levels for the [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen.You can set density levels of yellow for each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and [High Density].

Color Balance - MagentaSet the default density levels for the [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen.You can set density levels of magenta for each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and [High Density].

8 System Settings

228

System Settings

8

Color Balance - CyanSet the default density levels for the [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen.You can set density levels of cyan for each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and [High Density].

Color Balance - BlackSet the default density levels for the [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen.You can set density levels of black for each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and [High Density].

Color ShiftSet the default value for [Color Shift] in the [Image Quality] screen.

2 Sided CopyingSet the default value for [2 Sided Copying] in the [Layout Adjustment] and [Output Format] screens.

Mixed Size OriginalsSet the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Edge Erase - Top EdgeSet the default value for the amount of border erased from the original in the top direction in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. The edge erase width can be set within the range of 0 to 50mm in 1mm increments.

Edge Erase - Bottom EdgeSet the default value for the amount of border erased from the original in the bottom direction in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. The edge erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50mm in 1mm increments.

Edge Erase - Left EdgeSet the default value for the amount of border erased from the original in the left direction in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. The edge erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50mm in 1mm increments.

Edge Erase- Right EdgeSet the default value for the amount of border erased from the original in the right direction in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. The edge erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50mm in 1mm increments.

Center Erase/Binding Erase Set the default value for the center erase amount of the original in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.The center erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.

Edge Erase - Side 2Set the default value for [Side 2] that is displayed when [Independent Edge Erase] is selected from [Edge Erase] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Image Shift - Side 1Set the default value for [Side 1] of [Image Shift] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Copy Mode Settings

229

System Settings

8

Image Shift - Side 2Set the default value for [Side 2] of [Image Shift] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Image RotationSet the default value for [Image Rotation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Image Rotation - Rotation DirectionSet the default value for [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction], If documents are of mixed orientations.

Original OrientationSet the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Copy OutputSet the default value for [Copy Output] in the [General Settings] screen.Note • If no option is installed in the machine, even when [Collated] is selected, the machine

operates as [Uncollated].

Output OrientationSet the default value for [Output Orientation] in the [Output Format] screen.

Sample SetSet the default value for [Sample Set] in the [Job Assembly] screen.

Stamp TextSet the default value for [Text] displayed when [Annotation] > [Stamp] is selected in the [Output Format] screen.You can select a stamp type from eight preset types and custom text. For information about how to set custom text, refer to "Annotation - Create Stamps" (P.239).

Stamp Position (Side 1)Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 1] displayed when [Annotation] > [Stamp] is selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 1, set where to place the date stamp from the six choices provided.

Stamp Position (Side 2)Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 2] displayed when [Annotation] > [Stamp] is selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 2, select whether to place the date stamp Same as Side 1 or Opposite to Side 1.

Stamp SizeSet the default value for [Size] displayed when [Annotation] > [Stamp] is selected in the [Output Format] screen.

Stamp ColorSet the default value for [Color] displayed when [Annotation] > [Stamp] is selected in the [Output Format] screen.

8 System Settings

230

System Settings

8

Date Position (Side 1)Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 1] displayed when [Annotation] > [Date] is selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 1, set where to place the date stamp from the six choices provided.

Date Position (Side 2)Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 2] displayed when [Annotation] > [Date] is selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 2, select whether to place the date stamp Same as Side 1 or Opposite to Side 1.

Date SizeSet the default value for [Size] displayed when [Annotation] > [Date] is selected in the [Output Format] screen.

Page Number StyleSet the default value for [Style] displayed when [Annotation] > [Page Number] is selected in the [Output Format] screen.

Page Number Position (Side 1)Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 1] displayed when [Annotation] > [Page Number] is selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 1, set where to place the page number from the six choices provided.

Page Number Position (Side 2)Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 2] displayed when [Annotation] > [Page Number] is selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 2, select whether to place the page number Same as Side 1 or Opposite to Side 1.

Page Number SizeSet the default value for [Size] displayed when [Annotation] > [Page Number] is selected in the [Output Format] screen.

Bates Stamping - Number of DigitsSet the default value for [Number of Digits] displayed when [Annotation] > [Bates Stamping] is selected in the [Output Format] screen.

Bates Stamping - Position (Side 1)Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 1] displayed when [Annotation] > [Bates Stamping] is selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 1, set where to place the bates stamping from the six choices provided.

Bates Stamping - Position (Side 2)Set the default value for [Position] of [Side 2] displayed when [Annotation] > [Bates Stamping] is selected in the [Output Format] screen. For Side 2, select whether to place the bates stamping Same as Side 1 or Opposite to Side 1.

Bates Stamping - SizeSet the default value for [Size] displayed when [Annotation] > [Bates Stamping] is selected in the [Output Format] screen.

Copy Mode Settings

231

System Settings

8

Tab Margin Shift - Shift ValueSet the default value for [Shift Value] of [Tab Margin Shift] in the [Output Format] screen.

Booklet Creation - Covers TraySet the default value for [Covers] of [Booklet Creation - Paper Tray Settings] in the [Booklet Creation] screen.

Covers - Front Cover TraySet the default value for [Front Cover] of [Covers - Paper Tray Settings] in the [Covers] screen.

Covers - Back Cover TraySet the default value for [Back Cover] of [Covers - Paper Tray Settings] in the [Covers] screen.

Insert Separators - Separators TraySet the default value for [Separators Tray] in the [Build Job - Separators] screen.

Copy ControlThese settings relate to copy operation control.

1 Select [Copy Control].




4 Select [Save].

Memory Full ProcedureWhen the space of the hard disk runs out during scanning originals, a screen appears asking how the partly stored data should be handled.Once a certain time has elapsed with the confirmation screen displayed, the subsequent processing is determined by these settings.You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For information, refer to "Auto Job Release" (P.196).

Cancel JobThe stored data is discarded.

Run JobThe read-in data is treated as valid, and the part of the original read in is copied.

8 System Settings

232

System Settings

8

Maximum Stored PagesSet the maximum number of stored pages of a copy original. You can set a number from 1 to 999 pages.

Auto Paper OffSelect the tray used when [Auto] of [Paper Supply] in the [General Settings Tab] screen is cancelled (the tray used when [Auto] of [Paper Supply] is selected in the [General Settings] screen, and [Auto %] or [Independent X-Y %] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge]).

Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided CopyWhen the size of side 1 differs from that of side 2 in 2-sided copy, if different size of originals for side 1 and side 2 are selected by automatic paper supply, sets the paper to copy side 2 of original.Important • When the side 1 and side 2 of the originals are different, and if 2-side of originals are copied

of that of same paper, an image may be missing.

Off (Copy on new sheet)Side 2 is copied on the front of a new sheet.

OnSide 2 is copied on the opposite side of Side 1 without changing the paper size.

Fine-tune 100%You can fine-tune the magnification when copying at 100% (actual size). The set value is applied when [Reduce/Enlarge] or [Proportional %] on the [General Settings] screen is set to 100%.Set the value in the X/Y direction within the range 98 to 102% in 0.1% increments.Important • This feature is applied only when a copy is made by the document glass. Moreover, it is not

reflected in the magnification (100%) set by [Variable %], [Independent X-Y%] and [Calculator %].

Note • A magnification displays [100%] even if [Fine-tune 100%] is set.

1 Select [Fine-tune 100%], and select [Change Settings].

2 Enter the magnification using [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].

Background Suppress Level (Photo& Text)Set the background suppression level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Photo & Text] is selected for [Original Type] on the [Image Quality] screen.

The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.

Copy Mode Settings

233

System Settings

8

Background Suppression Level (Text)Set the background suppression level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Text] is selected for [Original Type] on the [Image Quality] screen.


Photo & Text/ Printed OriginalSet the type of original when [Halftone] of [Text & Photo] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.

NormalCopy with standard image quality.

Inkjet OriginalsSelect when copying an original printed with an inkjet printer. This improves the recognition of inkjet colors.

Highlighted OriginalsSelect when copying an original marked with a highlight pen. This improves the recognition of the highlight pen colors.

Original Type - Lightweight OriginalsWhen [Text] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen, set whether to display a special original ([Lightweight Originals]).

Output Orientation - Reverse OrderSpecify whether to display [Face Up Reverse Order] under the [Output Orientation] in the [Output Format] screen.

Output Orientation - Auto (Single Sheet)Set operations when selecting [Auto] under the [Output Orientation] in the [Output Format] screen.

Stamp DensitySet the translucency of the stamp printed as annotation.You can select from three translucency values: 0% (solid), 25%, and 50%. The 0% represents no translucency.Note • If the stamp with [0%] density is printed over text, the text may no longer be readable.

Stamp Position-Top LeftWhen selecting [Top Left] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can turn the print position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Stamp Position-Top CenterWhen selecting [Top Center] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the print position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 200 in 0.5mm increments.

8 System Settings

234

System Settings

8

Stamp Position-Top RightWhen selecting [Top Right] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the stamp position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Stamp Position-Left CenterWhen selecting [Left Center] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the stamp position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 200 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Stamp Position-CenterWhen selecting [Center] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the stamp position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 200 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 200 in 0.5mm increments.

Stamp Position- Right CenterWhen selecting [Right Center] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the stamp position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 200 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Stamp Position- Bottom LeftWhen selecting [Bottom Left] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the stamp position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Stamp Position- Bottom CenterWhen selecting [Bottom Center] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the stamp position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 200 in 0.5mm increments.

Stamp Position- Bottom RightWhen selecting [Bottom Right] under [Annotation - Stamp - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the print position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Date Position-Top LeftWhen selecting [Top Left] under [Annotation - Date - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the date position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Date Position-Top CenterWhen selecting [Top Center] under [Annotation - Date - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can turn the date position finely.

Copy Mode Settings

235

System Settings

8

Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 200 in 0.5mm increments.

Date Position-Top RightWhen selecting [Top Right] under [Annotation - Date - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the date position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Date Position- Bottom LeftWhen selecting [Bottom Left] under [Annotation - Date - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the date position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Date Position-Bottom CenterWhen selecting [Bottom Center] under [Annotation - Date - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the date position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 200 in 0.5mm increments.

Date Position-Bottom RightWhen selecting [Bottom Right] under [Annotation - Date - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the date position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Page Number Position-Top LeftWhen selecting [Top Left] under [Annotation - Page Number - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the page number position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Page Number Position-Top CenterWhen selecting [Top Center] under [Annotation - Page Number - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the page number position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 200in 0.5mm increments.

Page Number Position-Top RightWhen selecting [Top Right] under [Annotation - Page Number - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the page number position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Page Number Position-Bottom LeftWhen selecting [Bottom Left] under [Annotation - Page Number - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the page number position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

8 System Settings

236

System Settings

8

Page Number Position-Bottom CenterWhen selecting [Bottom Center] under [Annotation - Page Number - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the page number position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 200 in 0.5mm increments.

Page Number Position-Bottom RightWhen selecting [Bottom Right] under [Annotation - Page Number - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the page number position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Bates Stamping - Top LeftWhen selecting [Top Left] under [Annotation - Bates Stamping - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the bates stamping position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Bates Stamping - Top CenterWhen selecting [Top Center] under [Annotation - Bates Stamping - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the bates stamping position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 200 in 0.5mm increments.

Bates Stamping - Top RightWhen selecting [Top Right] under [Annotation - Bates Stamping - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the bates stamping position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Bates Stamping - Bottom LeftWhen selecting [Bottom Left] under [Annotation - Bates Stamping - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the bates stamping position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Bates Stamping - Bottom CenterWhen selecting [Bottom Center] under [Annotation - Bates Stamping - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the bates stamping position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 200 in 0.5mm increments.

Bates Stamping - Bottom RightWhen selecting [Bottom Right] under [Annotation - Bates Stamping - Position] in the [Output Format] screen for printing, you can tune the bates stamping position finely.Set the position in the horizontal direction within the range 0 to 100 and in the vertical position within the range 0 to 100 in 0.5mm increments.

Quantity DisplaySet the method of displaying counter.

Copy Mode Settings

237

System Settings

8

Select from Quantity and Memory, Quantity and Original Count and Quantity (Big Font).

Maximum Number of SetsSet the maximum number of allowed copy sets between 1 and 999. Users will not be able to specify the number of copy sets larger than the value set here.

Original Size DefaultsSet the original sizes that appear in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.An original size is assigned to each of the buttons other than [Auto Size Detect].When frequently making copies of non-standard size originals, by presetting the non-standard size, you can save time to enter the original size each time a copy is made.

1 Select [Original Size Defaults].




4 Select [Save].

A/B Series SizeYou can select from sizes of A and B series.

Inch SizeYou can select from sizes of inch series.

OthersYou can select from other sizes.

Variable SizeYou can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments.

8 System Settings

238

System Settings

8

Reduce/Enlarge PresetsSet the magnifications shown in [Proportional %], in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [General Settings] screen.You can assign any magnification to each of the R/E Preset buttons 1 to 12.

1 Select [Reduce/Enlarge Presets].




4 Select [Save].

Custom ColorsSet the custom colors used for [Single Color] and [Dual Color] in [Output Color].You can assign custom colors with yellow (0 to 100%), magenta (0 to 100%), and cyan (0 to 100%) to each of custom color buttons 1 to 6.

1 Select [Custom Colors].



3 Adjust with [ ] and [ ].Note • Adjust so that the total of

yellow, magenta, and cyan does not exceed 240%.

4 Select [Save].

Copy Mode Settings

239

System Settings

8

Annotation - Create StampsSet any string to be displayed as stamp text for annotation.You can assign up to 8 custom stamps.

1 Select [Annotation - Create Stamps].



3 Selelct [Keyboard] and enter any stamp text used for annotation.

4 Select [Save].

8 System Settings

240

System Settings

8

Scan Mode Settings

Make settings relating to the scanner feature.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.When using the Webtools, more detailed settings are possible. For more details, refer to "Utilities" contained in USER DOCUMENTATIONS for the Network Controller.

The following shows the reference section for each item.General Settings Tab.................................................................................................................241Scan Defaults ............................................................................................................................242Original Size Defaults ...............................................................................................................243Output Size Defaults .................................................................................................................244Reduce/Enlarge Presets.............................................................................................................244Other Settings............................................................................................................................245


2 Select [Scan Mode Settings].

Scan Mode Settings

241

System Settings

8


General Settings TabSet items relating to the [General Settings Tab] screen display.

1 Select [General Settings Tab].




4 Select [Save].

Feature in 2nd ColumnYou can set the features shown in the second column of the [General Settings] screen.You can select from [2 Sided Originals], [Scan Resolution], [Lighten/Darken], and [Reduce/Enlarge].

Reduce/Enlarge - Button 2This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected in [Feature in 2nd Column].Set the magnification shown in the second row from the top of the 5 feature buttons shown in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [General Settings] screen.Select the magnification from the registered R/E Preset buttons.For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.244).

Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected in [Feature in 2nd Column].Set the magnification shown in the third row from the top of the 5 feature buttons shown in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [General Settings] screen.Select the magnification from the registered R/E Preset buttons.For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.244).

8 System Settings

242

System Settings

8

Scan DefaultsSet the default values for the scanner feature. When the power is turned on or the machine returns from a Power Save mode, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, the system returns to the defaults set here. By setting features you often use as defaults, you can avoid extra operations required in use.The values set become valid after the power has been turned off and on again.

1 Select [Scan Defaults].




4 Select [Save].

SharpnessSet the default value for [Sharpness] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Shadow SuppressionSet the default value for [Shadow Suppression] in the [Image Quality] screen.

Original OrientationSet the default value for [Original Orientation] when scanning.

Edge EraseSet the default value for [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You can select from [Normal] or [Variable Erase].

Edge Erase - Top & Bottom EdgesSet the default value for the amount of edges erased from the original in the top and bottom directions in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Edge Erase - Left & Right EdgesSet the default value for the amount of edges erased from the original in the left and right directions in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Center Erase/Binding EraseSet the default value for the binding erase amount of the original in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Scan Mode Settings

243

System Settings

8

Original Size DefaultsSet the original size shown in [Original Size] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. An original size is assigned to each of the buttons other than [Auto Size Detect].When frequently scanning non-standard size originals, by presetting the non-standard size, you can save time to enter the original size each time a document is scanned.

1 Select [Original Size Defaults].




Select [Save].



OthersYou can select from other sizes, including photo and postcard.

Variable SizeYou can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments.

8 System Settings

244

System Settings

8

Output Size DefaultsSet the sizes to be displayed at [Output Size] when selecting [Auto %] for scanning documents at [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.Any output sizes can be assigned to output size buttons.By setting the commonly used sizes, you can reduce the number of selection operations for scanning.



OthersYou can select from other sizes, including photo and postcard.

Reduce/Enlarge PresetsSet the magnifications shown in [Proportional %] for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.You can assign any magnification to the R/E Preset buttons other than [100%].

Preset %You can select from ratios for [Preset %].

Variable %You can set any magnification. Set the value from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

Scan Mode Settings

245

System Settings

8

Other SettingsThese settings relate to the scanner feature specification.

1 Select [Other Settings].




4 Select [Save].

Scan ServiceSet whether or not to use the scanner feature.

Memory Full ProcedureWhile scanning an original, if there is insufficient hard disk space for the scanner, a screen appears, asking how the partly stored data should be handled.Once a certain time has elapsed with the confirmation screen displayed, the subsequent processing is determined by these settings.You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For information, refer to "Auto Job Release" (P.196).

Cancel JobThe stored data is discarded.

Run JobThe read-in data is treated as valid, and the part of the original read in is treated as a complete stored file.

Maximum Stored PagesSet the maximum number of stored pages of a scan original. You can set a number from 1 to 999 pages.

SaturationSet the saturation when scanning a full color original. When carrying out a scan, it is automatically adjusted according to this setting value.

Background Suppression LevelFor a color scan, set the background suppression level. This is valid when [Background Suppression] is set to [Auto Suppression].


Shadow Suppression LevelSet the show-through prevention level. This is valid when [Shadow Suppression] is set to [On]..

Color SpaceSet whether to display the color space feature.

8 System Settings

246

System Settings

8

TIFF FormatSet the TIFF format for scanned data. You can select from [TIFF V6] and [TTN2].

Image Transfer ScreenSelect whether to display a message when the scan of an original is completed.

DisabledDo not show a scan completion message.

Display Message OnlyShow a scan completion message.

Display Message and ScreenShow a screen while original is being scanned, and also a scan completion message.


247

System Settings

8


In [Network Settings], set the type of interface through which the machine is connected to the client in TCP/IP, and the parameters required for communications.The following shows the reference section for each item.

Network SettingsSet the parameters required for communications.

1 Select [Network Settings].




4 Select [Save].

Ethernet SettingSet the Ethernet Setting for the machine. Select [Auto] if your network environment is mixed or if you do not know the network speed. If you know the speed of the network to which the machine is attached, select it. If your network is 1000Base-T, select [Auto].

TCP/IP - Get IP AddressSelect the procedure for setting the IP address on the machine.Select one of the following settings.

DHCPThe IP adress, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address are automatically extracted from the DHCP server.

BOOTPThe IP adress, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address are automatically extracted from the BOOTP server.

ManualEnables you to manually enter the IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address.

8 System Settings

248

System Settings

8

TCP/IP - IP AddressThis option is only available if you have selected [Manual] from the previous option. Enter the IP address from the Control Panel Numeric Keypad and then click [Next]. You must change the default to a valid address for your network.Note • Enter the IP address in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. The "xxx" should be a numeric value in

the range from 0 to 255. However, the range between 224.XXX.XXX.XXX through 255.XXX.XXX.XXX, and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.

• When you made an entry mistake, press the <C> (clear) button and enter again.• When you move to the next value without entering all 3 digits, select [save/select next].

TCP/IP - Subnet MaskThis option lets you modify the subnet mask for printing with TCP/IP over Ethernet. Enter the IP address in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. The "xxx" should be a numeric value in the range from 0 to 255. However, the range between 224.XXX.XXX.XXX through 255.XXX.XXX.XXX, and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.Note • Specify the subnet mask by a combination of the numbers 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252,

254, and 255. However, you cannot use 0 between non-zero values.• If you do not want to set the gateway address, enter "0.0.0.0".

TCP/IP - Gateway AddressUse this option to set the gateway address for printing with TCP/IP. If your network uses a gateway, you must change the default to a correct gateway address for your network.Note • Enter the gateway address in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. The "xxx" should be a numeric

value in the range from 0 to 255. However, the range between 224.XXX.XXX.XXX through 255.XXX.XXX.XXX, and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.

• If you do not want to set the gateway address, enter "0.0.0.0".

Frame TypeSelect [Auto] if your network environment is mixed or if you do not know the frame type of the network. If you know the frame type of the network to which the machine is attached, select it.


249

System Settings

8


In [System Administrator Settings], you can set the system administrator ID and Passcode.You are recommended to set the system administrator ID and Passcode to prevent setting changes and ensure security.The following shows the reference section for each item.

System Administrator Login ID............................................................................................... 249System Administrator’s Passcode ............................................................................................ 250Maximum Login Attempts ....................................................................................................... 251

1 In the [System Settings] screen, select [System Administrator Settings].For the method of displaying the [System Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.184).


System Administrator Login IDSet the system administrator UserID. You can enter from 1 to 32 characters.Note • The default of the system administrator UserID is “11111”.

1 Select [System Administrator Login ID].

2 Select [On].

3 Select [Keyboard], then in [New System Administrator Login ID], enter the system administrator ID of up to 32 characters, and select [Save].

8 System Settings

250

System Settings

8

4 Select [Keyboard] once more, and in [Re-enter System Administrator Login ID], enter the same system administrator ID, and select [Save].

5 Select [Save].

6 When a confirmation screen appears, select [Yes].

System Administrator’s PasscodeSet the Passcode for System Administration mode. Setting a Passcode is strongly recommended for security.Note • The default of the system administrator Passcode is “x-admin”.

The entered Passcode is used to authenticate the system adminiistrator when [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] is set to [Enabled] for [Login Setup/Auditron Administration].After setting the system administrator ID, set the Passcode from 4 to 12 numeric digits.For information about enabling and disabling Passcodes, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.258).

1 Select [System Administrator's Passcode].

2 Select [Keyboard].

3 Enter the new passcord from 4 to 12 numeric digits in [New Passcode], and select [Next].Note • To set no passcord, leave the

passcord blank, and select [Save].

4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to enter the same passcod.

5 Select [Save].

6 When a confirmation screen appears, select [Yes].


251

System Settings

8

Maximum Login AttemptsThis feature protects the settings from being changed by an outsider pretending a system administrator. If system administrator ID authentication fails repeatedly, you can set a limit beyond which further tries are not allowed.You can set the number of authentication attempts allowed, from 1 to 10.Note • The count is reset when the machine is restarted.

• To chancel the access rejection state, restart the machine by turning off and on the power.

1 Select [Maximum Login Attempts].

2 Select [On].

3 With [ ] and [ ], set the number of authentication attempts allowed.

4 Select [Save].

8 System Settings

252

System Settings

8


In [Login Setup/Auditron Administration], to prevent unauthorized users from accessing the machine, you can set different restrictions for each user, or limit the number of pages each user can produce.When the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is enabled, each user of the machine must enter a UserID and Passcode, thus providing administrative control and accounting for the machine.The following shows the reference section for each item.

Create/Check User Accounts ....................................................................................................253Reset User Accounts .................................................................................................................256System Administrator’s Meter (Copy Jobs)..............................................................................257User Details Setup.....................................................................................................................257Passcode Entry from Control Panel ..........................................................................................258Login Setup/Auditron Mode .....................................................................................................258

1 In the [System Settings] screen, select [Login Setup/Auditron Administration].For the method of displaying the [System Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.184).



253

System Settings

8

Create/Check User AccountsWhen the login setup/Auditron administration feature is enabled, in order to carry out authentication of registered users, the UserIDs and user names are registered.For each user of the machine, you can control the use of output color, or set a limit on the number of pages. For each registered user, you can also check the cumulative number of pages. Up to 1,000 sets of user data can be registered.Important • Before registering users, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.258) to set the Login

Setup/Auditron Administration mode you use.

1 Select [Create/Check User Accounts].

2 Select the [No.] for which you want to register a user, and select [Create/Delete].Note • [No.] is a user control number.

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

• By entering a 4-digit UserID with the numeric keypad, you can specify the user directly.

3 Select any item, and set it.

4 Select [Save].

UserIDYou can enter up to 32 characters for a UserID to use the machine.

User NameSet the user name. Up to 32 characters are allowed.For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.193).

PasscodeSet the Passcode. Setting a Passcode is strongly recommended for security. You can set the Passcode to from 4 to 12 digits.

8 System Settings

254

System Settings

8

Account LimitYou can place restrictions on the use and the maximum number of allowed pages for each of the copy, scan, and print features.

1 Select [Account Limit].

2 Select [Copy Service] or [Scan Service].

3 To place restrictions on a color mode or feature, select [Feature Access], and select the item.

4 To set [Account Limit], select [Account Limit], then with the numeric keypad enter the maximum number of pages.Note • Selecting [Next] causes the

input to switch to the next item.

Feature AccessPlace access restrictions on color modes and features.

Free AccessThe feature is not restricted.

Black OnlyOnly monochrome can be used.

Color OnlyOnly color can be used.

No Access to Copy ServiceDisables the copy feature.

Account xxxx - Copy LimitSet the maximum number of pages that can be used in a copy or scan.

ColorYou can set from 1 to 9,999,999 pages (7 digits) in 1 sheet increments.

BlackYou can set from 1 to 9,999,999 pages (7 digits) in 1 sheet increments.


255

System Settings

8

Reset Total ImpressionsReset the current cumulative number of pages for a selected user, returning it to zero.

1 Select [Reset Total Impressions].

YesResets the current cumulative number of pages for users. Once reset, the previous count cannot be restored.

NoCancels resetting the cumulative number of pages.

Reset AccountDeletes all registered information for the selected user.

1 Select [Reset Account].

YesDeletes the registered user data. Once deleted, the data cannot be restored.Important • All job flows, mailboxes, and documents within mailboxes belonging to the user are deleted.

If the user is owner of a large amount of material (when a large quantity of documents is left remaining within a mailbox for example), the deletion will take a considerable time.

NoCancels the deletion of the user data.

8 System Settings

256

System Settings

8

Reset User AccountsYou can delete all registered information for all registered users in a single operation, or reset the auditron. You can print a report prior to deleting or resetting user accounts to confirm the contents.

1 Select [Reset User Accounts].

2 When printing an auditron report for all services, select [Print the Auditron Report].

3 Select the item to delete or reset, and select [Reset].

4 Select [Yes] or [No].

All User AccountsDeletes all registered information for each user. It also deletes all data including the maximum number of pages, cumulative number of pages, output color restrictions, printer auditron, and so on.Important • All job flows, mailboxes, and

documents within mailboxes belonging to the user are deleted. If the user is owner of a large amount of material (when a large quantity of documents is left remaining within a mailbox for example), the deletion will take a considerable time.

All Feature Access SettingsResets the feature access limit for all users.

All Account LimitsResets the maximum number of pages for all users to the default (9,999,999 pages).

Total ImpressionsResets all Auditron administration data for all users including the system administrator. The number of pages is also reset to 0.

Print the Auditron ReportAn auditron report of all services is printed.

ResetDeletes or resets the data for the selected item.


257

System Settings

8

System Administrator’s Meter (Copy Jobs) You can check or reset the cumulative number of pages copied using the System Administration mode on the screen. The cumulative number of pages is counted up to 9,999,999 pages for both color and monochrome.

1 Select [System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs)].

2 This checks the cumulative number of pages.

3 To reset, select [Reset].

User Details SetupSet the information required when carrying out authentication.

1 Select [User Details Setup].

2 Select any item, and set it.

3 Select [Save].

User ID CharactersIf required, you can change the indication that appears as UserID on the [System Administrator Login] screen when the <Log In/Out> button on the control panel is pressed to such as “User Name” or “Number”. The alias can be set to 1 to 15 characters.Note • The value is also reflected in report/list displays.

Hide User ID (***)You can set the way in which the UserID is shown as it is being input. Use this feature to strengthen security as required.

ShowAs you enter the UserID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.

HideAs you enter the UserID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (*****).

8 System Settings

258

System Settings

8

Failed Access LogIn order to detect unauthorized access, if the number of times that authentication fails within a set time exceeds the [Failed Attempts] value set here, then an error is logged.

1 Select [Failed Access Log].

2 Select [On], and with the numeric keypad enter the number of failures.

Passcode Entry from Control PanelSet whether a Passcode is required when the system administrator or a user is using the machine.Select [On] to enable "System Administrator’s Passcode" (P.250), and "Passcode" (P.253) for [Create/Check User Account].Select [Off] to not require the Passcode, even if a Passcode is set in the above procedures.Important • The setting of [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] is used for verification on the machine. A

Passcode must always be input when accessing from remote devices, regardless of the use of Passcode setting. Depending on verification procedures, a Passcode may be required for other processes as well.

Login Setup/Auditron ModeSet whether the Auditron administration feature is enabled or not, and whether to request an authentication operation.

1 Select [Login Setup/Auditron Mode].

2 Select any item.

OffNo user login setup/auditron administration is required to operate the machine.Note • When [Off] is selected, [Auditron Mode] is disabled even if it is set to [On].

Local Machine AccessThe Auditron administration is carried out using the authenticated users already registered on the machine.


259

System Settings

8

For information about authentication on the machine, refer to "Authentication and Auditron Administration" (P.284).

Auditron ModeSelect whether to use the Auditron administration feature when using the copy, scan, and print services. Note that Login Setup/Auditron Administration cannot be used unless the system administrator UserID is set.For information about the items you can manage, refer to "Authentication and Auditron Administration" (P.284).Note • The items appearing depend on the services provided.

1 Select [Auditron Mode].

2 For the services for which you want to enable the administration feature, select [On].

Copy ServiceAdministration relating to copy operations.

9 Job Status

This chapter describes the job status features.Job Status Overview.................................................................................262

Checking Current/Pending Jobs ...............................................................263

Checking Completed Jobs........................................................................264

Handling Error Terminations.....................................................................265

9 Job Status

262

Job Status

9

Job Status Overview

With the job status features, you can check current or pending jobs, and check on completed jobs. You can also cancel printing, or preferentially print pending print jobs.

1 Press the <Job Status>button.

In the [Job Status] screen, you can do the following.

Checking JobsYou can check lists of current and pending jobs, and display more details. You can also cancel an current or pending job.For details, refer to "Checking Current/Pending Jobs" (P.263).

Checking the Status of Completed JobsYou can display the status of completed jobs. You can also display more details.For details, refer to "Checking Completed Jobs" (P.264).

<Job Status> button

Checking Current/Pending Jobs

263

Job Status

9

Checking Current/Pending Jobs

This section describes how to check current or pending jobs. In the status screen, you can cancel jobs or preferentially execute jobs.


2 Check the current/pending job.Note • Select [ ] to display the


Display TimeThe estimated job completion time is displayed. The time is displayed either in the form of Cumulative Time Required or Time Required. Note • The estimated job completion time is not displayed during date processing.The information to displayed can be changed. For more information about the settings, refer to "Estimated Time for Single or All Jobs" (P.276)

3 To cancel or preferentially execute a job, select the job.

4 Select [Stop].

StopCancels the executing or pending job.

9 Job Status

264

Job Status

9

Checking Completed Jobs

This section describes how to check completed jobs.You can check whether a job has been completed successfully. Also, you can display more details by selecting a job.


2 Select the [Completed Jobs] tab.Note • Select [ ] to display the


3 To check the details of a job, select the job.After checking, select [Close].

Group Parent JobsAllows you to check the list or history of related jobs (such as job flow jobs).

Job Report Prints a job status information report.

Handling Error Terminations

265

Job Status

9

Handling Error Terminations

This section describes how to handle error terminations.

For a Print JobWhen selecting a job whose [Status] is [Completed - Error] in the [Completed Jobs] screen, the error code of the job is displayed in [Status] field. Respond appropriately to the error code.For information about error codes, refer to "Error Codes" (P.334).

For Other JobsPrint a job status/activity report, and check the execution results.For information about job status/activity reports, refer to "Job Status" (P.275).

10 Machine Status

This chapter describes the features for checking the machine status.Overview of Machine Status .....................................................................268

Machine Status .........................................................................................269

Billing Meter/Print Report..........................................................................272

Supplies ....................................................................................................278

Faults ........................................................................................................279

10 Machine Status

268

Machine Status

10

Overview of Machine Status

You can check the machine status and number of printed pages in the screen. You can also print a report/list to check the job history and set/recorded values.

1 Press the <Machine Status> button.

In the [Machine Status] screen, you can do the following.

Machine Status CheckYou can check the machine configuration, paper tray status, and hard disk overwriting status. You can also change and register settings of the print mode.For more information, refer to "Machine Status" (P.269).

Meter Check and Report OutputYou can check the number of pages printed for each meter or for each user. You can also print a report/list to check the job history and set/recorded values.For more information, refer to "Billing Meter/Print Report" (P.272).

Consumable CheckYou can check the status of supplies.For more information, refer to "Supplies" (P.278).

Fault CheckYou can check the faults that have occurred in the machine.For more information, refer to "Faults" (P.279).

<Machine Status> button

Machine Status

269

Machine Status

10

Machine Status

In the [Machine Status] screen, you can check the machine configuration and the paper tray status. You can also set the print mode.Refer to the following sections for the features in the [Machine Status] screen.

Machine Information................................................................................................................ 269Paper Tray ................................................................................................................................ 271Overwrite Hard Disk ................................................................................................................ 271


2 In the [Machine Status] screen displayed, you can check the machine status.

Machine InformationIn the [Machine Information] screen, you can check the serial number, machine configuration, and software version.

1 Select [Machine Information].

2 In the [Machine Information] screen displayed, you can check the machine information.

For enquiry on maintenance and operationThis indicates how to make maintenance and operating inquiries.

Serial NumberThis indicates the serial number of the machine.

Machine ConfigurationThe [Machine Configuration] screen is displayed.Refer to"[Machine Configuration] Screen" (P.270).

Software VersionThe [Software Version] screen is displayed.Refer to"[Software Version] Screen" (P.270).

10 Machine Status

270

Machine Status

10

[Machine Configuration] ScreenYou can check the machine configuration.

1 Select [Machine Configuration].

2 In the [Machine Configuration] screen displayed, you can check the machine configuration.Note • Select [ ] to display the


In the [Machine Configuration] screen, you can check the following items.

Note • [Output Device] indicates whether the finisher (optional) is installed or not. [Finisher] appears when the finisher is installed.

[Software Version] ScreenYou can check the software version.

1 Select [Software Version].

2 In the [Software Version] screen displayed, you can check the machine software version.Note • Select [ ] to display the previous screen and select [ ] to display the next screen.

In the [Software Version] screen, you can check the following items.

Configuration Code Offset Stacking Module Hard Disk

Auto Document Feeder Output Device Page Memory Size

Paper Tray Folder System Memory Size

High Capacity Feeder Booklet Maker Network Controller

Separators/Covers Tray

Controller ROM IIT ROM

IOT ROM IIT Option ROM

HCF ROM ADF ROM

Finisher C ROM SJFI

Finisher D ROM

Machine Status

271

Machine Status

10

Paper TrayYou can check the paper trays set on the machine. On the screen, you can check the following items.

Tray status

Amount of paper remaining

Paper size

Paper type

1 Select [Paper Tray].

2 In the [Paper Tray] screen displayed, you can check the tray status for each paper tray.Note • Select [ ] to display the


Overwrite Hard DiskYou can check overwriting status of the hard disk. The "Standby" status indicates the completion of the overwriting process.Note • For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

• [Overwrite Hard Disk] appears only when [Overwrite Hard Disk] is set for [System Settings]. For more information, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.221).

1 Select [Overwrite Hard Disk].

2 In the [Overwrite Hard Disk] screen displayed, you can check overwriting status of the hard disk.

10 Machine Status

272

Machine Status

10

Billing Meter/Print Report

In the [Billing Meter/Print Report] screen, you can check the number of pages printed for each meter, or for each user. You can also print a report/list to check the job history and set/recorded values.Refer to the following sections for the features in the [Billing Meter/Print Report] screen.

Billing Meter .............................................................................................................................272User Account Billing Meter......................................................................................................273Print Report/List........................................................................................................................275

Billing MeterYou can confirm the total number of printed pages by individual meters. The meters are classified by color mode.


2 Select the [Billing Meter/Print Report] tab.

Note • When [Print Report Button] is disabled in the Reports setting, the [Billing Meter] tab is not displayed. For the Reports setting, refer to "Reports" (P.214).

3 Select the [Billing Meter].

4 In the screen displayed, you can check the meter readings.

Serial NumberDisplays the Serial Number of the machine.

Meter 1Number of full color copies and Number of full color prints

Meter 2Number of B/W copies and Number of B/W prints

Meter 3Number of large-size full color copies and Number of large-size full color prints


273

Machine Status

10

Note • Large-size full color is counted as a print at either of number of full color copies or number of full color prints in meter 1 if a copy or print is made on paper of 279 mm × 400 mm or larger (279 mm or more in the primary scanning direction and 400 mm or more in the secondary scanning direction) when the user has selected color (4-color or 3-color) for copying or printing or a color document has been recognized during document scanning on the scanner.

Meter 4Number of large-size B/W copies and Number of large-size B/W prints

Meter 5Meter 1 and Meter 2

User Account Billing MeterYou can check the number of pages printed in monochrome and colors by each user.When the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is enabled, you can check the billing meter for the currently authenticated UserID.For information about the login setup/auditron administration feature, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.258).


To Check the Billing Meter for the Currently Authenticated UserID1) Enter the UserID for a user you want to check the billing meter, using the numeric

keypad or the keyboard displayed by selecting [Keyboard], and select [Confirm].Note • If a Passcode is required, enter the Passcode.

2) Press the <Machine Status> button.3) Proceed to Step 2.

10 Machine Status

274

Machine Status

10

To Check the System Administrator Meter1) Enter the administrator UserID using the numeric keypad or the keyboard

displayed by selecting [Keyboard], and select [Confirm].Note • If a Passcode is required, enter the Passcode.

2) Select [User Mode].3) Press the <Machine Status>

button.4) Proceed to Step 2.


3 Select [User Account Billing Meter].

4 Select the meter you want to check.

Meter (Copy Meter)This shows the number of pages copied.


275

Machine Status

10

Print Report/ListThis section describes how to print a report/list.Note • The items displayed vary depending on the optional features installed.



3 Select [Print Report/List].Note • The image shown right is the

menu displayed by selecting [User Mode] in the System Administration mode.

Job Status

1 Select the [Job Status] tab.

2 Select the report/list to be output.


Job History ReportYou can check job results. The data for the latest 200 jobs is printed. Select [All Jobs], [All Printing Jobs], [All Non-printing Jobs], or [Mailbox Transfer Jobs].You can also automatically print a [Job History Report] every 50 jobs.For the Auto Print setting, refer to "Reports" (P.214). The Auto Print feature prints the results of all jobs.

Error History ReportYou can print error information about the machine. The latest 50 errors are printed.

10 Machine Status

276

Machine Status

10

Copy Mode Settings

1 Select [Copy Mode Settings].

2 Select [Settings List - Common Items].


Settings List - Common ItemsYou can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy settings of the machine.Note • The same [Settings List] is

printed from [Copy Mode Settings] and [Scan Mode Settings].

Scan Mode Settings

1 Select [Scan Mode Settings].

2 Select the report/list to be printed.


Settings List - Common ItemsYou can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy settings of the machine.Note • The same [Settings List] is

printed from [Copy Mode Settings], [Print Mode Settings], and [Scan Mode Settings].

Extended Features Settings ListYou can check the settings of scan features.

Network Controller Jobs Report

1 Select [Network Controller Jobs Report].

2 Select the report/list to be printed.

3 Press the <Start> button.Note • The items displayed depend

on the options that are installed.

Job History ReportYou can check job results of the Network Controller.

Error History Report


277

Machine Status

10

You can print error information about the Network Controller.

Fonts ListThis prints the fonts available for PostScript.

System Settings List You can check the network information, and print and scan settings of the Network Controller.

Job Counter ReportThis prints the counter report for each feature.Note • [Job Counter Report] appears when entered from the [User Mode] of System Administration

mode.

1 Select [Job Counter Report].

2 Select [Job Counter Report].


10 Machine Status

278

Machine Status

10

Supplies

You can check the status of supplies (consumables) in the [Supplies] screen. The status of supplies is shown as "Ready", "Replace Soon", or "Replace Now". For toner, the amount is shown in percentage (0 to 100%).The following describes the procedure for checking the status of supplies.For information about how to replace supplies, refer to "Troubleshooting" (P.318).


2 Select the [Supplies] tab.Note • Select [ ] to display the


On the [Supplies] screen, you can check the following items. Note • The items displayed vary depending on the options installed.

• Staple Cartridge is displayed when one of the following options is installed: B-Finisher, C-Finisher, and C-Finisher with Booklet Maker.

• Punch Scrap Container is displayed when one of the following options is installed: C-Finisher and C-Finisher with Booklet Maker.

• Booklet Staple Cartridge is displayed when C-Finisher is installed.

Important • If using a partly consumed toner cartridge (such as a toner cartridge removed from another DocuColor 6075II/5065II unit), the indicated status may not match the actual remaining amount. When replacing toner cartridges, we recommend that you use new ones.

Yellow Toner (Y) Drum Cartridge (R2)

Magenta Toner (M) Drum Cartridge (R1)

Cyan Toner (C) Waste Toner Container

Black Toner (K1) Staple Cartridge (R1)

Black Toner (K2) Booklet Staple Cartridge (R2)

Drum Cartridge (R4) Booklet Staple Cartridge (R3)

Drum Cartridge (R3) Hole Punch Container (R4)

Faults

279

Machine Status

10

Faults

This section describes how to check the information of faults occurring in the machine.The [Error History Report] shows the latest 50 faults. The items displayed include the date and time, error code, and error category.This section describes how to print the error history.


2 Select the [Faults] tab.

3 Select [Error History Report].

4 Press the <Start> button.Note • You can also access the

[Error History Report] from [Job Status/Activity Report] in the [Billing Meter/Print Report] screen.

Note • When [Print Report Button] is disabled in the Reports setting, [Error History Report] is not displayed. For the Reports setting, refer to "Reports" (P.214).

11 Authentication and AuditronAdministration

The machine has a unique Authentication feature that restricts the ability to use functions, and an Auditron Administration feature that manages the use of each machine feature.

Overview of Authentication .......................................................................282

Overview of Auditron Administration.........................................................284

11 Authentication and Auditron Administration

282

Authentication and A

uditron Adm

inistration

11

Overview of Authentication

This section describes the Authentication features used with the machine.

Users Controlled by AuthenticationThe following is an explanation about the different user types that are controlled by the Authentication feature.Users are classified into the following four types. The authentication feature restricts operations according to the user type.

System administrator

Authentication registered user

Authentication unregistered user

General users

System AdministratorsThese are users who can enter and change system settings.A system administrator uses a special UserID called a System Administrator ID.To enter the System Administration mode, enter the System Administrator ID into the UserID entry field on the authentication screen.

Authenticated UsersThese are users who are registered with the machine.When an authenticated user uses a service that is restricted, the user must enter their UserID on the authentication screen.

Unauthenticated UsersThese are users who are not registered with the machine.An unauthenticated user cannot use services that are restricted.

General UsersThese are general users who are not permitted to use the machine in the authenticated mode.

Types of AuthenticationThis section describes an overview of the Authentication features that can be used with the machine.Authentication is carried out using a UserID or a UserID registered on a remote accounting server.The following shows the three different authentication methods according to the registration of the user information.

Direct AuthenticationUses the user information stored in the machine to manage authentication.

Overview of Authentication

283


uditron Adm

inistration

11

Features Controlled by AuthenticationThis section describes the features of the machine that is controlled by using the Authentication feature.

Local AccessLocal access refers to using the machine by direct operation of the control panel on the machine.The following features are controlled by local access.

CopyCopy operations can be restricted.When copy operations are registered in job memory,the use of the job memory is also restricted.

11 Authentication and Auditron Administration

284


uditron Adm

inistration

11

Overview of Auditron Administration

This section describes an overview of the Auditron Administration features that can be used with the machine.

Authentication and Auditron AdministrationThe machine uses the Auditron Administration feature together with the Authentication feature.

Using Authentication on this UnitAuditron administration is carried out using authentication registered user information already registered on the machine. Also, for print data sent directly from a computer, the authentication information set in the client side driver is checked against the authentication information registered on the machine before the data is accepted on the machine.

Manageable Features and ServicesThis section describes features and services that can be managed with the Auditron Administration feature.

Features that can be Managed with Authentication and Corresponding ServicesFor information about the Authentication feature, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.258).

Local Machine AccessThe Features and services that can be managed by Local Machine Access are as follows.

*1 This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required. *2 You can select features available for each user. For more information, refer to "Account Limit" (P.254).*3 This feature stops further machine operation if the number of pages has reached the specified maximum number.

For more information, refer to "Account Limit" (P.254).

Corresponding Service

Authentica-tion *1 Restrictions on Use

Per-user Usage Count

UserID Feature restrictions *2

Account Limit *3

Copy O O O O

Report/List - - - -

12 Maintenance

This chapter describes how to replace supplies (consumables), clean the machine, perform calibration, and print a report/list.

Replacing Supplies ...................................................................................286

Cleaning the Machine ...............................................................................307

Executing Calibration................................................................................310

Printing a Report/List ................................................................................315

12 Maintenance

286

Maintenance

12

Replacing Supplies

The machine is provided with the following supplies and periodical replacement parts. We recommend using the following supplies and periodical replacement parts because they have been made according to standards that match the specifications of the machine.

Handling Supplies/Periodical Replacement PartsDo not store boxes for supplies/periodical replacement parts upright.

Do not unpack supplies/periodical replacement parts until they are to be used. Avoid storing supplies/periodical replacement parts in the following locations:- Hot and humid location- Location close to a fire- Location exposed to direct sunlight- Dusty location

Before using supplies/periodical replacement parts, carefully read the instructions and precautions on the packaging.

We recommend having spare supplies/periodical replacement parts ready.

Check the product code of the supplies/periodical replacement parts and contact our Customer Support Center to place your orders.

The use of toner cartridges, waste toner containers, or staple cartridges not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use only toner cartridges, waste toner containers, and staple cartridges recommended by Xerox for the machine.

Confirming Status of SuppliesThe status of supplies can be confirmed on the [Supplies] screen.The status is indicated by “Ready”, “Order New”, “Replace Now”, or other indications.Also, an indication from 0 to 100% displays the remaining amount of toner.For information about confirming supplies, refer to "Supplies" (P.278).

Type of supplies/Periodical replacement part Product code Qty/Box

Toner cartridge [Y] CT200571 1 item / 1 box

Toner cartridge [M] CT200570 1 item / 1 box

Toner cartridge [C] CT200569 1 item / 1 box

Toner cartridge [K] CT200568 1 item / 1 box

Drum Cartridge K [R1] (Black) CT350361 1 item / 1 box

Drum Cartridge Y,M,C [R2/R3/R4] (Color) CT350362 1 item / 1 box

Waste toner container CWAA0663 1 unit / 1 box

Staples Type XE (3PCS) CWAA0540 5000 staples x 3 sets /1 box

Staples Type XC (4PCS) CWAA0501 5000 staples x 4 sets / 1 box

Staples Type XF (4PCS) CWAA0677 5000 staples x 4 sets, Staple scrap container x

1 unit / 1 box

Replacing Supplies

287

Maintenance

12

Replacing Toner CartridgesWhen it is time to replace a toner, a message appears on the touch screen.If you continue copying or printing without replacing the toner cartridge, a message appears and the machine stops after copying or printing around 1,800 pages for Black (K), or around 1200 pages for Cyan (C), Magenta (M) and Yellow (Y).Toner cartridges can be replaced, even if the machine is operating.Note • The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used. The number of pages that you can

copy or print is only an estimate and varies depending on conditions such as the content, paper size or orientation, paper type, and the computer environment.

Important • When replacing toner cartridges, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend laying paper on the floor beforehand.

• Used toner cartridges require special processing during disposal. Return them to our Customer Support Center.

• The use of toner cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use only toner cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine.

• When only a small amount of toner remains in a toner cartridge, the machine may stop during printing and display a message. If this happens, replace the toner cartridge to continue copying or printing.

• Replace toner cartridges while the machine is on.• If a partially used toner cartridge is used, the number of pages that you can copy or print

after the message "Please order xxx toner." appears may vary considerably depending on the condition.

Note • Monochrome copying and printing is available even when color toners are run out. In this case, only plain paper can be used.

WARNING

Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum cleaner for the spills. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum cleaner and cause explosion. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal.

CAUTION

Keep the toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and consult a physician immediately.

When replacing the toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth as well as inhalation.

If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with water.If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water and consult a physician immediately.

12 Maintenance

288

Maintenance

12

1 Open the toner cover.

2 Hold the handle of the toner cartridge indicated in the message and gently pull it out.Note • “Y” is for yellow, “M” is for

magenta, “C” is for cyan, and “K” is for black.

3 Remove the toner cartridge by holding the handle on the top of the cartridge while gently pulling it out.

Important • Pull out the toner cartridge gently. Otherwise, toner may fly out of the cartridge.• Return used toner cartridges to our Customer Support Center for disposal.

4 Take out the new toner cartridge of the same color as the old one from its box, and gently tilt the cartridge up and down, and then left and right several times.

WARNINGNever throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal.

Replacing Supplies

289

Maintenance

12

5 Insert the toner cartridge in gently until it comes to a stop.Note • Be sure to insert the toner

cartridge until you hear it click into place.

6 Close the toner cover.Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover is not

completely closed.

Replacing the Waste Toner ContainerWhen the waste toner container becomes full, a message appears on the touch screen.If you continue copying or printing without replacing the waste toner container, a message appears and the machine stops after copying or printing around 3,000 pages.

Important • When replacing the waste toner container, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend laying paper on the floor beforehand.

• Used waste toner containers require special processing during disposal. Return them to our Customer Support Center.

• The use of waste toner containers not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use only waste toner containers recommended by Xerox for the machine.

• Replace the waste toner container while the machine is on.

Note • The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used.• The number of pages that you can copy or print is only an estimate and varies depending on

conditions such as the content, paper size, paper type, and the computer environment.

1 Make sure that the machine has stopped before opening the front cover.

2 Open the waste toner container cover.

12 Maintenance

290

Maintenance

12

3 Pull out the waste toner container about half of it.

4 Hold the center part on the top of the container, and then remove it.

5 Securely hold the used waste toner container with both hands and put it into the plastic bag provided with the new waste toner container.Important • Return used waste toner

containers to our Customer Support Center for disposal.

• Be sure to put the used waste toner container in the dedicated plastic bag supplied with the new waste toner container.

6 Hold the center part on the top of a new container and insert it until it comes to a stop.Important • When inserting the waste

toner container, do not grip the handle of the container.

7 Close the waste toner container cover.

8 Close the front cover.Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover is even

slightly open.

Replacing Supplies

291

Maintenance

12

Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (for customers having a spot maintenance contract)

When it is time to replace a drum cartridge, a message “Replace the drum cartridge R1”appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, contact our Customer Support Center.If you have concluded a spot maintenance contract, refer to this section, then confirm the indicated drum cartridge position (R1) and replace the drum cartridge.If you continue to use the machine without replacing the drum cartridge after the message appears, the machine will stop and copying or printing will no longer be possible once the following number of pages have been copied or printed.

For DocuColor 6075II: Approx. 8,400 pages


Important • Before replacing a drum cartridge, you need to receive instruction for how to replace it from our customer engineer.

• Place a black sheet supplied with a new drum cartridge onto the whole unit within 2 minutes after pulling out a unit in which drum cartridges are placed. Image quality may deteriorate when the drum cartridges are exposed to light.

• The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use only drum cartridges recommended by Xerox for the machine.

Note • Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent lighting. Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in unsatisfactory printing.

• Used drum cartridges require special processing during disposal. Return them to our Customer Support Center.

• Replace drum cartridges while the machine is on. When the power is turned off, all information stored to the machine's memory will be erased.

• The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used.• The number of pages that you can copy or print is only an estimate and varies depending on

conditions such as the content, paper size, paper type, and the computer environment.• After the massage “Replace the drum cartridge R1” appears, image quality of printed

documents or copies may deteriorate.

1 Take out a new drum cartridge and a black sheet from its container.Important • Put the drum cartridge on a

flat place.• Do not place the new drum

cartridge in an upright position.


12 Maintenance

292

Maintenance

12

3 Pull down the R1-R4 lever.

4 Grip the handle of the unit and pull out it.

5 Place a black sheet supplied with the new drum cartridge onto the unit other than the drum cartridge R1.Important • Make sure to place the black

sheet. It may affect image quality.

6 Remove the drum cartridge upward while holding rings provided at the both ends of the drum cartridge.

7 Place the replaced drum cartridge into the empty container.

8 Open a bag including a new drum cartridge and take it out.Important • Do not touch or scratch the

surface of the drum when you take it out from the bag.

Replacing Supplies

293

Maintenance

12

9 Unwrap a sheet covering the drum cartridge and place it under the cartridge.

10 Grip rings provided at the both ends of the drum cartridge to uplift.Important • Do not touch the surface of

the drum cartridge.

11 Place the drum cartridge along with the guide with the side marked with ( ) frontward.

12 Press the both ends of the drum cartridge to place it in a horizontal position.Note • Make sure that the marks

( ) and ( ) face each other.

13 Remove the black sheet from the unit.

14 Insert the unit completely (1) and return the handle to the original position (2).

1

2

12 Maintenance

294

Maintenance

12

15 Return the lever R1-R4 to the original position.


slightly open.

Replacing Drum Cartridge R2/R3/R4 (for customers having a spot maintenance contract)

When it is time to replace a drum cartridge, a message “Replace the drum cartridge RX” appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, contact our Customer Support Center.If you have concluded a spot maintenance contract, refer to this section, then confirm the indicated drum cartridge position (R2, R3, or R4) and replace the corresponding drum cartridge.If you continue to use the machine without replacing the cartridge after the message appears, the machine will stop and copying or printing will no longer be possible once the following number of pages have been copied or printed.



Important • Before replacing a drum cartridge, you need to receive instruction for how to replace it from our customer engineer.

• Place a black sheet supplied with a new drum cartridge onto the whole unit within 2 minutes after pulling out a unit in which drum cartridges are placed. Image quality may deteriorate when the drum cartridges are exposed to light.

• The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use only drum cartridges recommended by Xerox for the machine.

Note • Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent lighting. Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in unsatisfactory printing.

• Used drum cartridges require special processing during disposal. Return them to our Customer Support Center.

• Replace drum cartridges while the machine is on. When the power is turned off, all information stored to the machine's memory will be erased.

• The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used.• The number of pages that you can copy or print is only an estimate and varies depending on

conditions such as the content, paper size, paper type, and the computer environment.• After the massage “Replace the drum cartridge RX” appears, image quality of printed

documents or copies may deteriorate.

Replacing Supplies

295

Maintenance

12

1 Take out a new drum cartridge and a black sheet from its container.Important • Put the drum cartridge on a

flat place.• Do not place the new drum

cartridge in an upright position.


3 Pull down the R1-R4 lever.

4 Grip the handle of the unit and pull out it.

5 Remove the drum cartridge upward while holding rings provided at the both ends of the drum cartridge.Note • The following example shows

how to replace drum R2.

6 Place the replaced drum cartridge into the empty container.

12 Maintenance

296

Maintenance

12

7 Place a black sheet supplied with the new drum cartridge onto the unit.Important • Make sure to place the black

sheet. It may affect image quality.

8 Open a bag including a new drum cartridge and take it out.Important • Do not touch or scratch the

surface of the drum when you take it out from the bag.

9 Unwrap a sheet covering the drum cartridge and place it under the cartridge.

10 Remove the black sheet from the unit.

11 Grip rings provided at the both ends of the drum cartridge to uplift.Important • Do not touch the surface of

the drum cartridge.

12 Place the drum cartridge along with the guide with the side marked with ( ) frontward.

Replacing Supplies

297

Maintenance

12

13 Press the both ends of the drum cartridge to place it in a horizontal position.Note • Make sure that the marks ( )

and ( ) face each other.

14 Remove the film on the drum cartridge.

15 Insert the unit completely and return the handle to the original position.

16 Return the lever R1-R4 to the original position.


slightly open.

1

2

12 Maintenance

298

Maintenance

12

Replacing the Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker

When the C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed and it is time to replace the staple cartridge, a message appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, replace the staple cartridge with a new one.The following example shows how to replace the staple cartridge in the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker. The procedure is the same as for the C-Finisher.Important • The use of staples not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use

only staples recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine.

Note • To order a staple cartridge, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 Make sure that the machine has stopped before opening the front cover of the finisher.

2 Grip the lever R1 of the staple cartridge holder, and pull out the holder to the right towards you.

3 Remove the staple cartridge holder by gripping the orange lever.Note • The staple cartridge is firmly

held. When remove the staple cartridge, strongly pull the cartridge.

4 Pick the empty staple case with your fingers (1), and then remove the case from the cartridge (2) as shown in the figure.

1

1

2

Replacing Supplies

299

Maintenance

12

5 Prepare a new staple case. Insert the front of the staple case into the staple cartridge (1), and push the rear of the case to set (2).

6 Insert the staple cartridge while gripping the orange lever until you hear it click into place.

7 Close the front cover of the finisher.Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher

is even slightly open.

Replacing the Booklet Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher with Booklet Maker or D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker

When the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) or the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed and it is time to replace the booklet staple cartridge, a message appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, replace the booklet staple cartridge with a new one. This section explains how to replace the booklet staple cartridge in the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker. Use the same procedures for the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker.Important • The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and

performance. Use only staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine.



1

2

12 Maintenance

300

Maintenance

12

2 Press the levers R2 and R3 to the right (1), and pull out the unit (2).

3 Hold the tabs of the booklet staple cartridge, and then lift to remove it.

4 Holding the tabs of a new booklet staple cartridge, return the cartridge to the original position and gently push it until you hear it click into place.

5 Return the unit to its original position.



R2

R3

Replacing Supplies

301

Maintenance

12

Replacing the Staple Cartridge for D2-Finisher with Booklet MakerWhen the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed and it is time to replace the staple cartridge, a message appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, replace the staple cartridge with a new one.Important • The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may impair quality and

performance. Use only staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox for the machine.


1 Make sure that the machine has stopped, and open the right cover of the finisher.

2 Hold the R1 at the position shown in the diagram.

3 Pull out the unit.

4 Hold the positions indicated by an arrow to remove the staple cartridge from the unit.

12 Maintenance

302

Maintenance

12

5 Push a new staple cartridge into the unit.

6 Push the removed unit back to the original position.

7 Close the right cover of the finisher.Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will operate unless the right cover of the

finisher is completely closed.

Replacing Supplies

303

Maintenance

12

Emptying Punch Scrap Container for C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker

When the C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed and the punch scrap container becomes full, a message appears on the touch screen. Discard the scraps according to the message.The following example shows how to replace the staple cartridge in the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker. The procedure is the same as for the C-Finisher.When pulling the punch scrap container out to dispose the punch scraps, ensure that all scraps are discarded. If there are scraps remaining, the container may be full before the next message is displayed. It may cause machine malfunctions.Important • Pull the container out while the power is on. If you switch off the power when emptying the

scrap container, the machine will not be able to detect that the scraps have been disposed.


2 Pull out the punch scrap container R4.

3 Discard all the scraps.

4 Insert the empty punch scrap container until it comes to a stop.

5 Close the front cover of the finisher.

12 Maintenance

304

Maintenance

12

Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher is even slightly open.

Emptying the Punch Scrap Container for D2-Finisher with Booklet MakerWhen the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed and the punch scrap container becomes full, a message appears on the touch screen. Discard the scraps according to the message.If you take the punch scrap container out of the machine, make sure to empty it completely. If it is reinstalled with some scraps remaining, it may become full before the message appears again, and this can cause machine breakdown.Important • When emptying the punch scrap container, make sure that the machine is switched on. If not

switched on, the machine will not recognize that the punch scrap container has been emptied.


2 Pull out the punch scrap container R4 towards you.

3 Discard all the scraps.

4 Insert the empty punch scrap container into its original position until it comes to a stop.

5 Close the right cover of the finisher.

Replacing Supplies

305

Maintenance

12

Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will operate unless the right cover of the finisher is completely closed.

Replacing the Staple Scrap Container for D2-Finisher with Booklet MakerWhen the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed and the staple scrap container becomes full, a message appears on the touch screen. Replace the staple scrap container according to the message.Important • Replace the staple scrap container while the power is on.

• A Staple scrap container is included in a Staples Type XF (4PCS).


2 Move the lock lever, shown in the diagram, leftward to the position.

3 Securely hold the staple scrap container by its R5 section, and take the container out of the machine.

CAUTIONBe careful not to get injured by waste staples when detaching a staple dust box.

12 Maintenance

306

Maintenance

12

4 Put the old container into the plastic bag supplied.Important • Do not disassemble the

container and return it to our Customer Support Center.

5 Hold a new staple scrap container by its R5 section, and insert the container, bottom first, into the machine.Important • To prevent injury, do not put

your fingers on top of the container.

6 Push the R5 section of the container until the lock lever moves to the position.

7 Close the right cover of the finisher.Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will operate unless the right cover of the

finisher is completely closed.

Cleaning the Machine

307

Maintenance

12


The following describes how to clean the machine.This section is divided into separate descriptions on how to clean the exterior, document cover/document feeder, and document glass.

Cleaning the ExteriorThe following describes how to clean the exterior of the machine.Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile liquids or spray insect repellent on the

machine as doing so may discolor, deform, or crack covers.• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to

malfunction or damage documents during copying.

1 Wipe the exterior with a firmly wrung soft cloth moistened with water.Important • Do not use cleaning agents

other than water or neutral detergent.

Note • If it is difficult to remove dirt, try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount of neutral detergent.

2 Wipe off any excess water from the exterior with a soft cloth.

Cleaning the Document Cover and Document GlassIf the document cover and document glass are dirty, dirt may appear on copies and the machine may not properly detect document sizes.To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the machine about once a month.Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint

or coating on plastic parts.• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to


WARNINGWhen cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it. Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product. Never use aerosol cleaners, or it may catch fire and cause explosion.

CAUTIONWhen cleaning this product, switch off the product and its switchboard (branch circuit). Access to a live machine interior may cause electric shock.

12 Maintenance

308

Maintenance

12

1 Wipe the document cover with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.Note • If it is difficult to remove dirt,

try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount of neutral detergent.

2 Wipe the document glass with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.Note • If it is difficult to remove dirt, try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount

of neutral detergent.

Cleaning the Film Section and Document Feeder Glass If the film section and document feeder glass are dirty, dirt may appear on copies.To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the machine about once a month or clean it when a message is shown on the display.Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint



1 Wipe the film section and the document feeder glass and guide with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt on the document cover, glass and guide, and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.Note • If it is difficult to remove dirt,

try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount of neutral detergent.

2 Holds the green lever to open the part of the figure on the right. Wipe the optical glass with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt on the optical glass, and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.Important • Do not push the optical glass

strongly since it is easy to damage the film around the optical glass surface.


3 Close the cover until it clicks into place by pushing the center part of the left edge of the cover.


309

Maintenance

12

Cleaning Document Feeder RollersIf the machine is equipped with a document feeder and the document feeder rollers are dirty, dirt may appear on copies and the machine may not properly detect document sizes.To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the machine about once a month.Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint


malfunction or damage documents during copying or printing.

1 Pull up the handle of the top cover of the document feeder, and open the top cover until it comes to a stop.Note • When you fully open the

cover, it enters a fixed position. Open the cover gently.

2 While turning the rollers, gently clean it with a soft cloth moistened with water.Important • Use a cloth that has been

firmly wrung to prevent drops of water falling into the machine. Drops of water on internal components may cause a malfunction.


3 Close the top cover of the document feeder until you hear it click into place.

4 Close the left cover of the document feeder until you hear it click into place.

12 Maintenance

310

Maintenance

12

Executing Calibration

The machine can automatically adjust gradation when the reproducibility of density or color in copies and prints has deteriorated. The machine can adjust the gradation for each screen type.The following three types of screen is available.

Copy JobAdjusts the gradation for copying documents.

Print Job 1Basic screen for printing.For PCL print driversAdjusts the gradation for items other than [Graphic] and [Presentation] of [Color Wise] in the [Fiery Printing] tab.For PostScript printersAdjusts the gradation for [Auto] and [Standard] of [Screen] in the [Graphics] tab.Note • Displayed Screen may differ corresponding to settings of [Image Type], [RGB Correction]


Print Job 2For PCL print driversAdjusts the gradation for [Presentation] at [Color Wise] in the [Fiery Printing] tab.For PostScript printersAdjusts the gradation for [Auto] and [Gradation] of [Screen] in the [Graphics] tab.Note • Displayed Screen may differ corresponding to settings of [Image Type], [RGB Correction]


The following paper sizes is available for the calibration: A3, A4 , 11 x 17 inches, and 8.5 x 11 inches .Note • We recommend executing calibration for all three of the screen types. When the adjustment

for one screen type is complete, specify the next screen type and repeat the procedure.• If color gradation is not compensated despite the periodic execution of calibration, contact

our Customer Support Center.• The calibration does not execute when [Text] or [Map] is selected for [Original Type] in the

[Image Quality] tab for copying.• To make sure that [Copy Defaults] in the System Administration mode is set as following

before executing calibration:Lighten/Darken: Normal, Color Shift: Normal, Color Saturation: Normal, Color Balance: 0.

• After finishing the calibration, change the settings of [Copy Defaults] if necessary. For information about the [Copy Default], refer to "Copy Defaults" (P.226).


<Log In/Out> button


311

Maintenance

12

2 Enter the UserID with the numeric keypad or a keyboard displayed by selecting [Keyboard], and select [Confirm]. Note • The default UserID value is





12 Maintenance

312

Maintenance

12

6 Select [Image Quality Adjustment].

7 Select [Calibration].

8 Load paper.Important • Do not load paper exceeding


9 Select the screen type for calibration.Note • The example described here

is for the [Copy Job] screen.

10 Select the tray that you loaded paper in Step 10 for [Paper Supply], and then select [Close].Note • Only paper types can be set when you select the Tray 5 (bypass).

11 Select [Target] to set an area for applying the calibration, and then select [Close].Note • Normally, select [Copy/Print] for [Applicable Area]. When using external calibration for print

output, set [Applicable Area] if necessary.

12 Select [Start].Note • The message “Printing the Calibration Chart. Copy Job” appears and the document for

calibration (Calibration Chart) is printed.


313

Maintenance

12


14 Align the magenta patch of the printed Calibration Chart against the left side of the document glass.Note • Place the Calibration Chart on

the document glass.

15 Place at least five sheets of white paper on the Calibration Chart to cover the Chart and close the document cover.

16 Select [Start].

The message “Calibration is in progress. Copy Job” appears and the machine automatically adjusts the gradation. It takes about 30 seconds to complete calibration.If the adjustment completes successfully, a completion message appears on the [Calibration] screen. If there is a problem, the machine stops adjustment and displays an error message. Solve the problem in accordance with the displayed error message.

17 Select [Confirm].

18 To continue automatic calibration for other screen types, repeat Steps 11 to 17.

19 When you started the calibration from the [All Services] screen, select [Close] and then go to Step 22. started the adjustment in the System Administration mode, select [Close] until the [System Settings] screen appears.

Magenta

12 Maintenance

314

Maintenance

12


21 Make a copy to confirm the image quality.

Printing a Report/List

315

Maintenance

12

Printing a Report/List

Printing reports/lists allows you to check the machine configuration and communication status. This section describes how to print a report/ list.For information about report/list types, refer to "Print Report/List" (P.275).Using the [Job status] screen allows you to print the results of completed jobs. Refer to "Checking Completed Jobs" (P.264).Note • When the <Job in Memory> indicator is not lit, there is no stored document to print.



3 Select [Print Report/List].Note • When [Print Report Button] is

disabled in [Reports], [Print Report/List] appears only during normal operation in the System Administration mode. For [Reports], refer to "Reports" (P.214).

4 Select a report or list you want to print and press the <Start> button.Note • The items displayed differ

depending on the optional features installed.

<Machine Status> button

13 Problem Solving

This chapter describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.

Troubleshooting ........................................................................................318

Machine Trouble .......................................................................................320

Image Quality Problems ...........................................................................324

Trouble during Copying ............................................................................329

Error Codes ..............................................................................................334

Paper Jams...............................................................................................344

Document Jams........................................................................................381

Stapler Faults............................................................................................384

13 Problem Solving

318

Problem Solving

13

Troubleshooting

This section describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.See the following for troubleshooting procedures to solve the problems.

Power is not switched On. Cause Is the power switch on the machine off?No Yes Action Turn the power switch on.

Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.39).No

Cause Is the power cord plugged into the power outlet?Action Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug in the power

cord. Then turn the power switch on.Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.39).

NoCause Is the power cord disconnected from the machine or the rear

of the rack?Action Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug in the power

cord. Then turn the power switch on.Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.39).

NoCause Is power of the correct voltage being supplied?Action Make sure that the power supply is 220 V (volts), 10 A

(amperes).Make sure that power of capacity compatible with the specified maximum power consumption of the machine (2.2kW) is being supplied.

Touch screen is dark. Cause Is the <Power Saver> button on?No Yes Action The machine is in the Power Saver mode. Press the <Power

Saver> button on the control panel to cancel the Power Saver mode.Refer to "Power Saver mode" (P.41).

NoCause Is the brightness dial set too low?Action Use the brightness dial to adjust display brightness.

Refer to "Control panel" (P.45).

A message is displayed. Cause Has a paper jam or document jam occurred?No Yes Action For information on paper jams, refer to "Paper Jams" (P.344).

For information on document jams, refer to "Document Jams" (P.381).

NoCause An error code displayed?Action Refer to "Error Codes" (P.334).

The machine is not working properly.

Action Refer to "Machine Trouble" (P.320).

No Yes

Troubleshooting

319

Problem Solving

13

If the machine has still not worked properly after taking measures described in this chapter, contact our Customer Support Center.

Poor image quality Action Refer to "Image Quality Problems" (P.324).No Yes

Trouble during Copy Action Refer to "Trouble during Copying" (P.329).Yes

13 Problem Solving

320

Problem Solving

13

Machine Trouble

If you think some trouble is occurring on the machine, check the machine status again.

Symptoms Check Remedy

Power is not switched On.

Is the power switch on the machine off?

Turn the power switch on.Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.39).

Is the power cord plugged into the power outlet?

Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug in the power cord. Then turn the power switch on.Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.39).

Is the power cord disconnected from the machine or the rear of the rack?

Is power of the correct voltage being supplied?

Make sure that the power supply is 200 V (volts), 15 A (amperes) when one electric cord is provided.Make sure that power of capacity compatible with the specified maximum power consumption of the machine (2.2kW) is being supplied.

Touch screen is dark.

Is the <Power Saver> button on?

The machine is in the Power Saver mode. Press the <Power Saver> button on the control panel to cancel the Power Saver mode.Refer to "Power Saver mode" (P.41).

Is the brightness dial set too low?

Use the brightness dial to adjust display brightness.Refer to "Control panel" (P.45).

unable to copy. Is a message displayed on the touch screen?

Follow the instructions displayed to solve the problem.

Is the power cord plugged into the power outlet?

Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug in the power cord. Then turn the power switch on.Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.39).

Printing is not performed even though printing was instructed on Tray 5 (bypass).

Is paper of the size specified for printing loaded on the tray?

Follow the instructions displayed to load paper of correct size and instruct it to print again.Refer to "Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.166).

Machine Trouble

321

Problem Solving

13

Copies are not made at the desired size

Is the document glass or the document cover dirty?

Clean the document glass or the document cover.Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass" (P.307).

Is the document made of highly transparent material like a transparency?

Place the document on the document glass, and place a white sheet on top of the document before making a copy.

Is the document at the correct position?

Load the document correctly.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

Is the document loaded correctly?

Is the document guides at the correct position?

Properly set the document guides.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

Is the document folded or bent?

Straighten and properly reset the document.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

Is the document a non-standard size?

Enter the document size.Refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.83).


13 Problem Solving

322

Problem Solving

13

Paper is often jammed or wrinkled.

Is paper loaded properly in the tray?

Load paper correctly.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Is the paper tray set properly?

Firmly push in the paper tray as far as possible to set it properly.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Is the paper damp? Replace with paper from a new ream.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Is the paper curled? Either turn the paper so that the curl is facing down in the paper tray, or replace with paper from a new ream.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Are the paper and paper tray settings correct?

Make sure the paper and paper tray match the configured paper size.Refer to "Paper Tray Settings" (P.203).

Are there any torn pieces of paper still remaining inside the machine or is there a foreign object in the machine?

Open the door of the machine or slide out the paper tray to remove the torn paper or the foreign object.Refer to "Paper Jams" (P.344), or "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Is out-of-spec paper loaded in the tray?

Replace with paper that meets machine specifications.Refer to "Paper Types" (P.158), or "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Is paper loaded in the paper tray past its maximum fill line?

Load paper in the paper tray so that it does not exceed the maximum fill line.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Is the paper guide set correctly?

Load the paper correctly, and apply the paper guides to a paper lightly.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162), or "Changing the Paper Size for the Trays" (P.173).

Is the image size on the paper is almost the same as the paper size?

Increase the amounts of edge erase.For more information, refer to "Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)" (P.85) when you make copies, or to the print driver's online help when you print data.

Is paper cut properly? Some paper are not cut properly depending on a paper type. Fan the paper well before loading paper.

Documents are not fed into the document feeder.

Are the documents too small?

The minimum size of the document that can be loaded on the document feeder is A5.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).


Machine Trouble

323

Problem Solving

13

An error message is displayed after paper is loaded in paper Tray 5 (bypass) and the <Start> button is pressed.

Check the position of the paper guides of the Tray 5 (bypass).

Set the paper guides to the correct positions.Refer to "Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.166).

Documents are often jammed.

Is the right type of document used?

Properly load a document that can be handled by the document feeder.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).Are you trying to copy

irregular shaped documents, business cards, transparencies, or thin documents?

Are you trying to copy documents affixed with sticky labels, paper clips or adhesive tape?

Remove sticky labels, paper clips or adhesive tape from the document before copying.

Are the document guides at the correct position?

Properly set the document guides.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

Is part of the document ripped, and a piece of paper remaining in the document feeder?

Open the document feeder cover and check inside.Refer to "Document Jams" (P.381).

When importing originals of different sizes, is the [Mixed Size Originals] setting set to [On]?

Set [Mixed Size Originals] to [On].Refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.84).

Is an A5-size document loaded horizontally ( ) on the document feeder when the Mixed Size Originals feature is in use?

Load the A5-size document vertically ( ).

A corner of the document is folded.

Is the document curled? Flatten out the curl and load the document again.

Color copies cannot be made.

Is [Output Color] set to [Black]?

Select [Full Color] at [Output Color].Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy)" (P.69).

Is a message prompting toner cartridge replacement displayed on the touch screen?

Replace with the toner cartridge of the color indicated in the message.Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.287).

Stapler Faults - Refer to "Stapler Faults" (P.384).


13 Problem Solving

324

Problem Solving

13

Image Quality Problems

When image quality of the printed document is poor, choose the similar symptom in the following table, and perform the required remedy.If image quality is not improved by applying the relevant remedy, contact our Customer Support Center.


The copy is dirty. Is the document glass or the document cover dirty?

Clean the document glass or the document cover.Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass" (P.307).

Is the document made of highly transparent material like a transparency?

If the document is highly transparent, marks on the document cover will be copied. Place a white sheet of paper on the original document and make a copy.

Is the document colored, of a rough texture or a blueprint?

Either adjust the copy density or image quality and then retry copying.Refer to "Image Enhancement (Background Suppression/Contrast)" (P.76), or Passcode.

Are you making copies of glossy printing paper?

Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the document glass, and shadows are sometimes copied and reproduced as dirt. Place a transparency or highly transparent film under the document and retry copying.

The copy has black lines.

Is the scanning glass on the feeder dirty?

Clean the document feeder glass.Refer to "Cleaning the Film Section and Document Feeder Glass" (P.308).

The copy is too dark.

Is the copy density set to [Dark]?

Adjust the copy density.Refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.74).The copy is too

light.Is the density of the document too light?

Is the copy density set to [Lighter]?

Tonal reproduction in color copies is poor, resulting in unsatisfactory image quality.

Is tonal reproduction poor? Perform automatic calibration from the [All Services] screen.Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.310).

The copy shifts slightly.

Is the paper shifting or is the leading edge of the paper not loaded flush with the tray corners?

Align the edges of the paper, and load the paper again so that is flush against the paper tray corners.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).


325

Problem Solving

13

Images on the copy are skewed.

Is the document loaded correctly?

Load the document correctly.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

Is paper loaded properly in the tray?

Load paper correctly.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Is the paper guide of the Tray 5 (bypass) set so that the guide touches the paper?

Load paper correctly.Refer to "Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.166).

Is the document guides at the correct position?

Load the document correctly, and align the document guides with the edge of the document.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

Is the paper tray set properly?

Firmly push in the tray as far as possible to set it properly.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Part of the image is missing on the copy.

Is the paper damp? If the paper is damp, either some parts of the copy are not shown or the copy is smudged and unclear. Replace with paper from a new ream.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Is the loaded paper folded or wrinkled?

Remove the defective paper and replace with paper from a new ream.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Is the document pasted together or folded in?

A probable cause is that the pasted or folded in section is curling back, and has risen up from the surface of the document glass. Place a stack of white sheets on the document to hold the document down flat against the document glass.

A stripe pattern appears in copies.

Is too large a copy ratio set? Stripes sometimes appear in copies at some copy ratios. Adjust the copy ratio.Refer to "Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)" (P.63).


Printing is faint.(smudged, unclear)

The paper is damp. Replace with paper from a new ream.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

The drum cartridge is depleted or damaged.

Replace with a new drum cartridge.Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridge R1 (for customers having a spot maintenance contract)" (P.291), or "Replacing Drum Cartridge R2/R3/R4 (for customers having a spot maintenance contract)" (P.294).

There is no toner left in the toner cartridge.

Replace with a new toner cartridge.Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.287).


13 Problem Solving

326

Problem Solving

13

Black or colored dots are printed.



Black or colored lines are printed.



The scanning glass on the document feeder is dirty.

Clean the document feeder glass.Refer to "Cleaning the Film Section and Document Feeder Glass" (P.308), or "Cleaning the Film Section and Document Feeder Glass" (P.308).

Dirt appears at equal intervals.

Dirt on the paper feed path. Print a few pages.



White dots appear in black filled areas.

The paper in use is unsuitable.

Load suitable paper.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).





327

Problem Solving

13

Printed toner smudges when rubbed with your finger.Toner is not fused to the paper.The paper is dirtied with toner.




The entire paper area is printed black.



A probable cause is a high-voltage power supply malfunction.

Contact our Customer Support Center.

Nothing is printed.

Two or more sheets of paper are being fed simultaneously (double-feed).

Fan the paper well and load it again.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).



A probable cause is a high-voltage power supply malfunction.

Contact our Customer Support Center.

White areas or white or colored stripes appear.





13 Problem Solving

328

Problem Solving

13

The entire page is printed faint.

When the print was made using the Tray 5 (bypass), the size and type of the actually loaded paper differed from the setting on the print driver.

Load paper of the correct size and type into the Tray 5 (bypass).Refer to "Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.166).

Two or more sheets may be feeding at once.

Fan the paper well and load it again.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Paper becomes wrinkled.Text is blurred.


Replace with paper from a new ream.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Paper is being added while it is being fed.

The paper is damp.

White areas appear or color is missing vertically





Text or images are printed at an angle

The paper guide in the paper tray is not set at the correct position.

Set the horizontal and vertical paper guides to the correct positions.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).


Trouble during Copying

329

Problem Solving

13


Describes solutions for problems encountered during copying.

Unable to CopyDescribes solutions when unable to copy.

Document not fed properly from the document feeder

Cause Document size is too small.

Action The minimum size of the document that can be loaded on the document feeder is A5.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

Cause The right type of document is not being used.Action The document feeder cannot be used with irregular

sized documents, business cards, transparencies, or thin documents.In addition, documents with tags, paper clips, and cellophane tape cannot be used.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

Cause The document guides are in the incorrect position.Action Set the document guides to correctly match the

document size.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

Cause Part of the document is ripped, and a piece of paper remaining in the document feeder.

Action Open the document feeder cover, and remove the piece of paper.Refer to "Document Jams" (P.381).

Cause Documents of different sizes are set.Action When using documents of different sizes, you must

specify [Mixed Size Originals]. Otherwise, a paper jam will result. When setting documents of different sizes, be sure to specify [Mixed Size Originals].Refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.84).

13 Problem Solving

330

Problem Solving

13

The Copy Result is not What was ExpectedDescribed solutions for situations in which the copy result is different from that expected.

The copy is dirty. Cause The document glass or the document cover is dirty.No Action Clean the document glass or the document cover.

Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass" (P.307).

Cause The document is made of highly transparent material like a transparency.

Action If the document is highly transparent, marks on the document cover will be copied. Place a white sheet of paper on the original document and make a copy.

Cause Color paper, rough paper, or blueprint paper is being used.

Action The paper's background color is copied. Either adjust the copy density or image quality, or specify suppress background color, and then retry copying.

Cause Glossy printing paper is being used.Action Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the document

glass, and shadows are sometimes copied and reproduced as dirt. Place a transparency or highly transparent film under the document and retry copying.

Copy is too dark, or too light

Cause Copy density is set to [Darker], or to [Lighter].

No Action Adjust the copy density.Refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.74).

Cause Density of the document is too light.Action Adjust the copy density.

Refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.74).

Cause The Original Type is inappropriate.Action Copy black text. If it is too light, select [Text] for [Original

Type].Refer to "Image Enhancement (Background Suppression/Contrast)" (P.76).

Colors differ between the original and the copy.

Cause Tonal reproduction is misconfigured.

No Action Perform calibration.Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.310).


331

Problem Solving

13

No Cause A document type appropriate for this document is not selected.

Action In [Original Type], select a type appropriate for the document.Refer to "Image Enhancement (Background Suppression/Contrast)" (P.76).

The copy shifts slightly. Cause Paper set in the paper tray is misaligned.No Action Align the edges of the paper, and load the paper again

so that is flush against the front tray corners.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Part of the image is missing on the copy.

Cause The paper is damp.

No Action If the paper is damp, either some parts of the copy are not shown or the copy is smudged and unclear. Replace with paper from a new ream.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Cause Paper with folds or wrinkles has been set in the paper tray.

Action Remove the defective paper and replace with paper from a new ream.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Cause The document is pasted together or folded in.Action It is possible that the folded in or pasted part of the

document is not touching the document glass. Place a stack of white sheets on the document to hold the document down flat against the document glass.

Stripes appear in the copy

Cause The document enlargement ratio is too large.

No Action Stripes sometimes appear in copies at some enlargement ratios. Adjust the copy ratio.Refer to "Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)" (P.63).

Images on the copy are skewed.

Cause The document is not loaded correctly.

No Action Load the document correctly.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

Cause The document guides are in an incorrect position.Action Load the document correctly, and align the document

guides with the edges of the document.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

13 Problem Solving

332

Problem Solving

13

No Cause The paper tray is not set properly.Action Firmly push in the tray as far as possible to set it

properly.Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.162).

Cause The paper guide for Tray 5 (bypass) is misaligned.Action Load the paper correctly, and align the paper guide with

the edge of the paper.Refer to "Loading Paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.166).

Copies are not made at the desired size

Cause The document glass or the document cover is dirty.

No Action Clean the document glass or the document cover.Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass" (P.307).

Cause The document is made of highly transparent material like a transparency.

Action Place a white sheet of paper on the original document and make a copy.

Cause The document is misaligned.Action Load the document correctly.

Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

Cause The document guides are in an incorrect position.Action Load the document correctly, and align the document

guides with the edges of the document.Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

Cause The document is a non-standard size.

Action Enter the document size and then copy.Refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.83).

Cause The document is folded or bent.Action Straighten and properly reset the document.

Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.56).

Unable to take color copies

Cause [Output Color] is set to [Black].

No Action Set [Output Color] to [Auto] or [Full Color].Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy)" (P.69).

A corner of the copy is cut off.

Cause The document exceeds the printable area.

No Action Adjust the reduce/enlarge to make the copy a little smaller.


333

Problem Solving

13

NoNo stapling done Cause The finisher is not attached.

Action A finisher is needed to perform stapling. Attach a finisher, or cancel stapling from the print options.

Cause The number of pages to staple exceeds 50.Action A maximum of 50 pages can be stapled. Reduce the

number of pages to 50 or lower.

13 Problem Solving

334

Problem Solving

13

Error Codes

This section explains error codes.If an error caused the printing to end abnormally, or a malfunction occurred in the machine, then an error message code (***-***) is displayed.If an error code appears that is not listed in the table below, or if an error persists after following the listed solution, then contact our Customer Support Center.Refer to the following table for error codes, and rectify the problem.Important • If an error code is displayed, all print data of the machine as well as print data stored in the

machine's built-in memory is discarded.

Errors are divided into the following [Categories].C: CopyP: PrintS: ScanO: Other Problems

Error CodeCategory

Cause and RemedyC P S O

002-770 O O [Cause] Unable to process job template due to insufficient hard disk space.

[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space.

003-702 O O [Cause] When making 2 sided copy using the Build Job feature, the resulted ratio is different between Side 1 and 2.

[Remedy] Match the resulted ratio between Side 1 and 2.

003-750 O [Cause] Unable to store any documents with 2 Sided Book Copy feature.

[Remedy] Check the 2 Sided Book Copy settings.Refer to "2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)" (P.82).

003-751 O O [Cause] The machine is unable to process size, because the specified document area is too small.

[Remedy] Increase resolution or scan area size.

003-752 O [Cause] When setting a mixed size document to Full Color/2 Side and attempting to scan at 600dpi, an error occurs.

[Remedy] Decrease [Scan Resolution] to [400dpi] or less, and rescan.

003-753 O [Cause] When scanning a mixed size document using the 2 sided simultaneous scan feature with 300, 400, or 600dpi, an error occurs.


003-754003-755

O O [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.[Remedy] Reprocess the job.

Error Codes

335

Problem Solving

13

003-757 O [Cause] When scanning a mixed size document using the 2 sided simultaneous scan feature with400, or 600dpi, an error occurs.


003-760 O [Cause] An incompatible combination of features are specified in the document scan conditions.

[Remedy] Check the selected options.

003-761 O O [Cause] The paper size of the tray selected for auto tray is different from the paper size of the tray selected for Auto Repeat.

[Remedy] Change the paper size for the tray, or change the [Paper Type Priority] settings.

003-763 O [Cause] An error occurred when reading the Calibration Chart.[Remedy] Place the Adjustment Chart properly on the document

glass.Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.310).

003-795 O [Cause] When enlarging/reducing a scanned document to the specified paper size, the reduction/enlargement ratio value exceeds the allowed range.

[Remedy] Take one of the following actions:Manually enter a reduction/enlargement ratio.Change the paper size.

005-274005-275005-280005-281005-282005-283005-284005-285005-286

O [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. Contact our Customer

Support Center.

Error CodeCategory


13 Problem Solving

336

Problem Solving

13

012-211012-212012-213012-214012-215012-216012-217012-218012-219012-221012-223012-224012-225012-226012-227012-228012-229012-230012-235012-236012-237012-238012-239012-240012-241012-243

O [Cause] Finisher malfunctioned.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved

by performing the relevant remedy, Contact our Customer Support Center.

012-246 O [Cause] The Booklet Maker is not fully inserted in the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker.

[Remedy] Fully insert the Booklet Maker, and turn the machine off and on.

012-247012-248012-250012-251012-252012-253

O [Cause] Finisher malfunction[Remedy] Turn the machine off and on. If the error persists, contact

our Customer Support Center.

012-254 O [Cause] The sensor was activated because paper output to the finisher was removed before the finisher tray lowered and completely stopped in position. Or, there is a foreign object under the finisher tray.

[Remedy] If there is any foreign object under the finisher tray, remove it and then turn the machine off and on. If the error persists, contact our Customer Support Center.

Error CodeCategory


Error Codes

337

Problem Solving

13

012-255012-260012-261012-263012-264012-265012-266012-270012-271012-282012-283012-284012-291012-295012-296

O [Cause] Finisher malfunctioned.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


016-210016-211016-212016-213016-214016-215016-216016-217

O [Cause] An error occurred on the software settings.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


016-219 O [Cause] The machine does not have the software license.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


016-220016-221016-222016-223016-224016-225016-226016-227016-228

O O [Cause] An error occurred in the document scanner.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


016-708 O [Cause] Annotation is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space.


016-712 O [Cause] The machine is unable to process the job, because the specified document area is too small.

[Remedy] Increase resolution or scan area size.

016-722 O [Cause] The specified staple position or the specified paper size is not supported in the finisher.

[Remedy] Check the staple position and the paper size, and try to print again.

Error CodeCategory


13 Problem Solving

338

Problem Solving

13

016-723 O [Cause] The specified punch position or the specified paper size is not supported in the finisher.

[Remedy] Check the punch position and the paper size, and try to print again.

016-724 O [Cause] The specified staple and punch position combination is unsupported.

[Remedy] Specify the staple and punch positions to be on the same side, and try to print again.

016-735 O O [Cause] Attempted to print [Job Template List] while updating the job template.

[Remedy] Retry printing after waiting for a period.

016-748 O O O [Cause] Printing is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space.

[Remedy] Reduce the number of pages of print data, for example, by dividing up the print data or printing one copy at a time when making multiple copies.

016-756 O [Cause] No permissions to use the service.[Remedy] Check with your System Administrator.

016-757 O [Cause] Passcode is incorrect.[Remedy] Enter the correct Passcode.

016-758 O O O [Cause] No Permissions to use service.[Remedy] Check with your Auditron Administrator.

016-759 O O O [Cause] Maximum number of pages for this service has been reached.

[Remedy] Check with your Auditron Administrator.

016-774 O O [Cause] Compression conversion is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space.


016-775 O O [Cause] Image conversion is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space.


016-777 O [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during image processing.[Remedy] The hard disk might be defective. When replacing a hard

disk, contact our Customer Support Center.

016-778 O [Cause] Conversion processing of scanned image was interrupted, because of insufficient disk space.


016-779 O [Cause] An error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.

[Remedy] Retry scanning.

016-780 O [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.

[Remedy] The hard disk might be defective. When replacing a hard disk, contact our Customer Support Center.

Error CodeCategory


Error Codes

339

Problem Solving

13

016-786 O O [Cause] When using the scan feature, hard disk capacity is insufficient for writing to a file.

[Remedy] Either remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to increase free disk space, or initialize the hard disk.

016-791 O O [Cause] The forwarding destination or job template save location could not be accessed.

[Remedy] Check whether you can access the specified forwarding destination.

016-792 O [Cause Specified job history could not be acquired, when printing [Job Counter Report]

[Remedy] Specified job history does not exist.

016-793 O [Cause] The hard disk has run out free space.[Remedy] Either remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to

increase free disk space, or initialize the hard disk.

021-750021-751021-770021-771021-772

O [Cause] During an inspection or maintenance request, a transmission error occurred, and our Customer Support Center could not be contacted.

[Remedy] Check that the phone lines are connected, and try sending an inspection or maintenance request again after a short time.If the error persists, contact our Customer Support Center.

027-720 O [Cause] Unable to find the server of an application interface destination.

[Remedy] Check DNS server address. Or check whether an application interface in installed on the computer is registered by DNS server or not.

027-721 O [Cause] An application interface destination does not exist.[Remedy] Check whether an application linked operates correctly.

027-722 O [Cause] The jobs was timed out during connection with an application interface destination.

[Remedy] Try to process the job flow again.

027-727 O [Cause] A parameter is illegal during an application interface.[Remedy] Try to process the job flow again.

027-728 O [Cause] The number of files that is required to send to external services exceeds the maximum number of files that can be sent.

[Remedy] Try to send again after decreasing the number of pages that is lower than the maximum number.

027-770 O [Cause] The print data cannot be processed because of PDL error.

[Remedy] Check the print data and try to print again.

027-771 O [Cause] A disk full error occurred.[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to

increase free disk space.

047-210 O O [Cause] An error occurred with the offset stacking module.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved

by performing the relevant remedy, contact our Customer Support Center.

Error CodeCategory


13 Problem Solving

340

Problem Solving

13

062-210 O [Cause] The document feeder malfunctioned.[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.

062-211 O [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.

062-220 O Refer to 062-210.

062-277 O [Cause] A communications error occurred between the document scan unit and the document feeder.

[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.

062-278 O [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


062-790 O [Cause] The scanned document is copy-protected.[Remedy] Refer to "Legal Notice" (P.29), and check to see if the

document can be copied.

063-210 O Refer to 062-211.

063-220063-230063-240

O Refer to 062-210.

065-210065-211065-212065-213

O [Cause] An error occurred with the machine.[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.

065-215065-216

O O [Cause] An error occurred in the document feeder.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


065-219065-220

O O Refer to 062-210.

071-210 O [Cause] The Tray 1 malfunctioned.[Remedy] Check paper loaded in the Tray 1, and power-cycle the

machine. If the machine is not improved by performing the relevant remedy, contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than the Tray 1 can be used.





Error CodeCategory


Error Codes

341

Problem Solving

13



075-210075-211

O [Cause] The Tray 5 (bypass) malfunctioned.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


078-250 O [Cause] The Tray 6 (High Capacity) malfunctioned.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


078-260078-261078-262078-263078-264078-265078-266078-267078-268078-269078-270078-271078-272078-273078-274078-275078-276078-277078-278078-279078-280078-281

O [Cause] The Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity Tray) malfunctioned.[Remedy] Check paper loaded in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity

Tray), and power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved by performing the relevant remedy, contact our Customer Support Center.

078-282078-283

O [Cause] The Tray 5 (bypass) malfunctioned.[Remedy] Check paper loaded in the Tray 5 (bypass), and power-

cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved by performing the relevant remedy, contact our Customer Support Center.

112-700 O [Cause] The finisher's punch scrap container is full.[Remedy] Empty the punch scrap container.For more information, refer to "Emptying Punch Scrap Container for C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker" (P.303).

116-701 O O [Cause] 2 sided print could not be made due to insufficient memory.

[Remedy] Print each side.

116-713 O [Cause] Job was divided and printed due to insufficient disk space.


Error CodeCategory


13 Problem Solving

342

Problem Solving

13

123-400 O [Cause] A malfunction occurred in the machine.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


124-705 O [Cause] The settings for punching are cancelled.[Remedy] Confirm the punching position and try to print again.

124-706 O [Cause] The settings for folding are cancelled.[Remedy] Confirm the folding settings and try to print again.

124-709 O [Cause] The number of pages exceeds the number of pages that can be stapled.

[Remedy] Decrease the number of pages, or cancel the stapling settings, then try to print again.

127-210127-211127-212127-213127-220127-221127-311

O [Cause] A malfunction occurred in the machine.[Remedy] Power-cycle the machine. If the machine is not improved


133-700 O [Cause] The staple or punch setting was cancelled.[Remedy] Check the staple position, and try again.

Error CodeCategory


Error Codes

343

Problem Solving

13

Other ErrorsRemedies are described for situations in which the following messages are displayed.

Error Codemessages

CategoryCause and Remedy

C P S M O

A fault has occurred. Switch off the machine. (xxx-yyy)

O O O O O [Cause] An error occurred.[Remedy] Turn off the power, wait until the touch screen goes dark,

and then turn on power again.If the message persists, record the displayed contents for [(xxx-yyy)]. Switch off the machine immediately, wait for the touch screen to go dark, and contact our Customer Support Center.

Completed with an error.(xxx-yyy)

O O O O O [Cause] An error occurred.[Remedy] Retry the same procedure after waiting for a period.

A fault has occurred. The machine has rebooted. Select [Close]. If the problem persists, call for service.(xxx-yyy)

O O O O O [Cause] An auto-recoverable internal error occurred, and the machine restarted automatically.

[Remedy] Select the [Close] button. The machine is operating normally now. If the error persists, call our Call Center.

13 Problem Solving

344

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams

When paper jams inside the machine, the machine stops and an alarm sounds. A message is also displayed on the touch screen. Follow the instructions displayed and remove the jammed paper.Gently remove the paper taking care not to tear it. If paper is torn while it is being removed from the machine, remove all torn pieces making sure that none remain inside the machine.If a paper jam message is displayed again after you have cleared the paper jam, paper is probably jammed at another location. Clear this by following the message.When you have finished clearing a paper jam, printing is automatically resumed from the state before the paper jam occurred.If a paper jam occurred during copying, press the <Start> button. Copying is resumed from the state before the paper jam occurred.

This section describes how to clear paper jams at the following locations:The references are described below.

Paper Jams in the Trays 1 to 2 ..................................................................................................345Paper Jams in the Tray 3 ...........................................................................................................345Paper Jams in the Tray 4 ...........................................................................................................346Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass)............................................................................................346Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) ................................................................................348Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity) ........................................................................350Paper Jams in the Transfer Module...........................................................................................353Paper Jams in the Bottom Left Cover .......................................................................................354Paper Jams in the Bottom Right Cover.....................................................................................355Paper Jams in the Output Tray..................................................................................................357Paper Jams in the C-Finisher or the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker.......................................357Paper jams in the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker .................................................................370

Important • When a paper jam occurs, paper is sometimes torn and remains inside the machine if you pull out a paper tray without checking the paper jam position. This may cause machine malfunctions. Check where the paper jam occurred first.

• If a piece of jammed paper remains inside the machine, the paper jam message will not disappear from the touch screen.

• Clear the paper jams while the machine is on. When the power is turned off, all information stored to the machine's memory will be erased.

• Do not touch components inside the machine. This may cause print defects.

CAUTIONDo not attempt to remove a paper jammed deeply inside the product, particularly a paper wrapped around a fuser or a heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause injuries or burns. Switch off the product promptly and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Paper Jams

345

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams in the Trays 1 to 2The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Trays 1 to 2.

1 Pull out the tray where the paper jam occurred.Important • Paper is sometimes torn and

remains inside the machine if you pull out a tray without checking the paper jam position. This may cause machine malfunction. Check where the paper jam occurred first.

2 Remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any

torn pieces of paper inside the machine.


Paper Jams in the Tray 3The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 3.






13 Problem Solving

346

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams in the Tray 4The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 4.





3 If paper is jammed in the paper feed section, open the inner cover and remove the paper.


Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass)The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 5 (bypass).

1 Open the Tray 5 (bypass) top cover to remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


Paper Jams

347

Problem Solving

13

2 Remove all paper loaded in the Tray 5 (bypass).Important • When two or more sheets of

paper are loaded, remove all of the sheets from the tray.

Note • If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine.

3 Close the top cover.

4 Fan the paper you removed making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned.

5 Insert the paper into the tray with the printing side facing up until its leading edge lightly comes up against the paper feed entrance.Note • Do not load paper exceeding


Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass) when A3+ High Capacity Tray is installed

The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 5 (bypass) when the A3+ High Capacity Tray is installed.

1 Remove the jammed paper and all paper loaded in the Tray 5 (bypass).Important • When two or more sheets of



2 If you cannot remove the paper in Step 1, open the front cover of the High Capacity Tray Unit.

For information on how to clear paper jams inside the High Capacity Tray Unit, refer to "Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)" (P.350).

13 Problem Solving

348

Problem Solving

13

3 If you cannot remove the paper in Steps 1 and 2, open the Tray 5 (bypass) top cover to remove all paper loaded in the Tray 5 (bypass).Note • If paper is torn, check for any


4 Close the top cover.

5 Fan the paper you removed making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned.

6 Insert the paper into the tray with the printing side facing up until its leading edge lightly comes up against the paper feed entrance.Note • Do not load paper exceeding


Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity)The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity).This section describes how to clear paper jams at the following locations:The references are described below.

Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) Exit ........................................................................348Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) Top Cover..............................................................349Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) ................................................................................349

Note • Remedy differs depending on where the paper jam occurs. Follow the instructions displayed and remove the jammed paper.

Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) Exit

1 Gently move the Tray 6 (High Capacity) to the left until it stops by gripping the handle on the top left side of the Tray 6 (High Capacity).



Paper Jams

349

Problem Solving

13

3 Gently put the Tray 6 (High Capacity) back into position.

Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity) Top Cover

1 Gently move the Tray 6 (High Capacity) to the left until it stops by gripping the handle on the top left side of the Tray 6 (High Capacity).

2 Open the Tray 6 (High Capacity) top cover.



4 Close the top cover and gently put the Tray 6 (High Capacity) back into position.

5 Gently put the Tray 6 (High Capacity) back into position.

Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (High Capacity)

1 Pull out the tray towards you until it stops.

1

2

13 Problem Solving

350

Problem Solving

13




Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity).This section describes how to clear paper jams at the following locations:The references are as follows:

Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity) ........................................................................350Paper jams at lever 1a or knob 1c .............................................................................................351Paper jams at lever 1b or knob 1c .............................................................................................351Paper jams at lever 1d or knob 1c .............................................................................................352

Note • Remedy differs depending on where the paper jam occurs. Follow the instructions displayed and remove the jammed paper.

Paper Jams in the Tray 6 (A3+ High Capacity)

1 Pull out the tray towards you until it stops.


torn pieces of paper in the tray.


Paper Jams

351

Problem Solving

13

Paper jams at lever 1a or knob 1c

1 Open the front cover of the High Capacity Tray Unit.

2 Move the lever 1a to the right, and then turn the knob 1c clockwise. Remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any

torn pieces of paper in the unit.

3 Return the lever 1a to the original position.

4 Close the front cover of the A3+ High Capacity Tray Unit.Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the High

Capacity Tray Unit is even slightly open.

Paper jams at lever 1b or knob 1c


13 Problem Solving

352

Problem Solving

13

2 Move the lever 1b to the right, and then turn the knob 1c clockwise. Remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


3 Return the lever 1b to the original position.

4 Close the front cover of the High Capacity Tray Unit.Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the High


Paper jams at lever 1d or knob 1c


2 Move the lever 1d upward and remove the jammed paperNote • If paper is torn, check for any


3 If the paper cannot be removed in Step 2, turn the knob 1c clockwise, and then remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


Paper Jams

353

Problem Solving

13

4 Return the lever 1d to the original position.

5 Close the front cover of the High Capacity Tray Unit.Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the High


Paper Jams in the Transfer ModuleThe following describes how to clear paper jams in the transfer module.


2 Turn the green lever 2 at the center of the transfer module to the right until it is in the horizontal position and then pull the transfer module out to the end.

3 Remove the visible jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


13 Problem Solving

354

Problem Solving

13

4 Remove the jammed paper while opening the lever 2a to the rightward.

5 Pull down the lever 2b and remove the jammed paper.

6 Return the levers 2a and 2b to the original position.

7 Insert the transfer module completely and turn the green lever 2 to the left. Note • If you cannot turn the lever,

pull the transfer module to the middle and insert it again.


slightly open.

Paper Jams in the Bottom Left CoverThe following describes how to clear paper jams in the bottom left cover.

1 If the Tray 6 (High Capacity) is installed, gently move the Tray 6 (High Capacity) to the left until it stops by gripping the handle on the top left side of the Tray 6 (High Capacity).

Paper Jams

355

Problem Solving

13

2 Open the bottom left cover while gripping the release lever.

3 Remove the upper jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


4 Remove the lower jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


5 Close the bottom left cover.Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the bottom left cover is even

slightly open.

6 If the Tray 6 (High Capacity) is installed in the machine, gently put the Tray 6 (High Capacity) back into position.

Paper Jams in the Bottom Right CoverThe following describes how to clear paper jams in the bottom right cover.

1 If the finisher is installed, follow the steps below. If no finisher is installed, go to Step 2.

1) Make sure that the machine is turn off, and then open the front cover of the finisher.

13 Problem Solving

356

Problem Solving

13

2) Pull the lever 1a rightward.

2 Open the bottom right cover while pressing the downward arrow button.

3 Remove the upper jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


4 Remove the lower jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


5 Check whether paper is jammed at the lower part of the machine. If there is jammed paper, remove it.Note • If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine.

6 Close the bottom right cover.Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the bottom right cover is

even slightly open.

7 If the finisher is installed, return the lever 1a to the original position and then close the front cover of the finisher.Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher


Paper Jams

357

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams in the Output TrayThe following describes how to clear paper jams in the output tray.

1 Remove jammed paper from the output tray.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


Paper Jams in the C-Finisher or the C-Finisher with Booklet MakerThe following describes how to clear paper jams in the finisher when the C-Finisher or the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed.This section describes how to clear paper jams at the following locations:The references are described below.

Paper Jams at the Lever 1a....................................................................................................... 357Paper Jams at the Lever 1d and the Wheel 1c.......................................................................... 358Paper Jams at the Levers 1a and 1b.......................................................................................... 359Paper Jams at the Lever 2a....................................................................................................... 361Paper Jams at the Lever 2a (Using the Wheel 2c).................................................................... 362Paper Jams at the Lever 2b....................................................................................................... 363Paper Jams at the Lever 2b (Using the Wheel 2c) ................................................................... 363Paper Jams at the Lever 3......................................................................................................... 365Paper Jams at the Lever 5......................................................................................................... 366Paper Jams at the 4a (for the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker)................................................ 366Paper Jams at the Lever 4b (for the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker) ..................................... 367Paper Jams at the Booklet Tray (for the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker) .............................. 369

The following example shows how to replace the staple cartridge in the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker. The procedure is the same as for the C-Finisher.

Paper Jams at the Lever 1a



13 Problem Solving

358

Problem Solving

13


2 Move the lever 1a to the right.






Paper Jams at the Lever 1d and the Wheel 1c



Paper Jams

359

Problem Solving

13

2) Pull the lever 1a rightward..

2 Move the lever 1d to the left and then move the lever 6 upward.

3 Turn the wheel 1c to the direction indicated by the arrow, and then remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


4 Return the levers 1d and 6 to the original position.



Paper Jams at the Levers 1a and 1b



13 Problem Solving

360

Problem Solving

13





4 If the paper cannot be removed, return the lever 1a and then move the lever 1b to the right.

5 Gently pull out the paper to remove.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


6 Return the levers 1b to the original position.

7 Close the front cover of the finisher.

Paper Jams

361

Problem Solving

13

Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher is even slightly open.

Paper Jams at the Lever 2a

1 If the edge of the jammed paper comes out from the exit of the output tray, gently pull out the paper to remove.

2 Open the front cover of the finisher.







13 Problem Solving

362

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams at the Lever 2a (Using the Wheel 2c)

1 If the edge of the jammed paper comes out from the exit of the output tray, gently pull out the paper to remove.

2 Open the front cover of the finisher.


4 Turn the wheel 2c to the direction indicated by the arrow, and then remove the jammed paper.






Paper Jams

363

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams at the Lever 2b




2 Move the lever 2b to the right and remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any





Paper Jams at the Lever 2b (Using the Wheel 2c)



2b

13 Problem Solving

364

Problem Solving

13


2 Move the lever 2b to the right, and then remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any

torn pieces of paper inside the machin

3 Turn the wheel 2c to the direction indicated by the arrow, and then remove the jammed paper.


torn pieces of paper inside the machin




2b

Paper Jams

365

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams at the Lever 3




2 Pull down the lever 3.


torn pieces of paper inside the machin.

4 Return the lever 3 to the original position.



13 Problem Solving

366

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams at the Lever 5

1 Open the exit cover 5 of the finisher upward.

2 Gently pull out the paper towards you to remove.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


3 Return the exit cover 5 to the original position.

Paper Jams at the 4a (for the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker)




Paper Jams

367

Problem Solving

13

2 Pull out the unit 4.

3 Turn the wheel 4a to the left and remove the jammed paper.

4 Return the unit 4 to the original position.



Paper Jams at the Lever 4b (for the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker)




13 Problem Solving

368

Problem Solving

13

2 Move the lever 4b to the left.

3 Remove the jammed paper if there is.


5 Remove all jammed paper that comes out from the left upper side and inside the unit.Note • If paper is torn, check for any






Paper Jams

369

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams at the Booklet Tray (for the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker)




2 Turn the wheel 4a to the right to eject the jammed paper onto the booklet tray.





13 Problem Solving

370

Problem Solving

13

Paper jams in the D2-Finisher with Booklet MakerThe following describes how to clear paper jams in the finisher when the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed.This section describes how to clear paper jams at the following locations:

Paper Jams in the Tray 8 (Interposer) .......................................................................................370Paper Jams at the Lever 1a and the Knob 1c ............................................................................371Paper Jams at the Lever 1d .......................................................................................................371Paper Jams at the Lever 1b .......................................................................................................372Paper Jams at the Lever 3b and 3d............................................................................................373Paper Jams at the Lever 3e and the Knob 3c ............................................................................373Paper Jams at the Lever 3g and the Knob 3f.............................................................................374Paper Jams at the Lever 4b and the Knob 3a ............................................................................375Paper Jams at the Lever 2a and the Knob 3a when Z Folding Unit is Installed .......................375Paper Jams at the Lever 2b and the Knob 2c when Z Folding Unit is Installed .......................376Paper Jams at the Knob 2c, the Levers 2e/2f and the Tri-fold Output Tray 2d when Z Folding Unit isInstalled.....................................................................................................................................377Paper Jams at the Tri-fold Tray 2d and the Lever 2g when Z Folding Unit is Installed ..........378Paper Jams at the Unit 4 and Knob 4a for the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker .....................378Paper Jams at the Output Tray ..................................................................................................379Paper Jams at the Finisher Tray ................................................................................................379Paper Jams at the Booklet Output Tray for the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker ...................380

The following example shows how to clear paper jams in the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker.

Paper Jams in the Tray 8 (Interposer)The following describes how to clear paper jams in the Tray 8 (Interposer)

1 Press <Cover> button.

2 Open the cover [1e], and then remove the jammed paper and all paper loaded in the Interposer.Important • When two or more sheets of



3 Fan the paper you removed making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned, and then load them again.

Paper Jams

371

Problem Solving

13

4 Push the cover [1e] until you hear it click into place and the close it.Note • A message will be displayed

and the machine will not operate if the cover is even slightly open.

Paper Jams at the Lever 1a and the Knob 1c

1 Make sure that the machine has stopped before opening the left cover of the finisher.

2 Move the lever 1a downwards and turn the knob 1c anti-clockwise. Remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any



4 Close the finisher left cover. Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher


Paper Jams at the Lever 1d


13 Problem Solving

372

Problem Solving

13

2 Move the lever 1d upwards and remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


3 Return the lever 1d to the original position.



Paper Jams at the Lever 1b


2 Move the lever 1b rightwards and remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any





Paper Jams

373

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams at the Lever 3b and 3d

1 Make sure that the machine has stopped before opening the right cover of the finisher.

2 Move the levers 3b and 3d, and remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


3 Return the lever 3b and 3d to the original position.

4 Close the finisher right cover. Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher


Paper Jams at the Lever 3e and the Knob 3c


2 Move the levers 3e and turn the knob 3c to the right. Remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


13 Problem Solving

374

Problem Solving

13

3 Return the lever 3e to the original position.



Paper Jams at the Lever 3g and the Knob 3f


2 Move the levers 3g and turn the knob 3f to the left. Remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


3 Return the lever 3g to the original position.



Paper Jams

375

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams at the Lever 4b and the Knob 3a


2 Move the levers 4b and turn the knob 3a to the right. Remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any





Paper Jams at the Lever 2a and the Knob 3a when Z Folding Unit is Installed


2 Move the lever 2a and turn the knob 3a to the left. Remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


13 Problem Solving

376

Problem Solving

13




Paper Jams at the Lever 2b and the Knob 2c when Z Folding Unit is Installed


2 Move the levers 2b and turn the knob 3a to the right. Remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any





Paper Jams

377

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams at the Knob 2c, the Levers 2e/2f and the Tri-fold Output Tray 2d when Z Folding Unit is Installed


2 Pull out the tri-fold output tray 2d, swing the lever 2e, and remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


3 If you cannot remove the paper in Step 2, return the lever 2e to the original position. Swing the lever 2e, turn the knob 2c to the right, then remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


4 Swing back the opened lever (2f or 2e), and push back the tri-fold output tray 2d.



13 Problem Solving

378

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams at the Tri-fold Tray 2d and the Lever 2g when Z Folding Unit is Installed


2 Pull out the tri-fold output tray 2d, swing the lever 2g, and remove the jammed paper.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


3 Return the lever 2g to the original position and push back the tri-fold output tray 2d.



Paper Jams at the Unit 4 and Knob 4a for the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker



Paper Jams

379

Problem Solving

13

3 Turn the knob 4a to the left to remove all the jammed paper from the left side of the unit 4.Note • If paper is torn, check for any





Paper Jams at the Output Tray

1 Remove jammed paper from the output tray. Note • If paper is torn, check for any


2 Open and close the right cover of the finisher. Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher


Paper Jams at the Finisher Tray

1 Remove jammed paper from the finisher tray. Note • If paper is torn, check for any


2 Open and close the right cover of the finisher. Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher


13 Problem Solving

380

Problem Solving

13

Paper Jams at the Booklet Output Tray for the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker


2 Turn the knob 4a to the right to remove the jammed paper at the booklet output tray.Note • If paper is torn, check for any


3 Close the finisher right cover. • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher


Document Jams

381

Problem Solving

13

Document Jams

If a document jams in the document feeder, the machine stops, and an error message is displayed on the screen. Clear the document jam according to the instructions displayed, and then load the document again on the document feeder.This section describes how to clear document jams at the following locations:

Document Jams at the covers ................................................................................................... 381Document Jams at the Document Cover .................................................................................. 383

Note • Remedy differs depending on where the document jam occurs. Follow the instructions displayed and remove the jammed paper.

Document Jams at the covers

1 Grip the handle of the top cover of the document feeder, and open the top cover until it comes to a stop.Note • When you fully open the

cover, it enters a fixed position. Open the cover gently.

2 Open the left cover until it comes to a stop.

3 If the document is not caught in the entry of the document feeder, pull out the document.

4 If there are instructions to open the inner cover in the message, lift up the lever with the green label on it, and open the inner cover (1). Remove the jammed document (2).Important • If the document is stuck, do

not pull on it directly. The document could be damaged.

13 Problem Solving

382

Problem Solving

13

5 If the message indicates paper jam inside of the left cover, open the cover and remove the jammed document.

6 Close the top cover of the inner cover until you hear it click into place.

7 Close the left cover of the document feeder until you hear it click into place.

8 If the document cannot be found, pick up the document feeder slowly, and remove the document if it is there, then close the document feeder.

9 If the document is not found in Step 8, then pick up the document feeder tray and remove the document.

10 Gently return the document feeder tray.

11 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled or folded, and load the documentagain following the instructions displayed on the screen.Note • After removing the jammed document, load the entire document again, including the purged

document sheets. Already scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped, and scanning will resume from the unscanned document sheet.

• Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.

Document Jams

383

Problem Solving

13

Document Jams at the Document Cover


2 Open the belt of the document cover while gripping the lever, and remove the jammed document.

3 Gently return the belt to the original position.

4 Return the document cover to the original position.

5 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled or folded, and load the document again following the instructions displayed on the screen.Note • After removing the jammed document, load the entire document again, including the purged

document sheets. Already scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped, and scanning will resume from the unscanned document sheet.

• Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.

13 Problem Solving

384

Problem Solving

13

Stapler Faults

The following describes stapler troubles when the finisher (optional) is installed.Follow the procedures on the following pages when copies are not stapled or staples are bent. Contact our Customer Support Center if the problem persists after you have tried the following solutions.

If staples are stapled on the copies in the manner shown in the figures below, contact our Customer Support Center.

Important • If paper that has a weight of 90 g/m2 or more is to be stapled using the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker, a staple may be bent for even a stack of 100 sheets or less, or a staple may be bent and jam inside the machine, causing paper jams.

• Remove the bent staple when opening the staple cartridge cover. If you do not remove the bent staple, a staple jam may occur as a result. Use the staple cartridge cover only when removing the bent staple.

Unstapled Bent staple

One side of staple rising up Staple bent in reverse direction

Flattened staple Entire staple rising up

Staple rising up withcenter pressed in

Stapler Faults

385

Problem Solving

13

Staple Jams in the Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker

The following describes how to clear staple jams in the staple cartridge when the C-Finisher or the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed.The following example shows how to replace the staple cartridge in the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker. The procedure is the same as for the C-Finisher.


2 Grip the lever R1 of the staple cartridge holder, and pull out the holder to the right towards you.

3 Remove the staple cartridge holder by gripping the orange lever.Note • The staple cartridge is firmly

held. When remove the staple cartridge, strongly pull the cartridge.

4 After removing the staple cartridge, check the inside of the finisher for any remaining staples.

13 Problem Solving

386

Problem Solving

13

5 Pull up the metal part of the staple cartridge shown in the figure.

6 Remove the jammed staples (1), and return the metal part pulled up in Step 5 to the original position (2).

7 Insert the staple cartridge while gripping the orange lever until you hear it click into place.



If the staples cannot be removed after carrying out the above procedures, contact our Customer Support Center.

Staple Jams in the Booklet Staple Cartridge for C-Finisher with Booklet Maker or D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker

The following describes how to clear staple jams in the booklet staple cartridge when the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker or the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed.The following example shows how to clear paper jams in the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker. The procedure is the same as for the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker.

CAUTIONBe careful in removing jammed staples.


Stapler Faults

387

Problem Solving

13


2 Press the levers R2 and R3 to the right (1), and pull out the unit (2).

3 Hold the tabs of the booklet staple cartridge, and then lift to remove it.

4 Remove the jammed staples as shown in the figure.

5 Holding the tabs of the removed booklet staple cartridge, return the cartridge to the original position and gently push it until you hear it click into place.


R2

R3

13 Problem Solving

388

Problem Solving

13

6 Return the unit to its original position.




Staple Jams in the Staple Cartridge for D2-Finisher with Booklet MakerThe following describes how to clear staple jams in the staple cartridge when the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed.The following example shows how to clear paper jams in the D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker.


2 Hold the R1 at the position shown in the diagram.


Stapler Faults

389

Problem Solving

13

3 Pull out the unit. Note • After removing the unit, check

the inside of the finisher for any remaining staples.

4 Open the unit as shown in the diagram and remove the jammed staple.

5 Push the removed unit back to the original position.

6 Close the right cover of the finisher.Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher



13 Problem Solving

390

Problem Solving

13

Staple Cartridge Taken Off from Unit for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker

The following describes how to set the staple cartridge to its unit when it has been attached incorrectly or taken off from its unit accidentally.

1 Open the staple cartridge cover as shown in the diagram, and remove the jammed staple.

2 See a lever on the rear side of the unit.

3 Move the lever in the direction of the arrow shown in the diagram. Important • Be careful when removing

jammed staples to avoid hurting your fingers and nails.

4 Turn the unit upside holding the lever, and then take off the staple cartridge from its unit.


Staple Cartridge Taken Off from Unit for D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker

391

Problem Solving

13

5 Tear the outside staples along the line as shown in the diagram.Important • Be careful when removing

jammed staples to avoid hurting your fingers.

6 Push the staple cartridge in the unit.

7 Return the unit to the original position.

8 Close the right cover of the finisher.Note • A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover of the finisher


13 Problem Solving

392

Problem Solving

13

Solving Curled Output

You can correct the curling of the output by pressing the De-curl button.The De-curl button functions both in suspension and in operation if the power of the machine is on.Note • To change the curling correction mode while the machine is in operation, press the De-curl

button and then the change will be applied immediately.• Pressing the Reset button on the control panel cannot change the curling correction mode.

1 Check how the output copy is curled.

2 Check that De-curl lights up.Note • When turning on the power of

this machine, the de-curl mode is set to Auto.

• When you cancel the Power Saver Mode, the de-curl mode will be set to Auto.

3 Press De-curl.

Note • Pressing the De-curl button toggles the mode between Auto, ON, and OFF.For more information, refer to "De-curl button" (P.38).

14 Appendix

This chapter describes the specifications, printable area, optional accessories list, and cautions/restrictions.

Specifications............................................................................................394

Printable Area ...........................................................................................402

List of Options...........................................................................................403

Notes and Restrictions..............................................................................404

14 Appendix

394

Appendix

14

Specifications

This section lists the specifications of the DocuColor 6075II/5065II. In the interests of product development, product specifications and external appearance are subject to change without prior notice.

Main Unit and Copier Specifications

Type Console Type

Color support Full color

Scan resolution 600 x 600 dpi (23.6 x 23.6 dots/mm)

Output resolution 2,400 x 2,400 dpi (94.5 x 94.5 dots/mm)

Color graduation 256 color graduation for each color (16,700,000 colors).

Warm-up time 150 seconds or less (when the room temperature at 20 oC, input voltage 220 V)Important • It may take longer due to the network condition, or the

image quality adjustment according to the machine condition.

Copy document The maximum size is 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17”) for both sheets and books.

Copy (sheet) size Maximum: A3, 330 x 488 mm (13 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2”).Minimum: A5 (Postcards for the Tray 5 (bypass))Image loss width: First 4mm or less, last 4 mm or less, and top/

front 3mm or less.

[Tray 1 - 2]A5, A4, A4 , A3B5, B5 , B48.5 x 11", 8.5 x 11” , 8.5 x 13”, 8.5 x 14”, 11 x 17”, 16KNon-standard size: X (horizontal) 140 to 297mm Y (vertical) 182 to 432 mm

[[Tray 3 - 4]A4 , 8.5 x 11” , B5

[Tray 5 (Bypass)]A6, A5, A4, A4 , A3, SRA3B6, B5, B5 , B48.5 x 11", 8.5 x 11" , 8.5 x 13”, 8.5 x 14”, 11 x 17”, 12 x 18”, 13 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2”Postcards, return postcards, tab paper (A4 ), tab paper (8.5 x 11” )non-standard size: X from 100 to 330 mm, Y from 148 to 488 mm

Copy paper Paper Tray 1 - 4: 64 - 220 g/m2

Paper Tray 5 (Bypass): 64 - 300 g/m2

Important • It is recommend using Xerox recommended papers. Copying may not be performed correctly depending on the deployment conditions.

Specifications

395

Appendix

14

Fast copy time <DocuColor 6075II>Document glass:

For A4 /monochrome priority mode(the default for the [Color Mode] is [Black] or [No Default])Monochrome: 4.1 secondsColor: 12.0 secondsFor A4 /color priority mode(the default for the [Output Color] is [Full Color], [Auto], [DualColors], or [Single Color])Monochrome: 8.6 secondsColor: 10.3 seconds

Duplex automatic document feeder:For A4 /monochrome priority mode(the default for the [Color Mode] is [Black] or [No Default])Monochrome: 6.0 secondsColor: 12.9 secondsFor A4 /color priority mode(the default for the [Output Color] is [Full Color], [Auto], [DualColors], or [Single Color])Monochrome: 10.3 secondsColor: 11.3 seconds

Same magnification, from the Tray 1, single sided, and output to the output tray.

<DocuColor 5065II>Document glass:

For A4 /monochrome priority mode(the default for the [Color Mode] is [Black] or [No Default])Monochrome: 4.1 secondsColor: 9.1 secondsFor A4 /color priority mode(the default for the [Output Color] is [Full Color], [Auto], [DualColors], or [Single Color])Monochrome: 7.1 secondsColor: 7.8 seconds

Duplex automatic document feeder:For A4 /monochrome priority mode(the default for the [Color Mode] is [Black] or [No Default])Monochrome: 6.0 secondsColor: 11.4 secondsFor A4 /color priority mode(the default for the [Output Color] is [Full Color], [Auto], [DualColors], or [Single Color])Monochrome: 8.8 secondsColor: 10.1 seconds

Same magnification, from the Tray 1, single sided, and output to the output tray.

Copy reduction/enlargement ratio

Same magnification 1:1± 0.7%

Fixed reduction/enlargement ratios 1:0.500, 1:0.707, 1:0.816, 1:0.866, 1:1.154, 1:1.225, and 1:1.414

Custom reduction/enlargement ratios 1:0.25 - 1:4.00 (1% increments)

14 Appendix

396

Appendix

14

Continuous copy speed

ImportantThe speed may be reduced in order to adjust the image quality.The performance may be reduced depending on the paper type.After delivering the first page, the copy speed for remaining pages becomes the same speed as 1 sided copying.

<DocuColor 6075II>Paper Tray 1 - 4: Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification

[Monochrome] [Color]B5 , A4 : 75 pages/min. 60 pages/min.B5, A4 : 54 pages/min. 44 pages/min.B4 : 44 pages/min. 36 pages/min.A3 : 37 pages/min. 30 pages/min.Paper Tray 1 - 4: Continuous 2 sided copy/same magnification

[Monochrome] [Color]B5 , A4 : 75 pages/min. 54 pages/min.B5, A4 : 50 pages/min. 43 pages/min.B4 : 44 pages/min. 36 pages/min.A3 : 37 pages/min. 30 pages/min.Paper Tray 5*: Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification


[Monochrome] [Color]B5 , A4 : 50 pages/min. 46 pages/min.B5, A4 : 41 pages/min. 37 pages/min.B4 : 36 pages/min. 32 pages/min.A3 : 32 pages/min. 28 pages/min.

<DocuColor 5065II>Paper Tray 1 - 4: Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification

[Monochrome] [Color]B5 , A4 : 65 pages/min. 50 pages/min.B5, A4 : 47 pages/min. 36 pages/min.B4 : 39 pages/min. 30 pages/min.A3 : 33 pages/min. 25 pages/min.Paper Tray 1 - 4: Continuous 2 sided copy/same magnification



[Monochrome] [Color]B5 , A4 : 44 pages/min. 40 pages/min.B5, A4 : 36 pages/min. 32 pages/min.B4 : 31 pages/min. 28 pages/min.A3 : 28 pages/min. 24 pages/min.

* When feeding from paper Tray 5 (bypass tray) and the paper size is set to [Auto Size Detect], the printing speed for the first page will be slower.

Specifications

397

Appendix

14

Print Feature Specifications

Feeding method/Paper capacity

Standard : 560 sheets x 2 trays + 980 sheets + 1,280 sheets + 250 sheets (bypass tray)

Optional : 2,300 sheets (Tray 6 (high capacity)) 2,300 sheets (Tray 6 (A3+ high capacity))

Maximum paper capacity: 5,930 sheets (standard + Tray 6 (high capacity))

Important • When using Xerox P paper

Continuous copy pages 9999 sheetsImportant • The machine may pause temporarily to perform an image

stabilization process.

Output tray capacity Output tray: approximately 500 sheets (A4)Finisher tray (optional): approximately 500 sheets (A4)Important • When using Xerox P paper

Power source <DocuColor 6075II>220 - 240V, 15A

<DocuColor 5065II>220 - 240V, 10A

Maximum power consumption

<DocuColor 6075II>Maximum Power 3.3 KW or lessTEC (Typical Energy Consumption) 18.52kWh/week

<DocuColor 5065II>Maximum Power 2.2 KW or lessTEC (Typical Energy Consumption) 17.23kWh/week

Dimensions Width 1011.0 x Depth 915.0 x Height 1,370.0 mm

Weight(excluding papers and options)

259 kgImportant • The weight is with a new toner cartridge without any

papers.

Minimum Space Requirements

Width 1,574.0 x Depth 915.0 mm (when the bypass tray is extended to the maximum).

Type Bustle type

Continuous printing speed

The same as the main body.Important • The speed is reduced due to the image quality adjustment

when High Image Quality is specified in a PostScript driver or PCL driver.

• The performance may be reduced depending on the paper type.

Resolution Output resolution: 2,400 x 2,400 dpi (94.5 x 94.5 dots/mm)Data processing resolution:

1,200 x 1,200 dpi (47.2 x 47.2 dots/mm: monochrome)600 x 600 dpi (23.6 x 23.6 dots/mm)

Page description language

PCLPostScript3

Supported protocols Ethernet :TCP/IP(SMB, LPD, Port9100, IPP), IPX/SPX (NetWare), Ether Talk*

Important • For Ether Talk, MacOS 9.1 - Mac OS 9.2.2, and Mac OS X 10.2.4 - 10.3.3 are supported.

14 Appendix

398

Appendix

14

Scan Feature Specifications

Document Feeder Specifications

High Capacity Paper Tray Specifications

Supported operating systems

PCL : Windows 2000/XP English versionsWindows Server 2003 English versions

PostScript : Windows 2000/XP English versionsWindows Server 2003 English versionsMac OS 9.1 - Mac OS 9.2.2 English versionMac OS X 10.2.4 - 10.3.4 English versions

Built-in fonts PCL : European 81 type faces, symbol 35 setsPostScript : European 136 type faces

Emulation PCL6c

Memory capacity 1 GB (512 MB x 2)

Interface Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T(Auto))

Type Color scanner

Scan Size The maximum size is 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17”) for both sheets and books.

Scan resolution 600 x 600dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 200 x 200dpi(23.6 x 23.6, 15.7 x 15.7, 11.8 x 11.8, 7.9 x 7.9 dots/mm)

Scan graduation 10 bits input for each RGB colors, 8 bits output

Document scanning speed

Monochrome, 1 sided: 100 pages/min.Color, 1 sided : 50 pages/min.Monochrome, 2 sided: 57 pages/min.

Note • The scanning speed varies by documents and resolutions. Scanto Mailbox for A4 (Xerox standard document) documents with200 dpi.

Interface Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T(Auto)

Original size/type Maximum: A3, 11 x 17” (297 x 432 mm)Minimum: A5, A5 , 5.5 x 8.5”, 5.5 x 8.5” (139.7 x 210 mm)38 - 200 g/m2 (2-sided Simultaneous Scan: 50 - 128 g/m2)

Number of originals held 250Important • When using Xerox P paper

Original changing speed <DocuColor 6075II>Monochrome: 75 sheets/min. (A4 1 sided)Color : 50 sheets/min. (A4 1 sided)<DocuColor 5065II>Monochrome: 65 sheets/min. (A4 1 sided)Color : 50 sheets/min. (A4 1 sided)

Copy (sheet) size/type A4, 8.5 x 11” , B564 - 176 g/m2

Feeding stage number/paper capacity

2,300 sheets x 1 stageImportant • When using Xerox P paper

Dimensions/weight Width 389.0 x Depth 610 .0 x Height 377.0 mm, 29 kgImportant • The weight does not include any papers.

Specifications

399

Appendix

14

A3+ High Capacity Paper Tray Specifications

C-Finisher Specifications

C-Finisher with Booklet Maker Specifications

Floor space when connected to the main body

Width 1574.0 x Depth 915.0 mm (for the main body with the high capacity paper tray, the output tray, and the bypass tray extended to the maximum.)

Copy (sheet) size/type Maximum:13 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2” , Minimum:B564 - 300 g/m2

Feeding stage number/paper capacity

2,300 sheets x 1 stageImportant • When using Xerox P paper

Dimensions/weight Width 988.0 x Depth 785 .0* x Height 930.0 mm, 120 kgImportant • The weight does not include any paper.* When loading paper of 13 x 18" or 13 x 19", the depth will be 801

mm.


Width 2045.0 x Depth 915.0 mm (for the main body with the high capacity paper tray, the output tray, and the bypass tray extended to the maximum.)

Tray type Output tray x 1: Collated/Uncollated (offset available)Finisher tray x 1: Collated/Uncollated (offset available)

Paper size/supported papers

Output tray Max.: 13 x 19, Min.: Postcards, 64 - 280 g/m2

Finisher tray Max.: 12 x 18, Min.: B5 , 64 - 176 g/m2

Tray capacity Output tray : 500 sheetsFinisher tray : paper (width < 216 mm): 3,000 sheets

paper (width > 216 mm): 1,500 sheetsmixed size*: 300 sheets

* When larger size papers are loaded on smaller size papers.Important • When using Xerox P paper

Staple Maximum staple pages: 50 sheets (not over 90 g/m2, not over 5.7 mm in thickness)

Size suitable for stapling:Max. : A3, 11 x 17”, Min. : B5Staple position: 1 place (front: angled, back: parallel,

angled),2 places (parallel)

Important • When using Xerox P paper

Punching Size suitable for punching: Max. : A3, 11 x 17”, Min. : B5Number of punching holes:2 or 4, 3 (optional)

Dimensions/weight Width 772 x Depth 650 x Height 1,010 mm, 55 kg(863 mm width and 1065 height when the extension flap is extended)


Width 2,038 x Depth 915 mm(for the main body with the C-Finisher, the extension flap extended, and the bypass tray extended to the maximum.)

Tray type Output tray x 1 : Collated/Uncollated (offset available)Finisher tray x 1: Collated/Uncollated (offset available)Booklet tray x 1

14 Appendix

400

Appendix

14

D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker Specifications

Paper size/supported papers

Output tray Maximum: 13 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2” Minimum: Postcards, 64 - 300 g/m2

Finisher tray Maximum: 3 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2”Minimum: B5 , 64 - 176 g/m2

Booklet tray Maximum: 13 x 18” Minimum: 8.5 x 11”, 64 - 90 g/m2

Tray capacity Output tray : 500 pagesFinisher tray : 1,500 sheets, Mixed size*: 300 sheetsBooklet tray : 20 sets* When larger size papers are loaded on smaller size papers.Important • When using Xerox P paper

Staple Maximum staple pages: 50 sheets (not over 90 g/m2, not over 5.7 mm in thickness)

Size suitable for stapling:Max. : A3, 11 x 17”, Min. : B5Staple position: 1 place (front: angled, back: parallel,

angled),2 places (parallel)

Staple for booklet : 15 sheetsImportant • When using Xerox P paper

Punching Size suitable for punching: Max. : A3, 11 x 17”, Min. : B5Number of punching holes:2 or 4, 3 (optional)Paper type : 64 - 176 g/m2

Power source/Maximum Power consumption

110 - 120V AC & 220 - 240V AC / 203 W

Dimensions/weight Width 921 x Depth 650 x Height 1,010 mm, 86 kg(1,065 mm height when the extension flap is extended)


Width 2,096 x Depth 915 mm(for the main body with the C-Finisher, the extension flap extended, and the bypass tray extended to the maximum.)

Tray type Top tray × 1 : Collate / Stack Finisher tray × 1: Collate (offset stacking available)/

Stack (offset stacking available)Booklet tray × 1

Paper size/Supported paper

Top tray Maximum: 13 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2” Minimum: A6 (postcards), 64 - 300 g/m2

Finisher tray Maximum: 13 x 19”, 12.6 x 19.2”Minimum: B5 , 64 - 300 g/m2

Booklet tray Maximum: 13 x 18” Minimum: A4, 8.5 x 11”, 64 - 90 g/m2

Important • A paper for cover is available 220 g/m2 or less.• Paper for contents is available 60 -80 g/m2, when a paper

91 - 200 g/m2 is used for a cover attached.

Tray capacity Top tray : 500 sheetsFinisher tray : 2,000 sheets, 200 sets*

* When using A4 , B5 , 8.5 × 11" only. When using other size, tray capacity is 1,500 sheets, 100 sets.

Booklet tray :20 sets*

Important • Some papers may not be placed into tray depending on the paper type.

Specifications

401

Appendix

14

Staple Maximum stapled sheets: 100 sheets (when using 64 - 90 g/m2

paper)Important • When using paper over A4, or 8.5 × 11", maximum stapled

sheets is 65 sheets.• Depending on the type of paper that is being stapled, the

stapled nails may be bent.Paper size : Maximum: A3, 11 × 17",

Minimum: B5Stapling position : 1 place (front : angled stapling, center :

parallel stapling, back : parallel stapling, angled stapling*)

: 2 places (parallel stapling)* angled stapling for A3 and A4

Punching Size suitable for punching : Maximum: A3, 11×17": Minimum: B5 (2 holes), A4 (4 holes)

Number of punching holes: 2 or 4, 3 (optional)Paper type : 64 - 176 g/m2

Center binding/folding Maximum number of sheets:center binding: 15 sheetscenter folding : 5 sheets

Important • When using Xerox P paper• When a cover is attached, maximum number of sheets is 14

sheets.• Maximum staple-enabled number of paper can be changed

because of customer engineer setting.Paper size:Maximum: 13 x 18", Minimum: A4, 8.5 × 11"Paper type: center binding: 64 - 90 g /m2

center folding : 64 - 90 g /m2

Important • A paper for cover is available 220 g/m2 or less.• Paper for contents is available 64 -80 g/m2 , when a paper

91 - 220 g/m2 is used for a cover attached.• Uneven page alignment may occur depending on some

condition such as paper type being used.

Holding(when folding unit D2 is installed)

<Z-Fold>Paper size : A3, B4, 11 × 17"Paper type : 64 - 90 g/m2

<Tri-Fold>Paper size : A4, 8.5 × 11"Paper type : 64 - 90 g/m2

Interposer Paper size : Maximum: A3, 11 × 17", Minimum: B5

Important • You cannot copy on the paper loaded in interposer.Capacity : 200 sheetsImportant • When using Xerox P paperPaper type : 64 - 220 g/m2

Power source/Maximum Power consumption

110 - 120V AC & 220 - 240V AC / 203 W

Dimensions/Weight Width 1,050 × Depth 725 × Height 1,165 mm, 130 kgWhen folding unit D2 is installed : Width 1,250 × Depth 725 × Height 1,165 mm, 170 kgNote • This weight includes staple cartridge.


Width 2225.0 x depth 915.0 mm (for the main body with the high capacity paper tray, the output tray, and the bypass tray extended to the maximum.)

14 Appendix

402

Appendix

14

Printable Area

The standard area that can be printed leaves a margin of 4.0mm on all four edges of the paper (for 13 x 18”(330 mm width), a margin of 3.5mm left and right). Note that the actual printing area may vary depending on the printer (plotter) control language.For printing,the maximum printable area is 323 x 480 mm (print assured area becomes 317 x 480 mm). For copying, the maximum printable are is 297 x 432 mm (print assured area: 297 x 432 mm).Depending on the paper size, however, the unprintable area is different..

When the paper width is 12.6 inches (320 mm width)

When the paper width is 330mm (320 mm width)

Printing

4mm

3mm

4mm

3mm

4mm

4mm

3.5mm3.5mm

6.5mm6.5mm

Copying

4mm

3mm

4mm

3mm

4mm

16.5mm

52mm

16.5mm

List of Options

403

Appendix

14

List of Options

The following are the principal options available. To purchase these, contact our Customer Support Center.

Note • The products are liable to change.• For the latest information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Product name Description

Offset stacking module This unit allows to eject paper with an offset.

C-Finisher This unit allows to staple or punch printed documents or copies.

C-Finisher with Booklet Maker

This unit allows to staple or punch printed documents or copies. Features for folding documents in half, and stapling the folded documents are also available.

D2-Finisher with Booklet Maker

Staples or hole-punches output. It also folds output in half or staples folded output.Interposer is installed for loading paper to be used as separators and covers.

High capacity paper tray This tray allows to load 2,300 sheets of paper (When using Xerox P paper).

A3+ High capacity paper tray

This tray allows to load 2,300 sheets of paper (When using Xerox P paper).

14 Appendix

404

Appendix

14

Notes and Restrictions

This section describes notes and restrictions on the use of the machine.

Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine

Installing and Moving the Machine

When moving the machine from its rack, contact our Customer Support Center.

When moving the machine, do not subject the unit to shocks.

When closing the document cover, be careful not to trap your fingers.

Do not place things close to the ventilation opening of the extractor fan of themachine.

Meter Counts for 2-sided PrintingFor 2-sided printing, depending on the application being used and the way in whichthe number of copies is specified, blank pages may be inserted automatically. In thiscase, the blank page inserted by the application is counted for metering purposes.

Notes and Restrictions on Interrupting JobWhen interrupting, some jobs such as print jobs set by a client cannot be executed. The following are the jobs that can/cannot be executed while interrupting.

O Can be executed while interruptingX Cannot be executed while interrupting

Receives a job from a client or other machine, however cannot be executed while interrupting*1 Operation on the control panel is necessary to execute a job

Job Control Panel*1 Execution

Copy Yes O

Print Print jobs set by a client. No X

Scan Network scanning Yes O

Report Auto print of job reports No O

Manual print of job reports Yes O

Index

405

Index

Symbols

<All Services> button ................................................. 45<C> (Clear) button...................................................... 46<Clear All> ................................................................... 46<Confirmation> indicator ........................................... 35<Custom> button ........................................................ 45<Dial Pause> button................................................... 46<Interrupt> button/indicator....................................... 46<Job in Memory> indicator................................46, 315<Job Status> button ................................................... 46<Log In/Out> button ................................................... 46<Machine Status> button .......................................... 46<Online> indicator ...................................................... 46<Power saver> button................................................ 46<Review> button......................................................... 46<Speed Dial> button .................................................. 46<Start> button ............................................................. 46<Stop> button.............................................................. 46

Numerics

2 Sided Book Copy..................................................... 822 Sided Copying ......................................................... 912 Sided Copying (System Settings)....................... 2282 Sided Originals ..............................................136, 1412 Sided Report (System Settings) ......................... 214

A

A3+ High Capacity Tray (Tray 6) ............................. 36Account Limit (System Settings) ............................ 254adding stamp/date/page number to copies .......... 103Adjust Image Position (System Settings) ............. 216adjusting color balance .............................................. 78adjusting color tone .................................................... 78adjusting the copy density......................................... 73adjusting the scan density and contrast................ 138Alert Tone (System Settings).................................. 199All Services (System Settings) ............................... 201All Services - Additional Features (System Settings) ..................................................... 202Annotation.................................................................. 103Annotation - Create Stamps (System Settings)... 239

attaching a cover to copies .......................................97Audio Tones (System Settings) ..............................198Auditron Mode (System Settings) ..........................259authenticated users ..................................................282authentication and auditron administration...281, 284Auto Clear (System Settings) .................................196Auto Clear Alert Tone (System Settings) ..............199Auto Display of Login Screen (System Settings).201Auto Job Promotion (System Settings) .................217Auto Job Release (System Settings).....................196Auto Paper Off (System Settings)..........................232Auto Paper Select (System Settings) ....................205Auto Power Saver/Energy Saver (System Settings) .....................................................197Auto Size Detect .......................................................143Auto Tray Switching (System Settings).................209

B

Background Pattern (System Settings) .................217Background Suppression (System Settings).............................................................................212, 227Background Suppression Level (System Settings) .....................................................245Background Suppression Level (Text) (System Settings) .....................................................233Background Suppress Level (Photo & Text) (System Settings) .....................................................232Base Tone (System Settings) .................................198Basic Scanning .........................................................135Bates Stamping (System Settings) ........................236Bates Stamping - Number of Digits (System Settings) .....................................................230Bates Stamping - Position (Side 1) (System Settings) .....................................................230Bates Stamping - Position (Side 2) (System Settings) .....................................................230Bates Stamping - Size (System Settings).............230Billing Meter ...............................................................272Billing Meter/Print Report.........................................272Book Copying ..............................................................80Booklet Creation .........................................................94Booklet Creation - Covers Tray (System Settings)

Index

406

Index

..................................................................................... 231booklet output tray...................................................... 38booklet output tray button ......................................... 38booklet staple cartridge ............................................. 37booklet tray .................................................................. 37booklet unit .................................................................. 37Book Sacnning.......................................................... 142Book Scanning.......................................................... 142bottom left cover ......................................................... 33bottom right cover....................................................... 35Brightness dial ............................................................ 46Build Job .................................................................... 119built-in fonts ............................................................... 398

C

Calculator % ................................................................ 65calibration .................................................................. 310Calibration (System Settings)................................. 212calling stored programs ........................................... 156Center Erase/Binding Erase (System Settings)............................................................................. 228, 242change the paper size ............................................. 173checking completed jobs......................................... 264checking current/pending jobs ............................... 263checking paper tray status ...................................... 271checking the finished output of the copy .............. 122circuit breaker .................................................35, 36, 40cleaning the machine............................................... 307Color (System Settings) .......................................... 217Color Balance ............................................................. 78Color Balance - Black (System Settings) ............. 228Color Balance - Cyan (System Settings) .............. 228Color Balance - Magenta (System Settings)........ 227Color Effects................................................................ 77color graduation ........................................................ 394Color Shift .................................................................... 78Color Shift (System Settings) ................................. 228Color Space (System Settings) .............................. 245color support ............................................................. 394Combine Original Sets............................................. 123Common Settings..................................................... 194continuous copy pages............................................ 397continuous copy speed............................................ 396continuous printing speed ....................................... 397Contrast ............................................................... 77, 138

Contrast (System Settings) ..................................... 227control panel ................................................................ 33Control Panel Alert Tone (System Settings) ........ 198Control Panel Select Tone (System Settings) ..... 198Copies .......................................................................... 92copy (sheet) size....................................................... 394copy (sheet) size/type ......................................398, 399Copy Control (System Settings)............................. 231Copy Defaults (System Settings) ........................... 226copy document.......................................................... 394copying facing pages onto separate sheets........... 80copying multiple sheets onto one sheet................ 100copying on tab paper ............................................... 113Copy Job Complete Tone (System Settings)....... 198Copy Mode Settings................................................. 276Copy Mode Settings (System Settings) ................ 224Copy Output .............................................................. 116Copy Output (System Settings).............................. 229copy paper ................................................................. 394copy reduction/enlargement ratio........................... 395Covers .......................................................................... 97Covers - Back Cover Tray (System Settings) ...... 231Covers - Front Cover Tray (System Settings)...... 231Create/Check User Accounts (System Settings). 253creating a booklet ....................................................... 94cryptographic software............................................... 24Custom Button 1 to 3 (System Settings)............... 201Custom Colors (System Settings).......................... 238Customize Paper Supply Screen (System Settings) ..................................................... 206Custom Paper Name (System Settings)............... 203Custom Text 1 to 3 (System Settings) .................. 217

D

Data Encryption (System Settings)........................ 222data processing resolution ...................................... 397Date (System Settings)............................................ 195Date Format (System Settings) .............................. 216Date Position (Side 1) (System Settings) ............. 230Date Position (Side 2) (System Settings) ............. 230Date Position (System Settings) ............................ 234Date Size (System Settings)................................... 230Daylight Savings (System Settings) ...................... 198De-curl button.............................................................. 38Default Print Paper Size (System Settings) ......... 218

Index

407

Index

Delete All Data (System Settings) ......................... 216Delete Outside/Delete Inside .................................. 124deleting outside or inside of the selected area when copying ............................................................ 124deleting stored programs......................................... 154Density (System Settings)....................................... 217dimensions................................................................. 397dimensions/weight ....................................398, 399, 400direct authentication ................................................. 282Display Consumables Screen (System Settings)..................................................................................... 221document feeder.................................................56, 128document feeder tray ................................................. 35Document Feeder Tray Elevation (System Settings) ..................................................... 223document glass.............................................33, 57, 129document guides ........................................................ 35document jams.......................................................... 381document output tray ................................................. 35document scanning speed ...................................... 398document size/type .................................................. 398document stopper....................................................... 35drum cartridges ...................................................35, 286Dual Color - Non-target Area Color (System Settings) ..................................................... 227Dual Color - Source Color (System Settings) ...... 226Dual Color - Target Area Color (System Settings)..................................................................................... 226Dual - Target Area Color (System Settings)......... 227

E

Edge Erase ..........................................................85, 145Edge Erase - Bottom Edge (system settings)...... 228Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges (System Settings) ..................................................... 242Edge Erase - Left Edge (System Settings) .......... 228Edge Erase- Right Edge (System Settings) ......... 228Edge Erase - Side 2 (System Settings) ................ 228Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges (System Settings) ..................................................... 242Edge Erase - Top Edge (System Settings) .......... 228emulation ................................................................... 398Encryption Key for Confidential Data (System Settings) ..................................................... 223entering/changing stored program name.............. 154

entering text ...............................................................193erasing edges and margin shadows in the document.........................................................145erasing edges and margin shadows of the document ..........................................................85erasing the background color of documents/adjusting contrast .................................139error codes.................................................................334Error History Report ................................ 275, 276, 279Estimated Job Time (System Settings) .................223Ethernet connector .....................................................33exit cover ......................................................................37Extended Features Settings List ............................276extension flap ............................................................166

F

Failed Access Log (System Settings)....................258fast copy time ............................................................395Faults ..........................................................................279Fault Tone (System Settings) .................................199Feature Access (System Settings).........................254Feature in 2nd Column (System Settings)............241feeding method/paper capacity ..............................397feeding stage number/paper capacity ...........398, 399File Format.................................................................138Fine-tune 100% (System Settings) ........................232finisher tray ............................................................37, 38floor space when connected to the main body....399, 400, 401Folding ........................................................................115Fonts List....................................................................277Force Watermark - Copy Job (System Settings) .217Free Size ....................................................................143front cover ..............................................................33, 37fuser ..............................................................................35

G

general settings...........................................................63General Settings Tab (System Settings)...............241General Settings Tab - Features Allocation (System Settings) .....................................................225Gloss Level (System Settings) ...............................223

408

Index

H

handling error terminations ..................................... 265Hide User ID (***) (System Settings)..................... 257High Capacity Tray Unit ............................................ 36holding........................................................................ 401hole punching.................................................... 117, 401

I

Image Compression................................................. 147Image Enhancement.......................................... 76, 139Image Enhancement (System Settings) ............... 212Image Quality ...................................................... 74, 138Image Quality (System Settings) ................... 209, 211Image Quality Adjustment (System Settings) ...... 211image quality problems ........................................... 324Image Rotation ........................................................... 89Image Rotation (System Settings)......................... 229Image Rotation - Rotation Direction (System Settings) ..................................................... 229Image Shift .................................................................. 87Image Shift - Side 1 (System Settings)................. 228Image Shift - Side 2 (System Settings)................. 229Image Transfer Screen (System Settings) ........... 246Independent X-Y% ..................................................... 65Initialize Hard Disk (System Settings)................... 215inserting blank sheets between transparencies .... 99Insert Separators - Separators Tray (System Settings) ..................................................... 231interface ..................................................................... 398interposer................................................................... 401Interposer (Cover/Transparency separator tray)... 38Invert Image ................................................................ 90

J

Job Assembly............................................................ 119Job Counter Report.................................................. 277Job History Report ........................................... 275, 276Job History Report (System Settings)................... 214Job Status.......................................................... 262, 275job template............................................................... 130Job Type on Job Status screen (System Settings) ..................................................... 203

K

Keyboard Input Restriction (System Settings) ..... 221

L

Layout Adjustment..............................................80, 141left cover.................................................................35, 38Left Page then Right ................................................ 142lever .............................................................................. 35license .......................................................................... 24Lighten/Darken..............................................73, 76, 138Lighten/Darken (System Settings) ......................... 227loading documents ................................................... 128loading paper............................................................. 162loading paper in the Tray 5 (Bypass) .................... 166local access ............................................................... 283Local Machine Access (System Settings) ............ 258locking casters ............................................................ 33Login Setup/Auditron Administration (System Settings) ..................................................... 252Login Setup/Auditron Mode (System Settings).... 258Low Power Mode ........................................................ 41Low Toner Alert Tone (System Settings).............. 199

M

Machine Clock/Timers (System Settings)............. 195machine components................................................. 32Machine Configuration............................................. 270Machine Information................................................. 269Machine Ready Tone (System Settings) .............. 198Machine Status .................................................268, 269machine trouble ........................................................ 320Maintenance (System Settings) ............................. 215making 2 sided copies ............................................... 91making 2 sided copies of facing pages ................... 82making copies of documents with different settings in a single operation................... 119making copies with the image rotated vertically or horizontally................................................................... 89making enlarged/reduced copies ............................. 63making enlarged copies spread over multiple sheets .......................................................... 101making multiple copies on a single sheet ............. 115making multiple copies on one sheet .................... 102making reversed copies of images .......................... 90

Index

409

Index

manageable features and services........................ 284maximum fill line ...............................................163, 312Maximum Login Attempts (System Settings) ....... 251Maximum Number of Sets (System Settings) ...... 237maximum power ...............................................400, 401maximum power consumption................................ 397Maximum Stored Pages (System Settings) .232, 245memory capacity....................................................... 398Memory Full Procedure (System Settings)...231, 245messages...........................................................334, 344Millimeters/Inches (System Settings) .................... 221minimum space requirements ................................ 397Mixed Size Originals ..........................................84, 144Mixed Size Originals (System Settings)................ 228Mixed Size Originals - Side 2 Copy (System Settings) ..................................................... 232Multiple-Up................................................................. 100

N

Network Controller Jobs Report ............................. 276Network Controller Settings (System Settings) ... 247Network Settings (System Settings) ...................... 247Non-Copy Job Complete Tone (System Settings) ..................................................... 199non-standard size document .................................... 83Non-target Area Color................................................ 72notes and restrictions............................................... 404Notes and Restrictions on Interrupting Job .......... 404number of originals held .......................................... 398Numeric keypad .......................................................... 46

O

Offset Stacking (Finisher Tray) (System Settings)..................................................................................... 218Operation of Up/Down Buttons (System Settings)..................................................................................... 221original changing speed........................................... 398Original Orientation ............. 85, 86, 117, 125, 137, 145Original Orientation (System Settings)..........229, 242Originals ....................................................................... 92Original Size ........................................................83, 143Original Size Defaults (System Settings)......237, 243Originals Orientation ................... 87, 91, 101, 104, 111Original Type .................................................73, 74, 137Original Type (System Settings) ............................ 227

Original Type - Auto (Black) (System Settings) ...227Original Type - Auto (Non-Black) (System Settings) .....................................................227Original Type - Lightweight Originals (System Settings) .....................................................233Out of Paper Warning Tone (System Settings) ...199Output Color ................................................................69Output Color (System Settings)..............................226Output Color Recognition (System Settings) .......211Output Format .....................................................93, 147Output Orientation ....................................................114Output Orientation (System Settings)....................229Output Orientation - Auto (Single Sheet) (System Settings) .....................................................233Output Orientation - Reverse Order (System Settings) .....................................................233output resolution ...............................................394, 397Output Size Defaults (System Settings)................244outputting by specifying finishing ...........................116output tray ....................................................... 35, 37, 38output tray capacity ..................................................397overview of auditron administration .......................284overview of authentication.......................................282Overwrite Hard Disk .................................................271Overwrite Hard Disk (System Settings).................221

P

page description language ......................................397Page Number Position (Side 1) (System Settings).....................................................................................230Page Number Position (Side 2) (System Settings).....................................................................................230Page Number Position (System Settings) ............235Page Number Size (System Settings)...................230Page Number Style (System Settings)..................230paper guides ......................................................166, 167paper jams .................................................................344Paper Size (System Settings).................................204paper size/supported paper ....................................400paper size/supported papers ..........................399, 400Paper Size Settings (System Settings) .................219Paper Supply ...............................................................66paper supply (selecting the paper for copying) ......66Paper Supply (System Settings) ............................226Paper Supply - Buttons 2-5 (System Settings) ....225

410

Index

Paper Tray Attributes (System Settings) .............. 203Paper Tray Attributes During Loading (System Settings) ..................................................... 206Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Menu (System Settings) ..................................................... 206Paper Tray Priority (System Settings)................... 207Paper Tray Settings (System Settings)................. 203Paper Type (System Settings) ............................... 205Paper Type Priority (System Settings).................. 207paper types................................................................ 158Passcode (System Settings) .................................. 253Passcode Entry from Control Panel (System Settings) ..................................................... 258periodical replacement parts .................................. 286Photo .......................................................................... 137Photo & Text ............................................................. 137Photo & Text / Printed Original (System Settings)..................................................................................... 233Photo & Text Recognition (System Settings) ...... 211Photographs .............................................................. 138Photo Reproduction Level (System Settings) ...... 211plain paper (printable paper) .................................. 158poor image quality .................................................... 324Poster ......................................................................... 101power.................................................................. 400, 401Power Saver mode..................................................... 41power source............................................................. 397power switch ............................................................... 33Preset % .................................................................... 146Preset Repeat Image............................................... 115Printer Lockout Dureation (System Settings) ...... 197printing a report/list................................................... 315printing control number on background ................ 110Print Report/List........................................................ 275Print Report Button (System Settings) .................. 214problem solving......................................................... 317Proportional % ............................................................ 64punching ............................................................ 399, 400punch scrap container .................................37, 38, 303

R

Reduce/Enlarge ........................................................ 146Reduce/Enlarge (System Settings) ....................... 226Reduce/Enlarge -2nd to 3rd Buttons (System Settings) ..................................................... 241

Reduce/Enlarge - Button 3-5 (System Settings) . 225Reduce/Enlarge Presets (System Settings).............................................................................238, 244registering stored programs .................................... 152Repeat Image............................................................ 102replacing staple cartridge for C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker ............................... 298replacing toner cartridges........................................ 287replacing waste toner container ............................. 289Reports (System Settings) ...................................... 214Reset Account (System Settings) .......................... 255Reset Total Impressions (System Settings) ......... 255Reset User Accounts (System Settings)............... 256resolution ................................................................... 397right cover .................................................................... 38Right Page then Left ................................................ 142RSA BSAFE ................................................................ 24

S

Sample Set ................................................................ 122Sample Set (System Settings) ............................... 229Saturation..................................................................... 76Saturation (System Settings) ..........................227, 245saving the scanned data ......................................... 133Scan Defaults (System Settings) ........................... 242scan graduation ........................................................ 398Scan Mode Settings ................................................. 276Scan Mode Settings (System Settings) ................ 240scanner connector ...................................................... 33scanning a color photograph .................................. 138scanning both sides of a document ....................... 136scanning both sides of the document.................... 141Scanning Color ......................................................... 135scanning different size documents simultaneously...............................................................................84, 144scanning facing pages onto separate sheets ...... 142Scan Resolution........................................................ 141scan resolution ..................................................394, 398Scan Service (System Settings)............................. 245scan size .................................................................... 398screen......................................................................... 310Screen/Button Settings (System Settings) ........... 200Screen After Auto Clear (System Settings) .......... 200Screen Default (System Settings).......................... 200selecting the color to copy......................................... 69

Index

411

Index

selecting the color to scan....................................... 135selecting the document type .......................73, 74, 137selecting the paper for copying ................................ 66select the image quality ............................................. 77Serial Number ........................................................... 269Service Rep. Restricted Operation (System Settings) ..................................................... 223Settings List - Common Items ................................ 276Shadow Suppression ............................................... 140Shadow Suppression (System Settings) .............. 242Shadow Suppression Level (System Settings).... 245Shapness (System Settings) .................................. 242Sharpness.................................................................... 76Sharpness (System Settings) ................................. 227shifting the image copy position ............................... 87Sideways Images ..................................................... 137Single Color - Color (System Settings) ................. 226Sleep Mode ................................................................. 41Software Download (System Settings) ................. 223Software Options (System Settings) ..................... 216Software Version ...................................................... 270Source Color ............................................................... 71special media ............................................................ 160Specifying an image compression ratio ................ 147specifying a scanning ratio...................................... 146specifying a scanning resolution ............................ 141specifying face up or down ..................................... 114specifying the orientation of loaded documents............................85, 87, 91, 92, 101, 104, 111, 117, 125specifying the orientation of the loaded documents....................................................................................... 86specifying the original size ...................................... 143specifying the scan size for the document ............. 83Stamp Color (System Settings) .............................. 229Stamp Density (System Settings) .......................... 233Stamp Position (Side 1) (System Settings) .......... 229Stamp Position (Side 2) (System Settings) .......... 229Stamp Position (System Settings) ......................... 233Stamp Size (System Settings)................................ 229Stamp Text (System Settings)................................ 229standard paper .......................................................... 160Standard Size............................................................ 143staple ..................................................................399, 400staple cartridge .....................................................37, 38staple cartridge (C-Finisher) ................................... 385staple cartridge (D2-Finisher) ................................. 388

staple cartridges for booklet ......................................38staple cartridge storage space .................................38stapler faults ..............................................................384staples type................................................................286stapling ...............................................................117, 401Stored Programming Tone (System Settings) .....199Supplies......................................................................278supplies (consumables) ...........................................286supported OS ............................................................398supported protocol ....................................................397suppressing the document background ................140System Administrator’s Meter(System Settings).....................................................................................257System Administrator’s Passcode (System Settings) .....................................................250System Administrator Login ID (System Settings).....................................................................................249system administrator mode ...............................50, 184System Administrator Settings (System Settings).....................................................................................249System Settings List.................................................277system settings menu list ........................................187

T

Tab Margined Shift ...................................................113Tab Margin Shift - Shift Value (System Settings) .....................................................231Target Area Color .......................................................71Text .............................................................................137Text/Background Contrast (System Settings) ......217Text Default (System Settings)...............................216Text Effect Default (System Settings) ...................216Text Size (System Settings)....................................217TIFF Format (System Settings) ..............................246Time (System Settings) ...........................................195Time Zone (System Settings) .................................197toner cartridges ...................................................35, 286toner cover ...................................................................33top cover.......................................................................35Top Page then Bottom .............................................142touch screen ................................................................45transfer unit ..................................................................35Transparency Separators ..........................................99Tray 1............................................................................33Tray 2............................................................................33

412

Index

Tray 3 ........................................................................... 33Tray 4 ........................................................................... 33Tray 5 (bypass)..................................................... 33, 36Tray 5 (Bypass) - Paper Size Defaults (System Settings) ..................................................... 208Tray 5 (bypass) top cover ................................... 33, 36Tray 6 ........................................................................... 33Tray 6 top cover.......................................................... 33tray capacity ...................................................... 399, 400tray type ............................................................. 399, 400Tri-Fold output tray..................................................... 38Tri-Fold output tray button......................................... 38trouble during copying ............................................. 329troubleshooting ......................................................... 318type .............................................................394, 397, 398types of authentication............................................. 282

U

unable to copy........................................................... 329unauthenticated users ............................................. 282Upright Images ......................................................... 137User Account Billing Meter ..................................... 273User Details Setup (System Settings)................... 257UserID (System Settings) ....................................... 253UserID Characters (System Settings)................... 257User Name (System Settings)................................ 253

V

Variable % ................................................................. 146

W

warm-up time ............................................................ 394waste toner container ........................................ 35, 286waste toner container cover ..................................... 35Watermark ................................................................. 110Watermark (System Settings) ................................ 216weight ......................................................................... 397

Z

Z Fold ......................................................................... 117